Skip to main content

Full text of "Adventures in New Guinea; nine years in captivity among the Orangwoks, a tribe in the interior of New Guinea. The narrative of Louis Trégance, a French sailor"

See other formats


THE  LIBRARY 

OF 

THE  UNIVERSITY 

OF  CALIFORNIA 

LOS  ANGELES 


JAMES  DALLY 

OLD  AND  RARE  BOOKS 

Oatlands.  T^ttm^ni^ 


7 


(l.^  '^  ^::<-y  ^^ 


^^y  jc    fc  -.^    -  >A 


^vx. 


;j\ 


\  ^^\ 


fT^^^^iU^^-4-  ^^^ti^ 


PUNISHMENT    Of    CKIMINALS. 


Trontispiece, 


ADVENTURES  IN  NEW  GUINEA 

THE  NAERATIVE  OF  LOUIS  TREGANCE 
Jl  Jrench  gailm: 

NINE  YEARS  IN  CAPTIVITY  AMONG  THE  ORANGWOKS 
A  TRIBE  IN  THE  INTERIOR  OF  NEW  GDINEA 


EDITED,   AND  WITH  AN  INTRODUCTION,  BY 

THE    REV.    HENRY    CROCKER 

INCHMBEXT  OF  BI.   AITKB'S,  ■WBbZmaI,  N.Z. 


NEW  AND   CEEAPER  EDITIOH 


LONDON 

sampso:n  low,  marston  &  company 

limited 
§>\.  glimstau's  ^otlfl* 

Fettek  Lane,  Fleet  Stbeet,  E.G. 
1894 


[All  rights  reserved'] 


LONDOl'f! 

PRINTED    BY    GILBERT   AND  ^IVINGTON,     LD., 

ST.    JOHN'S     HOUSE.    CLKRKEMWELL     KOAL),     E.G. 


INTEODUCTION. 


The  following  narrative  contains  tlie  life  and 
adventures  ^f  Louis  Tregance,  while  in  cap- 
tivity among  the  Orangwoks,  a  tribe  inhabit- 
ing the  interior  of  New  Guinea,  from  which 
place  he  made  his  escape  to  the  continent  of 
Australia.  However,  it  will  be  better  that 
he  should  tell  his  own  story,  contained  in  the 
following  narrative ;  and  in  introducing  it  to 
the  public,  I  will  simply  explain  how  I  came 
to  accept  the  task  of  preparing  it  for  the 
press,  and  to  what  extent  I  am  responsible 
for  wliat  is  here  written.  In  the  beginning 
of  March  (the  7th  of  that  month,  I  find  from 
my  note-book),  I  was  called  in  to  visit  a  sick 
parishioner — a  young  man,  a  stranger  to  the 
place.  He  was  suffering  from  an  attack  of 
typhoid  fever,  and  was  exceedingly  ill.  He 
was  apparently  about  thirty-five  years  old, 
and  his  face  was  well  bronzed.  He  was  the 
mate  of  a  colonial  vessel,  and  had  been  taken 
ill   on  her  arrival  in   port.     His   friend  the 

1362038 


iv  Introduction^ 

captain,  Philip  Rigaud,  had  left  him  ander 
the  care  of  the  people  of  the  house,  and  had 
otherwise  provided  for  his  necessities.  On 
his  recovery  he  was  to  join  his  ship  at  New- 
castle, whither  she  had  sailed  about  a  week 
before.  All  this  I  learned  from  the  people 
in  whose  care  he  was  left.  I  saw  him  con- 
stantly after  this,  until  he  recovered,  and  was 
able  to  get  about.  Finding  him  an  intelli- 
gent man,  and  knowing  him  to  be  without 
friends  in  the  place,  I  invited  him  frequently 
to  come  and  spend  an  hour  or  so  with  me, 
during  his  period  of  convalescence.  As  he 
accepted  my  invitation  we  had  many  oppor- 
tunities of  conversing  together,  and  on  one 
of  these  occasions  he  told  me  something  of  his 
history.  I  immediately  saw,  as  I  thought, 
the  importance  of  his  story,  and  pressed  him 
to  put  his  adventures  upon  paper.  This  he 
ultimately  did,  and  the  following  pages  are 
the  result. 

My  part  as  editor  is  soon  explained.  I 
have  assisted  to  express  the  author's  meaning 
more  clearly,  by  making  occasional  alterations 
in  the  words  used,  and  in  the  construction  of 
his  sentences.  Generally,  however,  I  found 
his  style  clear,  and  perfectly  intelligible,  so 
that  my  labour  in  this  respect  w^as  very  slight. 

A  few  notes  have   also   been  appended. 


IiitrodiictiGn,  V 

where  tlicy  have  seemed  to  mo  to  be  required. 
As  tlie  author  had  several  sketches  of  the 
scenery  of  New  Guinea  in  his  possession,  1 
obtained  his  permission  to  have  these  copied. 
They  are  pubHshed  with  the  narrative,  and 
will  help  to  elucidate  the  narrative  itself. 
In  reference  to  these  sketches  I  must  explain, 
first,  that  the  originals  were  roughly  done ; 
they  were  evidently  the  work  of  a  self-taught 
man ;  and  that  they  were  more  or  less 
defaced,  as  they  had  been  in  his  possession 
for  a  long  time  ;  and,  lastly,  that  I  obtained 
tlie  assistance  of  my  friend  Mr.  Hull  in  pre- 
paring them  for  publication,  and  his  artistic 
skill  has  been  brought  to  bear  upon  them. 
Tregance  has  also  in  his  possession  a  sketch 
of  Lamlam.  And  althouo-h  he  was  unwilliun: 
that  this  should  be  copied,  yet  he  has  allowed 
me  to  describe  the  face  and  expression  whicli 
were  represented  in  that  portrait.  An  oval 
face,  olive-coloured — with  large,  lustrous, 
sad-looking  eyes — nose  of  the  Grecian  type 
— hair  straight  and  black,  but  not  long. 
Such  were  the  principal  features  of  the 
portrait  of  Lamlam.  The  expression  was 
pleasing,  but  melancholy.  These  remarks 
will  not,  I  hope,  be  without  interest  to  those 
frho  read  the  chapters  referring  to  the  person 
who  is  thus  described. 


v^i  Introctzichon, 

As  the  true  character  of  the  book  is  evident 
to  the  careful  reader,  it  is  unnecessary  that 
more  should  be  said  by  way  of  introduction 
to  it. 

Heney  Ceockek. 

St.  Ann's  Parsonage^, 
Were  MAI   N.Z. 


PEEFACE. 


The  clergyman  wlio  lias  been  kind  enougli  to 
revise  this  narrative  of  my  adventures  in  New 
Guinea,  lias  explained  liow  it  came  to  be 
given  to  the  world.  I  have,  therefore,  only 
to  say,  that  what  I  have  selected  from  my 
notes  and  recollections  of  the  kingdom  of 
K'ootar  is  but  a  small  portion  of  the  whole ; 
yet  it  contains,  probably,  the  most  striking 
and  interesting  facts  which  came  under  my 
knowledge.  There  are  some  subjects  on 
which  I  am  not  able  to  speak  with  that  infor- 
mation which  could  make  my  words  of  real 
value — as,  for  instance,  the  nature  of  the 
trees  and  flowers  of  the  country — the  various 
kinds  of  animals  which  are  found  in  New 
Guinea — at  best  I  can  only  describe,  and  that 
very  imperfectly,  such  things  as  came  under 
my  own  observation.  Of  those  things,  there- 
fore, I  have  said  but  little.  Of  the  habits, 
customs,  and  beliefs  of  the  people,  I  can 
speak  more  fully,  as  it  did  not  require  more 


VIII 


Preface, 


than  the  possession  of  average  intelligence  to 
enable  me  to  understand  what  I  saw  and 
lieard  during  my  nine  years'  residence  among 
tbe  Orangwoks.  Any  further  information 
tliat  lies  in  my  power  to  give  will  be  given 
with  pleasure  to  those  who  seek  it. 

Louis  Tr^gance. 

Ship  "Newcastle," 
Septemher,  1875. 


LIST  OF  ILLUSTRATIONS. 


Punishment  of  CnmiNALS 
The  Wild  Sea  .        . 
The  Capture      .         » 
]\[ap  op  New  Guinea 
The  Trul         , 


Frontispiece 

To  face      44 

„  C>Q 

»         128 

»        219 


ADVENTURES  IN  NEW  GUINEA. 


CHAPTER  I. 

I  WAS  born  in  the  Province  of  Maine,  in  a 
little  village  on  its  southern  border,  and  until 
I  was  nearly  twelve  years  old  I  knew  very 
little  of  the  world  outside  my  native  village. 
Before  I  was  seven  years  old  my  father  taught 
me  to  read,  and  this  was  all  the  schooling  I 
got  until  I  left  home,  for  my  father  died  when 
I  reached  the  age  of  seven.  He  was  a  good 
man,  I  am  sure,  for  I  can  remember  many  of 
the  lessons  he  gave  me  about  Grod  and  Christ, 
and  how  he  taught  me  always  to  do  what  I 
knew  to  be  right,  without  fearing  man. 

He  did  not  fear  the  cure  as  much  as  my 
mother  did  ;  indeed  he  did  not  fear  him  at 
all,  for  he  always  spoke  his  opinions  freely  in 
the  cure's  presence,  and  was  not  afraid  to 
argue  with  him.  My  mother,  on  the  con- 
trary, was  always  afraid  of  the  priest,  and 
would  scold  my  father,  when  they  were  alone, 
for   not   showing   greater  reverence   to   the 

u 


2  Advcnittrcs  in  New  Guinea. 

priest  of  God.  At  tliis  my  father  would 
laugli,  and  reply,  "Do  you  think,  wife,  that 
the  great  and  good  God  would  give  to  such 
men  as  our  priests  the  power  to  bless  or  curso 
His  creatures  ?  Depend  upon  it,  God  loves 
His  creatures  too  well  to  leave  them  in  the 
hands  of  any  deputy.  The  Emperor  appoints 
officers  to  take  the  oversight  of  his  empire, 
because  he  cannot  overlook  everything  him- 
self; and  see  what  mismanagement  arises 
through  the  negligence  of  his  officers.  But 
God,  who  is  everywhere,  requires  no  deputies 
to  act  for  Him.  The  cure  is  a  good  man, 
and  as  such  I  respect  him,  yet  he  has  no 
power  either  to  bless  or  curse  God's  people." 

This  was  a  long  speech  for  my  father  to 
make,  but  I  remember  it,  for  he  often  said  the 
same  thing  to  me  while  he  was  teaching  mo. 

It  was  a  great  loss  as  well  as  a  great 
sorrow  to  me  when  my  dear  father  died. 

We  had  always  been  poor,  even  when  he 
lived,  and  after  his  death  we  were  poorer 
than  ever ;  so  now  I  got  no  more  teaching, 
for  I  was  required  to  spend  all  my  time  in 
assisting  my  mother  in  various  ways. 

I  learnt  the  Paternoster  and  the  Credo 
from  the  cure,  and  this  was  all  I  knew  of 
religion,  except  what  my  father  had  taught 
me. 


Adventtt7'es  in  New  Gtiinca.  3 

During  all  tlio  week  I  was  kept  at  work, 
and  had  little  time  for  play ;  but  wlieu 
Sunday  came,  after  prayers  and  sermon  from 
the  cure,  we  all  assembled  in  the  open  park 
for  onr  games,  and  then  I  played  until  1  was 
tired  out,  after  which  I  slept  soundly  till 
Monday  came  again. 

Althongh  there  were  many  hardships  in 
that  early  part  of  my  life,  for  food  was  scarce 
at  times,  and  the  winters  were  trying  with 
such  poor  clothes  as  we  wore,  yet  I  was 
happ3',  and  1  look  back  to  those  early  years 
with  feelings  of  regret. 

When  I  was  about  ten  years  old,  I  re- 
member going  to  another  village  with  Philip 
Rigaud,  who  was  two  years  older  than  my- 
self. My  mother  had  given  me  a  holiday,  for 
she  was  also  dressed  for  one,  althongh  she 
did  not  come  with  us. 

She  told  me  to  take  a  long  day,  and  gave 
me  plenty  of  food  to  take  with  me.  So 
Philip  and  I  sauntered  along  the  high  road 
very  happy,  for  wo  were  fast  friends.  Philip 
told  me  stories  about  the  sea,  and  I  asked 
him  what  the  sea  was  like. 

"Dost  thou  not  know,  Louis?"  (My 
name  is  Louis  Trcgance.) 

"  No,  how  can  I,  Philip  ?     I  have  never 
been  away  from  our  little  village." 
B  2 


4  Adventures  in  Nezv  G^iinca. 

"  But  did  not  thy  father  teach  thee  ?  " 

Then  seemg  that  he  had  awakened  in  me 
a  painful  memory,  he  said, — 

"  Come,  Louis,  I  will  take  thee  to  a  place 
where  thou  shalt  see  the  great  ocean,  and  I 
will  tell  thee  all  that  I  know  about  it.  And 
then  we  will  go  to  Blanc,  the  old  gardener, 
who  has  travelled  on  the  sea,  and  he  will  tell 
us  stories  about  his  adventures  when  he  was 
a  sailor." 

About  seven  miles  from  our  village  there 
was  a  high  hill,  so  high  that  none  of  us 
children  ever  cared  to  climb  it,  and  from  the 
top  of  this  hill  Philip  said  the  ocean  could  be 
seen.  So,  excited  by  the  words  of  Philip,  I 
consented  to  join  him  in  climbing  to  its  top, 
that  we  might  catch  a  glimpse  of  the  new 
world  where  men  lived  in  houses  that  moved 
along  driven  by  the  wind,  without  breaking 
up,  and  that  carried  them  to  new  places 
every  day,  so  that  they  never  saw  the  same 
place  two  days  together.  After  several  hours' 
hard  walking,  broken  by  intervals  of  resting, 
we  reached  a  high  peak  of  the  hill.  So  eager 
was  I  to  see  this  new  world  of  which  Philip 
had  told  me,  that  I  rushed  up  the  last  slope 
of  the  ascent,  breathless  though  I  was  from 
our  long  journey,  and  looked  eagerly  around. 
I  could    see   nothing   but   hills,  plains,  and 


Adveniures  in  N'cw  Guinea.  5 

houses,  (I  Imd  never  imagined  them  to  be  so 
numerous,)  and  a  dull,  leaden-looking  cloud 
beyond  them  all. 

"  Alas  !  Philip,"  I  cried  to  him,  "  it  is  not 
here — the  ocean  of  which  you  spoke." 

*'  See,  my  friend,"  he  replied,  pointing  to 
the  dull  leaden  clouds,  "  see.  that  is  the  ocean, 
look,"  and,  following  the  direction  of  his 
hand,  I  gazed  intently,  and  saw  a  speck  of 
white  moving.     *'  Is  that  a  bird  ?  "  I  asked. 

"  No,  that  is  a  ship ;  she  is  moving  across 
the  water  that  you  see  so  far  away."  And 
now  I  could  perceive  that  that  which  I  had 
mistaken  for  a  cloud  was  unlike  one — that  it 
was  a  broad  plain,  and  that  a  ship  w^is 
moving  across  it.  As  I  looked,  the  sun,  wdiich 
had  been  hidden  since  we  had  been  standing 
here,  came  out,  and  then  a  sheet  of  light  il- 
luminated the  ship's  pathway,  which  became 
like  burnished  gold. 

"  See,  Philip,  how  beautiful !  "  I  exclaimed, 
in  an  ecstasy  of  delight.  My  companion  was 
charmed  with  my  enthusiasm,  for  the  sight 
was  commonplace  to  him.  He  had  lived  near 
the  sea  before  coming  to  our  village. 

This  day  was  an  eventful  one  to  me ;  for 
on  my  return  home,  very  late  and  very  tired, 
I  found  M.  Cobot,  one  of  the  villagers  that  I 
had  never  liked,  at  home  with  my  mother. 


6  Adventures  in  jYe7C'  Guinea. 

He  liad  often  been  to  our  house  lately,  and  I 
had  not  liked  him  any  the  more  on  tliafc 
account.  To-night  he  was  sitting  before  the 
fire  when  I  entered  the  room,  and  my  mother 
Tvas  standing  by  his  side,  his  arm  was  round 
her  waist,  and  she  appeared  as  if  she  had  just 
risen  from  his  knee.  She  at  once  came  to 
me,  and,  kissing  me,  said,  "  Come,  mon  fils, 
let  me  present  thee  to  thy  new  father,  M. 
Cob6t."  I  could  not  believe  I  had  heard 
aright;  I  was  filled  with  indignation,  and, 
regardless  of  consequences,  replied,  "  He  is 
not  my  father;  my  father  is  in  the  grave, 
and  I  wish  I  was  with  him."  On  hearing 
this  speech,  which  was  a  very  rude  one  (and 
I  can  only  excuse  it  by  saying  I  was  very 
tired),  my  poor  mother  burst  into  tears,  and 
my  step-father  (for  he  was  married  to  my 
mother),  rising  from  his  seat,  spoke  severely 
to  me,  threatening  me  for  my  conduct  to  my 
mother.  This  recalled  me  to  myself,  and, 
after  kissing  my  mother  and  apologizing  to 
my  step-father,  I  shrank  away  to  my  room. 
Of  course  this  was  a  bad  beginning,  and  did 
not  incline  M.  Cobot  to  look  upon  me  with 
favour. 

Next  morning,  before  anybody  was  stirring, 
I  got  up  and  walked  to  the  cemetery.  I  had 
been  accustomed  to  go  there  with  my  mother 


Adi'cnfurcs  in  Nciv  Guinea.  7 

in  the  happy  days  that  were  gone,  to  look  at 
tlie  neat  little  grave  of  my  father,  to  arrange 
the  wooden  cross  at  its  head,  and  to  lay  a  few 
flowers  on  the  green  turf.  When  I  reached 
there  my  heart  was  full  of  sorrow,  and, 
throwing  myself  on  the  cold  grave,  I  spoke 
to  my  father  and  told  him  all  the  trouble 
that  was  in  his  child's  heart.  In  a  little 
while  I  f(slt  calmer,  and  was  able  to  return 
home  in  a  more  contented  mood.  Yet  I  re- 
solved I  would  never  call  M.  Cobot  father. 
The  day  passed  off  well  enough,  for  my  step- 
father never  took  any  notice  of  me  after  the 
first  morning  salutation.  Had  he  always 
acted  in  this  way  all  would  have  been  well, 
and  I  should  have  spent  all  my  days  in  France, 
instead  of  wandering  in  strange  lands ;  but 
he  conceived  as  violent  a  dislike  to  me  as  I 
had  taken  to  him,  and  treated  me  very  cruelly 
at  times  in  spite  of  my  mother's  entreaties 
on  ray  behalf.  Two  years  were  spent  in  this 
way,  and  in  secret  intercourse  with  Philip 
and  Blanc  the  gardener,  who  fired  our  boyish 
imaginations  with  stories  of  the  sea  and 
foreign  countries  where  he  had  travelled. 
Philip  and  I  had  a  thought  in  our  hearts 
which  gradually  grew  into  action.  AYe  talked 
it  over  between  ourselves  until  we  came  to 
think  it  entirely  practicable.    We  resolved  to 


8  Advenhires  in  Neiv  Guinea. 

leave  the  village,  to  travel  to  a  sea-port,  and 
become  sailors.  This  idea  expanded  itself  in 
our  imaginations  until  we  could  no  longer 
free  ourselves  from  its  fascination.  After  a 
fresh  instance  of  M.  Cobot's  cruelty  I  arranged 
with  Philip  that  we  would  leave  on  a  certain 
morning  very  early.  This  was  in  the  autumn, 
and  then  I  went  home  to  make  preparations 
for  running  away.  Ah,  how  sorry  I  felt 
when  I  saw  my  poor  mother's  pale  face  and 
knew  I  should  leave  her  behind  me  !  I  wound 
my  arms  round  her  and  kissed  her.  This 
unwonted  instance  of  affection  surprised  her, 
but  she  took  me  into  her  arms,  and,  sitting 
down,  talked  to  me. 

*'  Louis,  I  wish  thou  wouldst  try  to  love 
]\r.  Cobdt  for  my  sake.  He  will  then  be  kind 
to  thee,  poor  chikl !  " 

My  tears  fell  fast  as  I  sobbed  out  my  reply. 
*'  I  will  always  think  of  him  kindly  for  your 
sake,  ma  mere ;  but  I  cannot  give  him  the 
love  which  belongs  to  my  own  father." 

She  sighed  as  I  kissed  her  again  and  asked 
her  forgiveness  for  all  my  acts  of  naughtiness. 
During  the  evening  M.  Cobot  was  kinder  to 
me  than  usual,  and  my  mother  took  many 
opportunities  of  expressing  her  love  for  me. 
Such  kindness  well-nigh  took  away  all  my 
resolve   to    leave    home.     Yet   I   made    my 


Adventures  in  Nc7v  Gninca.  g 

preparations,  which  were  soon  made,  and  got 
to  my  room  at  an  earlier  honr  than  usual, 
after  kissing  my  mother  with  great  affection. 
My  excitement  kept  me  awake  for  a  long 
time,  so  that  I  heard  my  mother  preparing 
for  her  bed.  She  came  to  me  before  she  went, 
and,  turning  down  the  bed-clothes,  as  she  was 
wont  to  do,  looked  at  me  and  kissed  me  again. 
I  threw  my  arms  round  her  and  returned  her 
embrace.  "  Grood  night,  Louis,  the  good 
God  keep  thee  !  "  and  so  she  left  me.  Again 
my  resolution  faltered,  and  I  had  nearly  given 
up  all  idea  of  running  off,  when  a  gentle  tap 
came  at  my  window.  This  was  the  signal 
agreed  upon  between  Philip  and  myself.  At 
once  I  sprang  up,  and,  dressing  myself 
quietly,  was  soon  in  the  presence  of  my  com- 
rade. "Courage,  mon  ami,"  said  Philip. 
*'  Soon  we  shall  be  on  the  great  ocean  and 
shall  return  laden  with  wealth.  Courage  !  " 
And  indeed  I  needed  some  strengthening  at 
this  moment,  for  the  memory  of  all  my 
mother's  love  and  of  M.  Cobdt's  new  kindness 
was  upon  me.  We  had  decided  to  keep  the 
high  road  until  daylight,  when  we  were  to 
turn  off  into  the  by-ways  and  strike  across 
the  country.  We  hoped  in  this  way  to  avoid 
any  hue  and  cry  that  might  be  raised,  and  so 
pursue  our  course    to   the    sea  unmolested. 


lO  Adventures  in  New  Guinea. 

We  walked  steadily  along  the  main  road  for 
about  four  hours,  and  made  good  progress. 
At  sunrise  we  halted  and  made  a  hearty 
breakfast  out  of  our  small  stock  of  food.  A3 
the  sun  was  well  up  in  the  heavens  before  we 
had  rested  ourselves  suflSciently,  on  resuming 
our  journey  we  decided  to  turn  off  the  mahi 
road  at  once.  This  we  did,  taking  our  route 
across  fields  and  meadows.  If  there  was  any 
pursuit  of  us,  we  thus  avoided  our  pursuers. 
It  is  not  necessary  that  I  should  relate  all 
tlie  incidents  of  those  wearisome  days. 
Suffice  it  to  say  that  we  often  wished  our- 
selves home  again,  for  we  were  frequently 
hungry  and  weary,  and  always  in  fear,  cither 
of  falling  into  the  hands  of  the  officer  of 
poHce,  or  of  those  of  our  pursuers,  and  so 
being  carried  back  ignominiously  to  our 
homes.  As  we  were  frequently  without  food, 
for  our  little  stock  lasted  us  barely  two  days, 
and  we  had  to  depend  upon  the  charity  of  the 
people  of  the  country  through  which  we  were 
passing,  and  always  had  to  lie  out  at  night, 
our  hardships  began  to  tell  upon  us,  and  w^e 
became  gaunt  and  emaciated  in  appearance 
Still  we  kept  up  under  the  hope  that  some 
day  we  should  be  at  our  destination — the 
nearest  sea-port — and  then  should  realize 
our  long-cherished  hope.     So  we  toiled  on 


Adventures  in  Nczv  Gninca.  1 1 

until,  on  tlio  tenth  dav,  when  all  heart  wa3 
passing  from  us,  Philip  suddenly  exclaimed, 
"  See,  Louis,  there  is  the  ocean ! "  And, 
indeed,  there  it  was  straight  before  us.  We 
had  just  turned  the  point  of  a  hill  which  ran 
into  the  road.  There  lay  the  ocean,  quite 
close,  not  more  than  two  or  three  miles  from 
us.  I  could  see  the  huge  waves,  wrapped  in 
their  white  foam,  rolling  upon  the  shore. 
And  now  I  could  understand  the  noise  which 
had  been  filling  my  ears  for  a  long  time.  It 
was  the  roll  of  the  surf  upon  the  beach,  and 
soon  we  saw  the  masts  of  ships,  like  a  forest, 
and  as  I  carried  my  eye  along,  houses, 
churches,  and  public  buildings,  such  as  I  had 
never  seen  before,  came  into  view. 

"  This  is  our  destination,"  said  Philip. 
"  Let  us  hasten."  In  about  an  hour  we 
entered  the  town.  The  streets  were  filled 
with  people,  but  nobody  took  any  notice  of 
us.  We  were  ashamed  of  our  poor  clothing 
and  miserable  appearance.  But  we  attracted 
no  notice  from  the  lazy  people  who  thronged 
the  streets.  We  pressed  on,  feeling  very 
hungry  and  sick,  for  we  had  been  more  than 
twenty-four  hours  without  food. 

*'  Philip,"  I  said,  "  I  must  have  something 
to  eat ;  I  am  sick." 

"  Stay,    mon   ami,    I    will   get   you  food ; 


1 2  Advenhircs  in  Nezv  Guinea, 

courage,  my  little  companion;"  and,  leaving 
me  near  a  baker's  shop,  Philip  darted  off,  and 
began  to  address  himself  to  the  passers-by. 
At  times  he  pointed  to  me,  and  one  of  the 
persons  addressed  by  him,  putting  his  hand 
in  his  pocket,  gave  him  something.  My 
comrade  rushed  back  to  me,  and,  holding  up 
a  franc  piece,  said, — 

"  Courage,  Louis,  we  shall  have  food." 
After  satisfying  our  hunger,  we  again 
pushed  on  nntil  we  reached  the  harbour.  At 
last  we  stood  upon  the  wharf  and  looked 
upon  the  vast  ships,  whose  sides  rose  many 
feet  above  the  level  of  the  planks  on  which 
we  stood.  In  order  to  reach  their  decks  we 
should  have  had  to  climb  up  a  ladder,  and  we 
had  not  the  courage  to  do  this ;  so  we  con- 
tinued walking  along  until  we  came  to  a  vessel 
whose  deck  was  flush  with  the  wharf.  Philip 
immediately  went  on  board,  and  after  some 
hesitation  I  followed  him.  The  man  to  whom 
Philip  spoke,  asking  him  to  take  us  as  cabin- 
boys,  replied,  after  looking  closely  at  each  of 
"US  in  turn, — 

"  So,  my  little  men,  you  want  to  be  sailors, 
to  leave  Belle  France,  to  tread  over  the  wide 
world  ?  Well,  as  I  happen  to  want  two  little 
men,  and  you  are  likely  boys,  I  will  take  you 
in  my  ship,  the   ViUe  du  Havre.     So  come 


Adventttrcs  in  Nciu  Giiinca.  13 

.ihoard  and  enter  your  names  on  tlio  ship's 
books,"  he  said,  with  a  smile. 

Surprised  and  overjoyed  at  this  unexpected 
answer  to  our  first  appfication,  we  hurried  to 
obey  the  direction  of  the  man,  who  turned 
out  to  be  the  first  mate.  After  some  inquiry 
as  to  our  names,  ages,  and  place  of  residence, 
we  were  sent  below  to  dinner,  which  was,  we 
thought,  like  the  dinner  of  a  king. 

The  result  of  our  application  was  that  we 
were  accepted  as  apprentices  (although  not 
registered)  on  board  of  the  Yille  dii  Havre, 
sailing  next  day  for  Liverpool.  Philip  and  I 
fell  into  our  bunks  that  night  with  feelings 
of  the  deepest  satisfaction  and  thankfulness. 


14  Advcnhires  in  Nczv  Guinea, 


CHAPTER  II. 

The  Ville  da  Havrc^  of  wliicli  the  captain 
and  the  mate  were  part-owners,  drew  out 
into  the  Channel  early  in  the  morning,  and 
made  ready  to  sail.  For  some  reason  Philip 
and  I  were  kept  below  until  we  were  well 
out  of  the  harbour,  when  we  were  allowed  to 
go  on  deck  and  expected  to  make  ourselves 
useful.  As  soon  as  we  met  the  fresh  breeze 
the  ship  began  to  dance  and  roll,  creating 
strange  sensations  in  us.  This  was  the  terrible 
mal  de  mer,  of  which  one  never  hears  enough, 
and  never  thinks  enough,  until  one  has  ex- 
perienced it  oneself.  I  cannot  say  how  I 
felt,  except  that  I  felt  sick,  and  yet  I  was 
not  sick.  My  head  began  to  ache,  my  brain 
began  to  reel  as  if  I  would  fall,  and  I  did  not 
care  to  stand  upright. 

"  Oh,  Philip  !  "  I  said,  "  this  is  dreadful ! 
What  is  the  matter  with  us  ?  "  For  he  was 
as  pale  as  one  dead. 

"  This  is  sea-sickness,  Louis.  It  will  soon 
be  over.'    Keep  a  brave  heart,  my  friend." 

Tlie  kind  mate  came  to  us,  and  told  us  to 


Adventures  in  Nezv  Guinea.  15 

lie  down  for  a  lifctle  while,  which  we  gladly 
did.  As  the  wind  increased  the  ship  rose 
and  fell  as  if  she  was  jumping  over  the 
waves,  and  then  I  felt  as  if  the  whole  of  my 
inside  was  coming  into  my  month.  I  tried 
to  cry  out  to  Philip,  but  I  vomited  the  instant 
I  opened  my  mouth.  I  continued  this 
vomiting  for  several  minutes,  which  con- 
tinued until  my  mouth  filled  with  some  bitter 
stuff,  and  after  this  I  felt  easier,  and  lay 
down.  I  continued  ill  for  several  days,  for 
we  had  a  head  wind,  and  during  all  this  time 
I  wished  myself  back  again  with  my  dear 
mother  and  M.  Cob6t.  I  often  saw  the 
village,  with  its  little  church  and  the  kind 
cure;  the  quiet  cemetery,  where  lay  my 
father;  the  park,  in  which  the  boys  and  girls 
assembled  to  dance;  and  then  my  mind 
wandered  back  to  the  fields  of  rich  corn,  the 
thick  clustering  grapes.  I  would  have  given 
anything  for  a  taste  of  the  ripe  grapes  at 
this  moment ;  and  then  I  felt  how  foolish  I 
had  been  to  leave  the  beautiful  and  quiet 
earth,  to  trust  myself  to  the  heaving,  unstable 
sea  !  I  resolved,  if  ever  I  got  back  again  to 
France,  to  content  myself  with  such  happiness 
as  she  could  afford  me. 

But  trouble  cannot  last  for  ever,  and  so 
my  sickness  and  nausea  came  to  an  end  be- 


1 6  Adventures  in  Nezv  Guinea. 

fore  we  reached  Liverpool,  wliicli  we  were 
seven  days  in  doing.  And  when  I  got  about 
on  the  deck,  climbing  the  masts,  and  helping 
to  pull  the  ropes,  I  began  again  to  like  the 
idea  of  being  a  sailor.  Still  I  was  glad  when 
Liverpool  was  reached,  and  when  we  drew 
np  by  the  side  of  the  long  wharf  to  change 
our  cargo  I  worked  hard  to  help,  for  I  felt  I 
ought  to  do  all  I  could  for  the  kind  friend 
who  had  taken  me  on  board. 

Philip  worked  better  than  I  did,  and  was 
more  useful.  He  was  stronger,  and  began 
to  look  fat  and  be  amusing  to  the  men,  with 
whom  he  was  a  great  favourite.  He  was, 
however,  always  my  friend,  and  ready  to  help 
me  or  to  defend  me. 

Sometimes  he  and  I  were  allowed  to  walk 
in  the  strange  English  city,  among  the 
crowds  of  people,  and  we  were  much 
astonished  by  all  that  we  saw.  One  day  we 
walked  a  long  way,  nntil  we  came  to  the 
country,  where  there  were  many  trees,  and 
crowds  of  people  dressed  so  well,  and  rich 
carriages,  and  beautiful  horses,  and  there 
was  gay  music  playing.  The  men  and  women, 
or  ladies  and  gentlemen,  as  Philip  called 
them,  were  so  happy  as  they  laughed  and 
talked.  One  young  lady  looked  at  us,  and 
I  saw  a  look  of  pity  pass  into  her  face.     She 


Adventures  in  New  Guinea.  1 7 

touched  tlie  arm  of  the  old  gentleman  who 
was  seated  near  her,  and  he  too  glanced  at 
us.  I  felt  ashamed  that  we  were  so  poor, 
for  our  clothes  did  not  fit  us  ;  they  had  been 
given  to  us  by  the  sailors,  and  had  been  cut 
down  to  our  size.  The  young  lady  was  like 
an  angel,  so  sweet  was  her  smile  of  pity.  I 
could  have  gazed  for  ever  on  her  face,  but 
Philip  drew  me  away,  and  soon  we  began  to 
return  on  our  route  to  the  ship,  I  feeling 
very  sad  to  think  that  I  was  shut  out  from  all 
this  world  that  I  saw  now  for  the  first  time. 

"We  could  not  understand  the  people,  but 
sometimes  they  spoke  to  us  and  pointed  after 
as — the  baser  sort,  I  mean,  the  gamins  of 
that  great  city.  Still  we  took  no  notice,  for 
we  did  not  understand  the  words  they  used, 
although  we  knew  they  were  not  complimen- 
tary to  Philip  and  myself. 

I  did  not  get  strong,  even  after  the  lapse 
of  some  weeks,  and  often  had  a  violent  pain 
in  my  head.  This  was  a  new  experience  for 
me,  for  I  had  always  been  a  healthy  boy 
when  at  home.  This  pain  continued  for 
some  days,  which  caused  me  great  sorrow, 
as  I  felt  I  was  not  doino-  enous^h  work  for 
our  kind  friend  the  mate.  The  ship  was 
nearly  full,  and  was  getting  ready  to  sail, 
this  time  for  America. 

0 


1 8  Adventures  in  New  Guinea. 

One  day  I  had  felt  worse  than  ever,  and 
was  very  weak.  Phihp  and  I  walked  in  the 
street  not  far  from  the  ship,  for  I  could  not 
w^alk  very  far,  and  as  we  walked  I  felt  a 
strange  sensation  come  over  me,  and  then  T 
fell  to  the  ground.  When  I  came  to  myself 
I  was  in  a  large  room,  very  clean  and  nice- 
looking,  and  was  lying  on  a  little  bed.  The 
large  room  was  full  of  similar  beds,  on  which 
were  lying  sick  people.  Tliiswas  a  hospital. 
I  did  not  know  this  at  once,  for  I  could  not 
understand  what  the  nurse  said  to  me  ;  and 
Philip  was  not  with  me.  Soon  a  gentleman, 
w" ell-dressed  and  quick  in  his  manner,  entered 
the  room.  This  was  the  doctor.  He  came 
at  once  to  my  bed.  After  speaking  to  the 
nurse  he  turned  to  me  and  said  in  my  own 
language, — 

"  Well,  my  little  man,  what  is  the  matter 
with  you?" 

I  replied  by  telling  him  what  befell  me 
in  the  street. 

After  examining  my  pulse  and  tongue,  he 
Slid, — 

"  You  will  not  be  able  to  go  in  your  ship 
this  voyage,  my  boy  ;  you  have  a  touch  of 
fever  upon  you,  and  you  must  stay  where 
you  are  for  some  weeks  at  least." 

Soon  after  this  I  slept,  and  when  I  awoke 


Adventures  in  Neiv  GuDua.  19 

Philip  and  tlie  mate  were  by  my  side.  They 
had  seen  the  doctor,  who  had  told  them 
about  my  fever,  so  they  said, — "  We  shan't 
see  you  for  a  long  time,  Louis,  as  we  are 
going  to  sail  in  two  days  to  America.  But 
keep  a  look  out  for  the  Ville  dio  Havre  on 
her  return,  and  ^'e  will  then  take  you  with 
us."  So  we  shook  hands,  Philip  kissing  me 
as  they  went  away.  I  was  sorry,  yet  I  was 
too  ill  to  think  much  just  now. 

Many  days  passed — some  weeks,  I  think — • 
before  I  began  to  get  better,  and  during  all 
the  time  I  was  carefully  tended  by  the  doctor 
and  the  nurse.  When  I  was  getting  better 
there  came  one  day  into  the  room  a  young 
lady.  She  came  to  visit  the  sick  and  to  read 
to  them.  I  thought  her  face  was  not  strange 
to  me,  and  when  she  came  to  my  bed  and 
smiled  on  me  I  recognized  her  again.  It 
was  the  young  lady  I  had  seen  in  the  ceme- 
tery. She  spoke  to  me  in  English,  and  on 
my  replying  in  French  that  I  did  not  under- 
stand, she  immediately  answered  me  in  my 
own  tongue. 

"  You  have  been  very  ill,  my  poor  boy  !  " 
she  said,  laying  her  hand  on  my  hot 
head. 

*'  Yes,  mademoiselle,"  I  replied  ;  "  of  fever, 
but  I  am  better  now,  thank  the  saints." 
c  2 


20  Adventures  in  New  Guinea. 

She  looked  at  me  wlien  I  said  this,  very 
earnestly  and  pityingly,  and  said,  "  I  am 
glad  you  are  thankful  that  Grod  is  making 
you  well.  It  is  He  who  has  been  so  good  to 
you.  Try  and  thank  Him  in  your  heart. 
Would  you  like  me  to  read  to  you  something 
about  Him  ?  " 

"  Yes,  yes,  mademoiselle  ;  my  father  used 
to  tell  me  about  Him  before  he  died.  But  I 
have  not  heard  about  the  good  God  since 
that  sad  event." 

Without  saying  more  the  young  lady 
opened  a  little  book  which  she  carried  in  her 
hand  and  read.  It  told  about  Jesus  re- 
ceiving sinners  and  eating  with  them,  and 
then  about  a  man  losing  one  sheep  in  the 
wilderness,  next  of  the  woman  who  lost  a 
piece  of  money,  and  last  of  the  two  sons, 
one  of  whom  went  into  a  far  country.  This, 
I  thought,  was  like  myself  running  away 
from  my  mother ;  and  when  she  read  of  the 
good  father  seeing  his  son  while  he  was  yet 
a  long  way  off,  and  being  glad  at  his  coming 
back,  I  thought  of  my  kind  mother  watching 
for  me — ready  to  welcome  me  home  again, 
and  I  wept.  The  kind  lady,  who  had  ex- 
plained all  this  story  to  me  in  French,  asked 
me  about  my  mother,  and  I  told  her  all  my 
story.     After  asking  me  where  my  mother 


AdvenUires  in  Neiv  Guinea.  21 

lived,  she  took  her  leave,  promising  to  come 
and  see  me  again. 

Three  dajs  after  the  young  lady  came 
again,  bringing  me  a  beautiful  book  with 
pictures  in  it.  The  book  was  in  French — 
the  "  Pilgrim's  Progress  " — but,  alas  !  I 
could  not  read  it,  I  could  only  read  the  little 
words,  so  she  read  some  of  the  story  to  me, 
and  left  the  book  for  me  that  I  might  look  at 
the  pictures. 

Through  all  the  kindness  I  received  I  soon 
got  well,  and  was  able  to  sit  up,  and  then  to 
get  out  into  the  air.  The  doctor  told  me  I 
should  be  able  to  leave  the  hospital  in  a  week 
or  two,  but  that  I  could  not  do  any  heavy 
work,  as  I  was  not  strong.  On  my  telling 
this  to  the  kind  lady,  she  asked  me  where  I 
thought  of  going.  I  said.  I  did  not  know, 
but  I  would  inquire  so  soon  as  I  had  left  the 
good  hospital.  Next  time  she  came  the  old 
gentleman  her  father  was  with  her,  and, 
after  questioning  me,  he  said,  "As  you  are 
ready  to  leave  the  hospital,  Louis,  I  will 
take  you  into  my  service  until  you  are 
strong,  so  you  can  come  with  me  to-day,  if 
you  like." 

I  jumped  at  this  kind  offer,  and  expressed 
my  readiness  to  go  with  him  and  the  young 
lady  at  once.     So  I  was  soon,  after  thanking 


22  Adventures  in  New  Guinea, 

tlie  good  doctor  and  the  nurse  for  tlicir 
kindness  to  me,  on  tlie  box-seat  of  tbe 
gentleman's  carriage.  As  the  gentleman  had 
provided  me  with  a  suit  of  clothes,  clean  and 
well-fitting,  I  did  not  feel  ashamed  of  my 
dress,  yet  I  felt  ashamed  to  sit  beside  the 
man  who  drove  the  carriage.  He  was  so 
fine,  yet  he  was  good  to  me,  although  I  did 
not  understand  his  words. 

After  I  had  been  at  Mr.  Cunningham's  for 
a  few  weeks,  a  letter  came  from  my  mother 
in  reply  to  one  which  Miss  Cunningham  had 
written  to  her.  My  mother  was  glad  to 
learn  that  I  had  fallen  among  kind  friends, 
and  begged  me  to  communicate  with  her. 

AYith  the  assistance  of  my  mistress,  I  sent 
a  letter  to  my  mother,  asking  her  pardon  and 
blessing.  After  the  lapse  of  many  weeks 
another  letter  came,  conveying  the  forgive- 
ness whichi  sought,  and  giving  me  permission 
to  remain  where  I  was. 

I  was  very  happy  in  the  service  of  Mr. 
Cunningham,  and  remained  with  him  four 
years.  During  this  time  I  made  progress  in 
reading  and  writing  the  English  language, 
as  well  as  in  speaking  it.  His  daughter,  my 
first  kind  friend,  allowed  me  to  be  taken  to 
the  English  church,  where  I  was  charmed  by 
the  fact  that  I  could  understand  every  word 


Advent2U'cs  in  New  Guinea.  23 

of  the  prayers,  aucl  could  liear  tbe  words  of 
the  holy  God  in  English  (for  I  had  now 
learned  to  speak  EngHsli).  I  became  a  Pro- 
testant, a  step  which  I  have  never  since 
regretted,  for  I  have  thus  been  taught  to  de- 
pend more  upon  my  conscience  than  upon  the 
minister  for  guidance,  and  this  self-direction 
promotes  a  sense  of  responsibility  which  in- 
duces one  to  read  and  think  for  oneself. 
The  habit  of  doing  so  has  been  most  valuable 
to  me  in  my  wandering  life,  and  although  I 
have  doubtless  fallen  into  many  errors,  yet  I 
have  also  been  saved  from  perpetrating 
many  serious  offences  which  I  should  have 
committed  had  I  not  learned  to  interrogate 
my  conscience  in  respect  of  all  my  duties. 

Four  years  passed  away,  and  I  never  saw 
anything  of  Philip.  For  once,  when  the 
Ville  du  Havre  came  to  Liverpool,  I  was 
away  in  the  country,  whither  the  family  had 
gone  for  a  change.  Great  was  my  disap- 
pointment when  I  heard  that  the  ship  had 
been  in,  and  that  Philip  had  been  to  Mr. 
Cunningham's  house  inquiring  for  me.  He 
left  word  that  the  Villo  dio  Havre  was 
going  to  Australia,  and  might  not  be  back 
in  port  for  two  years.  In  spite  of  my  great 
disappointment  in  missing  my  old  friend, 
I  was  very  happy  in  my  present   service,  and 


24  Adventw'cs  in  Nciv  Guinea. 

sliould  have  remained  there  had  it  not  been 
for  a  great  calamity  which  befell  my  master. 
Miss  Harriette,  for  that  was  the  young  lady's 
name,  was  always  delicate,  and  this  rendered 
her  susceptible  of  any  sickness  that  was  in- 
fectious. After  I  had  been  the  time  I  have 
mentioned  in  her  father's  service,  she  caught 
an  infectious  disease,  and,  in  spite  of  all  the 
efforts  of  the  many  skilful  medical  men  who 
were  called  in  to  attend  on  her,  she  died. 
I  felt  the  blow  very  greatly,  the  more  so  as 
she  was  not  conscious  when  she  died,  and 
had  not  been  so  for  several  days  before  the 
sad  event,  and  could  not  therefore  bid  us 
good-bye.  Ah !  dearest  and  best  of  niy 
earliest  friends,  I  have  never  ceased  to  think 
of  thee  and  to  lament  thy  early  death  !  For 
although  thou  wert  exalted  far  beyond  my 
lowly  station,  yet  thy  sympathy,  which  was 
as  an  angel's,  bridged  over  that  gulf  which 
had  been  otherwise  impassable. 

Farewell !  thou  art  now  in  the  bosom  of 
the  Jesus  thou  didst  love,  and  of  whom  thou 
didst  speak  to  thy  fallen  brother.  Farewell, 
dear  Miss  Harriette ! 

The  death  of  Miss  Harriette  led  to  many 
changes,  for  she  was  an  only  child,  and 
although  I  could  have  remained  in  the  ser- 
vice of   Mr.   Cunningham,  yet    I    was    now 


Adventures  in  New  Gtnnea.  25 

anxious  to  gefc  away  from  the  scenes  which 
continually  reminded  me  of  my  late  beloved 
mistress.  Again  the  old  longing  for  a  sea 
life  awoke  in  me,  and  I  read  eagerly  every 
book  I  came  across  which  related  to  sea-life, 
and  had  my  imagination  fired  with  the  idea 
of  foreign  travels.  I  thought  constantly  of 
Philip,  and  wondered  if  I  should  ever  meet 
him  again,  picturing  his  surprise  and  delight 
if  I  should  meet  him  in  some  distant  part  of 
the  world. 

With  such  thoughts  I  often  walked  upon 
the  wharf  and  took  a  deep  interest  in  the 
shipping.  One  afternoon,  as  I  was  thus  em- 
ployed, I  came  to  a  ship  which  was  just 
being  berthed,  and  I  stood  by  to  watch  the 
warping  operation.  Her  stern,  with  name 
clear  and  distinct,  came  round  just  where  I 
stood,  and  I  read  with  surprise  and  delight 
the  words  Vdle  du  Havre.  Immediately  I 
went  on  board,  and,  walking  straight  to  a 
fine  young  man  who  stood  upon  the  poop, 
directing  the  operation,  said,  "  Philip,  my 
friend." 

The  young  man  stared  for  a  moment,  and 
then  said,  "You  are  mistaken,  sir;  my 
name  is  Philip,  but  you  are  a  stranger  to 
me." 

*'  Philip,  mon  ami,  dost  thou  not  remem- 


26  Adventures  in  Neiv  Gtdnea, 

bar  Louis?"  I  exclaimed,  speaking  to  liim 
in  Frencli. 

Looking  eagerly  at  ms  again,  lie  imme- 
diately replied,  embracing  me, — 

"  Yes,  yes,  men  bon  Louis  ;  but  how  much 
thou  art  altered !  Thou  art  a  gentleman, 
and  see,"  he  said  proudly,  "I  am  the  second 
mate  of  the  Ville  du  Havre.  Come  to  my 
cabin,  Louis." 

Need  I  say  that,  with  my  present  feelings, 
sad  at  the  loss  of  my  late  dear  mistress, 
and  full  of  cravings  for  adventures,  I 
shipped  on  board  Philip's  vessel  when  she 
was  ready  to  sail,  confident,  though  I  was 
only  a  sailor  before  the  mast,  yet  that  Philip 
would  treat  me  as  his  old  friend,  and  smooth 
away,  as  far  as  possible,  the  difference  that 
lay  between  an  officer  and  a  common  sailor  ? 
The  ship  was  bound  to  Australia,  where  she 
had  been  for  the  last  three  years,  for  she  was 
now  the  property  of  her  captain  and  first 
mate,  who  were  their  own  agents  and 
directors. 


Adventures  in  Neiv  Gtiinea.  27 


CHAPTER  in. 

As  I  CO  aid  write  a  good  band  I  was  occa- 
sionally required  to  make  entries  in  tlie  log- 
book. This  gave  me  a  taste  for  the  kind  of 
entries  which,  appear  in  such,  nautical  diaries, 
so  I  started  one  on  my  own  account,  and 
have  since,  with  more  or  less  of  intermission, 
kept  up  the  practice  of  writing  down  the 
principal  incidents  of  my  life.  A  few  ex- 
tracts from  my  own  log-book  will  show  the 
reader  the  character  of  our  outward  voyage. 
"  Od,  19.— Left  the  Bay  of  Biscay,  after 
tumbling  about  in  it  for  seven  days,  during 
the  whole  of  which  I  was  very  sick,  often 
wishing  myself  back  with  good  Mr.  Cun- 
ningham. Could  not  imagine  what  tempted 
me  to  leave  the  comfort  of  shiore-life  for  the 
sea.  Now,  however,  that  I  am  getting 
well,  and  that  we  have  a  bright  sun  and  a 
clear  sky,  with  a  fresh  wind  abaft,  I  begin 
to  oDJoy  tbe  sea.  The  motion  is  pleasant, 
and  it  amuses  me  to  watch  the  sea-birds 
sailing    along    to     outstrip    the     VilU     du 


28  Adventures  in  Neiv  Guinea. 

"  Oct.  22.— Still  a  fair  wind.  The  man  at 
the  mast-head  sung  out  early  this  morning, 
'  Sail  ho/  and,  looking  to  leeward,  saw  the 
white  sail  of  a  vessel  crossing  our  course. 
Made  her  out  a  barque-rigged  ship.  In  a 
couple  of  hours,  as  she  was  directly  on  our 
course,  we  hailed  her.  She  proved  to  be 
the  New  Jersey,  bound  for  London." 

"  Nov.  3. — We  are  now  in  the  tropics,  and 
the  weather  is  insufferable  during  the  day, 
although  it  is  sometimes  pleasanter  at  night. 
We  lay  becalmed  for  several  days,  and  as 
there  was  a  large  ship  in  the  same  condition 
a  few  miles  off,  we  obtained  the  captain's 
permission  to  visit  her.  She  was  the  Clyde, 
from  Melbourne,  homeward  bound,  with  a 
cargo  of  wool  and  gold.  Hearing  that  she 
was  a  gold  ship,  I  made  inquiries  as  to  where 
and  how  the  gold  was  obtained,  and  learned 
that  there  were  '  diggings '  in  Australia, 
where  men  congregated  in  large  numbers  to 
gather  the  precious  metal.  In  the  afternoon 
several  of  the  men  had  a  bathe,  one  of  them 
swimming  a  long  way  from  the  ship.  Shortly 
after  his  return  to  the  vessel  a  large  shark 
was  seen  to  swim  round  her — a  narrow 
escape  for  the  Swede." 

^^  Nov.  30. — Nearing  the  Cape;  weather 
terribly    cold,    and   coming   in   icy,    cutting 


Adventures  in  New  Guinea.  29 

squalls  from  the  south.  Ship  pitching  and 
tossing  very  much — feel  sick  again." 

"  Dec.  2. — Yesterday  we  saw  several  tall 
peaks,  which  Philip  told  me  were  icebergs. 
They  glittered  when  the  rays  of  the  sun 
fell  on  them  once  or  twice.  Cold  still  con- 
tinues, and  the  waves  very  heavy." 

"Dec.  3. — Last  night  a  heavy  sea  struck 
the  ship,  and  tons  of  water  came  aboard.  I 
thought  she  had  struck  on  a  reef,  for  she 
trembled  through  every  timber.  The  water 
poured  down  the  open  hatchway  and  drenched 
us.  On  reaching  the  deck,  a  wild  scene  pre- 
sented itself.  We  were  driving  along  over  a 
stormy  sea,  which  rose  and  fell  fearfully,  the 
ship  bobbing  up  and  down  like  a  piece  of 
cork  on  its  surface.  Two  men  were  at 
the  wheel,  which  required  all  their  united 
strength  to  direct  it.  A  full  moon,  occa- 
sionally hidden  by  the  angry-looking  clouds, 
showed  us  the  state  of  the  sea  around  us. 
It  was  a  fearful  sight ;  yet  no  one  seemed  to 
be  afraid,  everything  went  on  as  calmly  as  if 
we  had  a  fair  wind.  After  contemplating 
the  scene  for  a  time,  the  cold  drove  me  back 
again  to  bed,  although  I  did  not  sleep.  To- 
day the  sea  has  subsided,  and  we  are  going 
under  easy  canvas." 

*'  Dec.  30. — Philip  says  we  shall  soon  reach 


30  Adventures  in  New  Guinea* 

Melbourne;  that  we  Lave  liad  a  quick 
passage.  We  liave  passed  several  sliips  to- 
day. The  roadway  is  thronged  with  passen- 
gers, as  Philip  said,  because  we  are  nearing 
the  city.  ]ndeed  I  hope  so.  It  was  quite 
hot  to-day." 

^'^  Jan.  5. — ^  Land  ho'  early  this  morning. 
The  captain  was  anxious  to  give  King's 
Island  a  wide  berth,  several  ships  having 
been  lost  in  that  locality  lately.  We  soon 
gained  on  the  land,  which  had  been  seen 
from  the  mast-head,  and  passed  it  on  our 
starboard.  It  was  a  rocky  islet.  With  the 
help  of  the  glass  we  saw  several  seals  lying 
upon  it,  sunning  themselves.  We  shall  be 
at  the  'Heads'  by  night,  Philip  says,  and 
shall  lie  off  until  morning." 

After  the  entry  last  quoted  we  entered  the 
narrow  mouth  of  Hobson's  Bay  under  the 
guidance  of  a  pilot,  who  came  off  to  us  in  a 
little  schooner,  and  took  charge  of  the 
vessel.  After  entering  the  "  Heads "  we 
passed  into  a  large  bay,  almost  an  inland  sea, 
for  we  lost  sight  of  the  land  again.  A  few 
hours,  however,  brought  us  in  sight  of  the 
forest  of  spars  which  showed  us  the  direction 
of  the  town,  for  beyond  these  were  Mel- 
bourne and  its  suburbs.  A  berth  at  the 
Sandridge  Pier  was  vacant,  so  wo  were  laid 


Adventures  hi  Neiv  Guinea.  3 1 

up  alongside  by  two  o'clock,  glad  to  find 
ourselves  safe  in  port.  The  lieat  was  ter- 
rible ;  the  atmosphere  like  the  breath  of  an 
oven.  Everybody  looked  done  up,  and  moved 
about  with  lazy  steps.  However,  here  I  was 
at  last,  on  the  other  side  of  the  world,  sur- 
prised to  find  so  large  and  fine  a  city  where, 
only  a  few  years  ago,  there  was  nothing  but 
aboriginal  Mia-Mias  and  kangaroo. 


32  Adventures  in  New  Guinea. 


CHAPTER  IV. 

Before  we  sailed  again,  Philip  and  myself, 
with  another  sailor,  got  permission  to  go  up 
to  the  gold-field  town,  Ballarat.  We  went 
up  by  train,  and  arrived  about  four  o'clock  in 
the  afternoon.  Here  we  saw  holes  hundreds 
of  feet  deep,  out  of  which  the  precious  gold 
was  dug.  These  were  quartz  mines,  and  the 
gold  was  separated  from  the  stones  by  heavy 
stampers,  which  could  be  heard  beating  the 
stones  half  a  mile  off.  The  gold  was  after- 
wards collected  by  means  of  quicksilver  with, 
which  it  was  mixed, — being  then  called 
Amalgam.  The  manager  of  one  of  the  mines 
showed  us  several  bars  of  amalgam  weighing 
over  three  hundred  pounds,  one  half  of  this 
being  gold;  and  this  was  obtained  in  one 
week.  The  place  where  it  was  obtained  was 
called  Poverty  Reef,  by  way  of  pleasant 
satire,  I  suppose;  although  one  of  the  men 
told  us  that  the  claim  had  been  worked  for 
years  before  any  gold  had  been  obtained 
from  it. 

After  seeing  these  deep  mines,  we  were 


Adventures  in  New  Guinea.  33 

taken  to  another  gold-field  about  twelve  miles 
off,  and  here  the  holes  were  not  so  deep, — not 
more  than  twenty  feet.  Here  too  the  gold  was 
found  in  the  earth,  not  mixed  with  the  quartz, 
and  it  was  separated  from  the  earth  by  being 
first  "puddled"  in  a  tub  and  then  rocked  in 
a  cradle,  while  a  plentiful  supply  of  water 
was  poured  over  the  soil  which  was  being 
sifted  in  the  cradle.  The  fine  gold  was  thus 
carried  into  the  last  compartment  mixed  with 
the  finest  earth.  This  golden  sand,  for  such  it 
looked,  was  then  put  into  a  dish  and  mixed  with 
water,  shaken  carefully  until  the  water,  which 
was  continually  poured  off,  had  carried  every 
particle  of  the  sand  away,  and  nothing  but 
the  yellow  gold  remained  in  the  bottom  of  the 
dish.  There  was  a  pound  weight  of  gold  in 
the  dish  which  was  shown  to  us  after  watch- 
ing the  various  operations  which  I  have  de- 
scribed. This  was  worth  about  50Z.,  and  was 
dug  out  by  three  men  in  less  than  a  week. 

After  seeing  these  things,  I  often  thought 
I  should  like  to  be  a  dig'^er. 

On  our  return  from  the  diggings,  we  found 
the  ship  was  almost  ready  to  sail.  This  time 
she  was  chartered  to  the  Chinese  ports. 

And  thus  for  fully  three  years,  Philip  and 
I  sailed  together  in  the  Y'dle  dii  Ilavre^ 
visiting  all  the  ports  in  the  southern  hemi- 

D 


34  Adventures  in  Neiv  G^dnea. 

sphere.  At  the  end  of  this  period  he  became 
first  mate,  as  the  captain  had  retired,  going 
home  to  France  to  settle,  leaving  his  former 
first  mate  in  command  of  his  vessel.  I  too 
had  been  promoted,  through  Philip's  influence, 
to  the  poop,  and  was  called  third  mate,  being 
now  twenty  years  old,  and  a  good  sailor,  so 
they  were  kind  enough  to  say. 

At  this  time  a  little  difference  arose  between 
Philip  and  myself  which  caused  a  separation 
between  us  for  a  time.  He  knew  that  I  had 
become  a  Protestant,  yet  the  fact  had  never 
occasioned  any  difference  between  us,  for  the 
change  did  not  show  itself  in  anything  that  I 
did;  sailors  have  such  few  opportunities  of 
being  religious,  and  of  knowing  the  difference 
which  religions  make  among  men !  When 
any  minister  came  on  board  to  speak  to  us 
we  all  listened  to  him  without  asking  whether 
he  was  Protestant  or  Catholic,  and  so  it  was 
that  any  change  of  religion  did  not  affect  the 
friendship  of  Philip  and  myself,  until  the 
occasion  to  which  I  now  refer  arose. 

We  had  been  lying  in  Hobson's  Bay  for  a 
long  time  idle,  for  this  was  the  dull  season, 
and  I  had  been  allowed  ashore  a  good  deal. 
On  the  occasion  of  one  of  these  holidays  I 
consented  to  become  a  mason,  and  was  ad- 
mitted into   the  English  Constitution.     On 


Adventures  in  Nciu  Guinea.  35 

rny  going  on  board  again,  I  told  Philip  Avliat 
I  had  done.  Ho  became  angry,  and  said  that 
the  Catholic  Church  had  forbidden  me  to 
become  a  mason. 

(Philip  was  now  more  attentive  to  religion 
than  he  had  formerly  been.) 

"  But  I  do  not  belong  to  the  Catholic 
Church,  Philip.  I  am  a  Protestant,  and  can 
do  as  I  like." 

"But,  Louis,"  he  cried  out  angrily,  "you 
liave  no  right  to  leave  the  Church  of  your 
fathers,  in  which  you  were  born  and  baptized  ! 
Dost  thou  not  remember  the  little  cemetery 
where  thy  father  sleeps  ?  Wouldst  thou  not 
be  laid  with  him  when  thou  diest?" 

"  My  father  was  not  a  Catholic  except  in 
name,  and  at  any  rate  I  am  now  a  Protestant, 
and  intend  to  live  and  die  in  that  faith.  I  am 
also  a  mason,  and  do  not  care  what  the  priests, 
who  are  no  better  than  ourselves,  say  igno- 
rantly  against  the  masons.  They  tell  lies 
about  them,  I  know;  for  all  masons  believe 
in  God,  and  must  believe  in  Hioa.  Yet  the 
priests  say  that  the  masons  are  atheists." 

This  made  Philip  more  angry,  and  I  do 
not  care  to  write  down  all  that  my  friend 
said  to  me. 

j^.t  last  I  replied,  "I  will  leave  you,  Philip ;  I 
will  not  stay  to  be  spoken  to  in  this  manner." 
D  2 


36  AdventtLves  in  New  Giiinea. 

And  so  I  got  my  discharge  from  t"he 
Ville  dii  Havre,  and  started  for  the  dig- 
gings. 

Soon  after  I  had  arrived  at  the  diggings 
)3eyond  Ballarat,  where  we  had  seen  the  men 
washing  out  the  pound  of  gold,  I  saw  by  the 
pajDers  that  the  Ville  du  Havre  had  sailed 
for  New  Caledonia,  and  would  probably  go 
into  California  before  she  returned  to  the 
Melbourne  port. 

At  this  I  felt  sad,  and  wished  that  I  was 
with  my  Philip  again. 

Yet  I  would  not  give  up  being  a  mason, 
but  resolved  to  attend  all  their  meetings, 
that  I  might  learn  as  much  as  I  could  about 
their  principles. 

The  diggings  to  which  I  had  come  were 
altered  for  the  worse.  The  gold  supply  was 
exhausted,  and  the  diggers  looked  poor. 
Many  of  them  were  glad  to  work  whole  days 
for  a  few  specks  of  the  bright  m.etal.  So  I 
did  not  stay  long  in  this  place,  but  moved 
away  to  a  new  diggings,  where  a  great  many 
miners  were  assembling.  This  place  was 
called  a  "  rush,"  and  at  first  a  good  deal  of 
gold  was  obtained  by  those  who  were  for- 
tunate enough  to  get  "  claims "  on  the 
"lead."  But  others  who  were  not  on  the 
"  line  of  gold  "  worked  to  no  purpose  week 


Adventures  in  Nciv  Guinea,         ^y 

after  week.  It  was  very  tantalizing  to 
see  men  in  tlie  next  hole  getting  gold  in 
great  quantities,  washing  it  out  of  their 
tubs  in  pounds,  and  then  to  work  and 
drive  in  your  own  hole,  only  a  few  feet 
away,  and  yet  get  nothing  for  all  your 
pains. 

At  last  I  gave  up  digging  and  went  back 
to  Ballarat.  Here,  after  much  trouble,  I  got 
a  situation  as  groom  in  a  gentleman's  house- 
hold. And  this  place  I  got  because  I  was  a 
mason,  for  my  master  belonged  to  that  order. 
Here  I  remained  for  more  than  six  months. 
One  day  I  saw  by  the  papers  that  the  Vllle 
du  Havre  had  arrived  under  the  command 
of  Philip  E,igaud.  The  former  captain  was 
ill.  How  my  heart  jumped,  and  1  resolved 
to  go  and  see  my  old  friend  again ;  for  all 
the  anger  had  died  out  of  my  heart  so  soon 
as  I  had  reached  the  diggings.  I  was  to  stay 
with  my  master  for  another  week,  and  then  I 
could  leave.  Well,  before  the  week  was  up  I 
was  ridiug  one  of  my  master's  horses  in  the 
principal  street,  when  I  saw  a  captain  (we 
sailors  can  tell  a  captain  by  his  dress  and 
manner)  driving  in  a  cab  from  the  railway 
station.  I  looked  at  him  a  second  time,  and 
saw  that  it  was  Philip.  I  rode  after  him  and 
called  ont.     He  at  once  stopped  his  cab  and 


33  Advenhires  in  Nciv  Giu'iica, 

got  down,  for  lie  knew  mo.  "  I  was  coming 
to  look  for  thee,  Louis,"  were  the  first  words 
he  spoke,  and  regardless  of  by-standers,  he 
embraced  me,  for  I  had  jumped  off  my  horse. 
*'  My  heart  has  been  sore  since  we  parted, 
Louis,  for  I  was  wrong  to  speak  to  thee  as  I 
did  about  thy  religion.  Thou  wilt  forgive 
me?"  It  w^as  my  time  to  ask  forgiveness 
for  my  hasty  temper  and  hot  words.  And  so 
we  were  reconciled.  "Thou  mayest  remain 
a  mason,  and  I  will  become  one  too,  so  long 
as  I  do  not  lose  my  friend."  I  returned  with 
Philip  to  the  Ville  du  Havre,  and  was  installed 
as  second  mate,  for  the  former  second  mate 
had  left. 

And  now  I  was  liappy  again,  and  deter- 
mined to  stick  to  the  sea.  It  had  been 
resolved  to  send  the  Ville  du  Havre  on  an 
adventurous  voyage  to  New  Gruinea,  for 
there  was  at  this  time  much  talk  about  that 
island.  Philip  was  to  command,  for  the 
former  captain  had  resolved  to  settle  in 
Melbourne,  and  I  was  to  go  as  second  mate. 
AVe  were  all  in  high  spirits  at  the  prospect 
of  our  voyage,  for  although  there  was  some 
amount  of  danger,  yet  only  enough  to  make 
our  voyage  adventurous,  and  we  knew  that 
we  should  have  opportunities  of  making  much 
money  in  trading  with  the  natives.     At  the 


Adventures  in  New  Guinea.  39 

same  time  our  pay  was  increased  by  the 
owners  of  the  vessel,  who  did  not  forbid 
our  taking  little  fancy  things  for  trading 
purposes. 


40  Adventures  in  Neiv  Guinea, 


CHAPTER  y. 

As  the  step  I  was  now  taking  was  so  full  of 
strange  consequences  to  myself,  I  like  to 
dwell  upon  every  event  connected  with  it. 
I  had,  while  Miss  Cunningham  lived,  written 
to  my  mother  very  frequently,  and  had  heard 
occasionally  from  her.  But  since  my  life  in 
the  southern  world  I  had  failed  to  write  to 
her  more  than  a  few  letters.  It  had  been 
my  custom,  which  I  owed  to  the  influence 
of  my  mistress,  to  send  a  few  pounds  every 
year  to  my  mother.  I  had  even  done  this 
since  leaving  Europe,  and  now  that  I  was 
embarking  upon  what  I  could  not  help  feel- 
ing was  a  perilous  voyage,  I  wrote  to  my 
mother  a  long  letter,  telling  her  where  I  w^as 
going,  and  enclosing  her  5/.  In  common 
with  the  other  sailors,  I  took  with  me  some 
rolls  of  bright-coloured  stuffs,  some  tobacco 
and  pipes,  bright  pieces  of  metal,  some 
whistles,  and  other  fancy  things  (including 
even  dolls)  which  I  thought  would  be  useful 
in  bartering  with  the  savages.     I  took  also 


,■■■■<. 

Adventures  in  New  Guinea.  4 1 

some  picture-books,  among  which  was  the 
"  Pilgrim's  Progress,"  given  me  years  ago 
by  Miss  Cunningham. 

Late  in  the  month  of  March  we  cleared 
the  "  Heads  "  on  onr  adventurous  expedition. 
As  it  was  our  intention  to  round  South-East 
Cape,  thinking  we  might  open  out  a  trade 
with  the  inhabitants  of  the  Archipelago  with 
greater  safety  than  with  those  of  the  main- 
land, we  hugged  the  Australian  coast  until 
we  reached  Morton  Bay.  We  then  ran  due 
north  for  several  days,  but  had  baffling 
winds.  The  barometer  began  to  fall  rapidly; 
a  change  in  the  weather  was  evident.  At 
first  we  thought  we  had  escaped  the  equi- 
noctial gales;  but  the  falling  of  the  barometer 
warned  us  that  we  had  not  done  so.  As  we 
had  still  nearly  six  hundred  miles  to  run,  and 
were  anxious  not  to  lose  time,  we  kept  on 
under  light  canvas  all  the  night  following; 
but  maintained  a  smart  look-out.  Next  day 
the  storm  broke  upon  us,  and  compelled  us 
to  lay-to,  after  trying  to  run  with  close-reefed 
topsails.  This  storm  tried  us  severely,  heavy 
masses  of  water  came  tumbling  on  board, 
sweeping  the  decks  fore  and  aft,  and  carry- 
ing off  our  live  stock.  During  the  day  we 
were  exceedingly  anxious,  and  as  night 
approached  our  anxiety  increased  ;    for  the 


42  AdventiLves  in  Nciv  G^iinea. 

violen3e  of  the  wind  was  so  great  that  we 
were  perfectly  helpless,  lying  like  a  log  npon 
the  water,  which  continned  to  make  breaches 
over  us.  We  all  wished  earnestly  for  the 
day,  and  when  the  light  came  the  wind  began 
to  subside,  so  that  we  were  now  in  hopes  of 
our  being  able  to  weather  the  storm.  Before 
night  the  water  had  become  comparatively 
calm,  and  we  began  to  overhaul  our  ship, 
which  presented  a  pitiable  sight.  The  bul- 
warks were  smashed,  the  stanchions  of  the 
main  cabin  wrenched,  and  the  captain's  cabin 
broken  up.  The  good  old  ship  had  borne  up 
well,  but  she  had  received  a  severe  handling. 
Another  sucli  storm  would  finish  her.  It 
was  now  debated  whether  we  should  return 
to  Morton  Bay  and  repair,  or  whether  we 
should  continue  on  our  voyage  after  giving 
the  vessel  a  slight  overhaul  with  such  ap- 
pliances as  we  had.  We  determined  on  the 
latter  course,  as  we  were  only  five  hundred 
miles  from  South-East  Cape,  and  were  all 
enthusiastic  about  our  destination.  I  think 
now  it  would  have  been  better  if  we  had 
returned,  but  at  that  time  I  was — like  the 
others — too  eager  to  reach  New  Guinea  to 
allow  of  the  whisperings  of  common  sense. 

So  all  hands  set  to  work  vigorously,  and 
in    a    couple  of    days    the   YiUe   du    ITavre 


Adventures  in  Nciv  Guinea.  43 

looked  like  herself  again.  On  tlie  fourth  day 
Ave  were  nnder  sail  for  the  Archipelago,  all 
sanguine  and  hopeful.  I  forgot  to  say  that 
one  of  our  three  boats  had  been  smashed  and 
carried  away  in  the  storm.  Yet  the  two  that 
remained  were  but  little  injured,  and  were 
soon  repaired.  Our  glass  warned  us  that  the 
weather  was  still  unsettled. 

In  three  days  we  sighted  a  high  range  of 
mountains,  which  we  made  out  to  be  the 
Owen-Staoley  Mountains,  running  north  and 
south  from  South-East  Cape.  This  showed 
us  that  we  were  too  much  to  the  west  to 
reach  the  Archipelago  on  the  eastern  side  of 
the  island,  so  we  corrected  our  bearings,  and 
made  ourselves  snug  for  the  night.  The 
weather  looked  dirty,  and  the  glass  began  to 
fall  rapidly;  as  the  wind  was  from  the  south, 
and  we  had  plenty  of  sea-room,  and  could, 
with  such  a  wind,  make  a  good  offing  at  any 
time,  we  kept  on  our  course  under  light  can- 
vas, expecting  by  morning  to  be  within  twenty 
miles  of  the  Cape.  The  wind  increased  to  a 
gale  and  blew  all  night  without  intermission. 
When  morning  broke  there  was  a  heavy  sea 
on,  the  Avind  still  rising.  We  were,  more- 
over, close  upon  several  of  the  islets  of  the 
Archipelago.  Tliis  determined  us  to  get 
away  from  the  coast,  so  we  put  the  helm  up, 


44  Adventures  in  New  Grtinea. 

and,  turning  our  head  east-nortH-east,  stood 
away.  We  had  not  held  on  our  new  course 
more  than  an  hour  when  the  wind  died  away, 
only  to  begin  again  with  renewed  yiolence 
from  the  sou'-sou'-west.  We  were  in  a  posi- 
tion of  extreme  danger,  for  the  Vllle  dit 
Havre  had  been  greatly  shaken  by  the 
former  gale;  her  masts,  we  now  found,  had 
yielded  to  the  severe  strains  which  had  been 
put  on  them,  so  we  kept  beating  off  and  on 
all  the  day;  but  we  could  not  get  clear  of 
the  coast,  the  hurricane  was  too  violent.  I 
watched  Philip's  anxious  face,  and  knew  that 
our  case  was  desperate  unless  the  wind  should 
change.  Night  fell,  but  no  change  came,  and 
I  now  felt  that  our  position  was  hopeless,  for 
we  were  drifting  shoreward,  and  had  been  so 
drifting  during  the  day.  We  could  see, 
before  night  fell  in  upon  us,  broken  water 
not  more  than  two  or  three  miles  from  us. 
When  the  day  closed  I  do  not  think  there 
was  a  single  man  who  expected  to  see  the 
light  of  another  day.  Still  we  took  some 
refreshment  and  stood  to  our  posts,  not 
knowing  what  chances  might  arise  on  our 
behalf.  The  dark  waves  rolled  in  upon  the 
ship,  washing  our  decks  clean,  and  driving 
us  all  to  shelter  from  the  pitiless  cold.  The 
wind  howled  and  whistled  through  the  rig- 


Adventures  m  New  Guinea.  45 

ging,  the  ship  creaked  and  groaned  like  a 
wounded  creature,  and  trembled  under  tbe 
blows  dealt  by  the  lieavy  waves.  I  bad  never 
experienced  such  a  storm.  At  this  time  tbo 
awful  cry,  so  terrible  to  a  sailor's  ears,  arose 
above  the  din  of  tlie  elements,  "  Breakers  on 
the  port-bow  !  "  We  were  driving  helplessly 
on  to  the  rocks,  which  were  ready  to  engulf 
us.  To  think  of  anchoring  was  useless  ;  yet, 
as  a  last  resource,  we  determined  to  try  our 
anchors.  Just  as  we  were  making  ready,  the 
wind  began  to  lull ;  there  was  evidently  and 
markedly  a  change.  Philip  now  resolved  to 
wear  the  ship,  and  gave  orders  to  bring  her 
about.  We  all  sprang  to  our  posts  with 
renewed  hope  in  our  breasts.  The  ship, 
slowly  answering  to  her  helm,  came  round. 
It  was  a  perilous  undertaking,  for  we  could 
see,  even  in  the  darkness,  the  white  surf 
seething  and  rushing  over  the  hidden  reef. 
We  had  passed  the  point  of  danger,  and 
began  to  breathe  more  freely,  and  to  con- 
gratulate ourselves  on  our  narrow  escape, 
when  a  terrible  shock  sent  the  masts  over 
the  starboard,  killing  the  first  mate,  and 
casting  us  all  sprawling  upon  the  deck.  She 
had  struck  on  another  reef,  and  was  fast 
embedded  on  the  rock.  Now  a  wild  scene 
began.     The  boats  were  safe  and  ready  for 


46  Adventures  in  New  Guinea. 

use,  Laving  a  supply  of  food  in  tliem.  As 
the  sea  was  sweeping  over  tlie  YIUq  da 
Havre  threatening  to  swallow  her  up  every 
moment,  Philip  resolved  to  launch  the  boats 
at  once.  The  wind  was  certainly  moderating, 
3^et  the  sea  was  running  mountains  high.  lb 
required  all  the  skill  of  our  most  experienced 
seamen,  exercised  under  Philip's  guidance,  to 
launch  our  boats  safely ;  yet  this  was  accom- 
plished, and  they  rode  nobly  on  the  wild  water. 
As  it  was  impossible  that  the  ship  could  hold 
together  for  long,  no  time  was  lost  in  trans- 
ferring the  crew  to  the  little  boats,  which 
rode  so  bravely  on  the  water.  They  looked 
so  small,  and  yet  they  were  safer  than  the 
great  ship,  whicli  thumped  heavily  every  now 
and  then  on  the  rocks.  Philip  came,  and, 
embracing  me,  said,  "  Farewell,  Louis,  my 
companion  and  friend ;  may  the  good  God 
keep  thee  in  safety.  We  may  never  meet 
again  in  this  world,  for  I  must  command  the 
one  and  thou  the  other  boat.  I  wish  thou 
couldst  come  with  me,  but  duty  separates  us, 
my  friend.  Farewell ;"  and,  kissing  each 
other,  we  parted. 

Philip's  men  were  impatient,  for  they  were 
ready  to  cast  ofiP,  and  as  he  lowered  himself 
into  the  boat  they  cast  off,  the  rope  and  were 
swept  by  the  returning  wave  fully  thirty  feet 


Adventures  in  New  Guinea.  47 

from  the  ship.  At  the  same  instant  a  huge 
wave,  all  muffled  in  foam,  came  roaring  and 
tumlihng,  and  broke  over  the  ship.  We  held 
on  for  dear  hfe.  When  the  water  cleared 
Philip's  boat  was  gone ;  swallowed  up  by  the 
devouring  sea.  Our  boat,  too,  was  swept 
away;  we  were  left  to  the  mercy  of  the 
crazy  hull  which  alone  stood  between  us  and 
death. 

Alas,  Philip,  companion  of  my  youth,  and 
friend  of  my  manhood  !  Alas,  for  thee !  I 
shall  see  thee  not  again.  My  heart  is  sad, 
and  my  tears  flow  for  thee.  Soon  shall  I  be 
with  thee. 

Such  were  my  thoughts  as  I  stood  upon 
the  groaning  deck  of  the  Vllh  dii  Havre. 

The  wind  continued  to  fall  rapidly.  The 
ship,  too,  remained  in  her  position.  We 
might  be  safe  till  day  broke.  So  at  least  we 
hoped.  Five  of  us  thus  waited  anxiously  for 
the  light  of  the  day,  and,  as  the  sea  subsided, 
began  to  wait  hopefully.  After  all,  we  might 
escape.  We  certainly  encouraged  one  another 
with  the  hope  of  escaping  the  fate  of  our 
companions, 


a.8  Advenhires  in  New  Guiitea, 


CHAPTER  VI. 

The  sun  rose  brilliantly  over  a  heaving  ocean. 
Altliougli  tlie  wind  was  down,  yet  the  sea 
still  heaved  and  swelled,  and  its  waves  rolled 
in  upon  the  shore  with  a  deafening  sound. 
The  white  spray  almost  hid  the  shore  from 
our  view,  which  was  about  one  mile  distant. 
A  small  island  lay  some  half-mile  nearer  to 
us,  and  it  was  from  this  elevation  that  the 
sunken  rocks  on  which  we  had  struck  sprang. 
As  the  ship,  although  at  present  giving  us 
good  support,  was  evidently  breaking  up,  we 
who  remained  at  once  began  to  make  prepa- 
rations for  constructing  a  raft.  About  mid- 
day we  were  ready,  and  were  busy  lading  our 
raft  with  various  necessaries,  when  there 
came  upon  us  suddenly  several  canoes  full  of 
savages,  and  before  we  could  offer  any  re- 
sistance a  score  of  them,  armed  with  spears, 
clubs,  bows,  and  arrows,  were  on  board. 
"We  thought  it  better  to  surrender  at  dis- 
cretion, and  were,  on  doing  so,  transferred 
to  the  canoe  of  one  who  seemed  to  be  a  chief 


Adventures  in  New  Guinea.  49 

—a  tall,  black-looking  negro,  with  hair  like 
a  mop  all  over  his  head.  He  was  a  most 
repulsive-looking  savage.  After  ransacking 
the  ship,  they  took  the  raft  in  tow  and  made 
for  the  shore.  Other  canoes  were  to  be  seen 
coming  on  rapidly,  their  crews  shouting  and 
gesticulating  like  maniacs.  When  they  saw 
the  five  white  men  in  their  chief's  canoe  their 
astonishment  was  unbounded.  Our  party 
kept  away  to  the  north-west,  and  so  avoided 
the  high  cliffs  which  we  had  seen  from  the 
ship.  In  about  half  an  hour  the  chief's  boat 
approached  the  mouth  of  a  small  bay  which 
discovered  itself  suddenly.  As  we  turned 
into  this  bay,  I  well  remember  how  the  scene 
which  rose  before  us  awakened  within  me, 
even  in  my  present  condition,  feelings  of 
admiration.  The  bay  upon  the  south  was 
sheltered  by  high  hills,  which  sloped  down  to 
the  water  and  were  clothed  thickly  with 
timber.  The  western  side  of  the  bay  rose 
gently,  and  spread  inland  in  a  succession  of 
terraces.  To  the  north  the  same  characteristic 
was  observable,  and  as  the  country  was  less 
thickly  timbered  in  this  direction,  I  could  see 
herds  of  wild  beasts  seeking  their  food  in  the 
forests.  The  smoke  arose  from  many  places 
into  the  clear  atmosphere.  ^  The  bay  itself 
was  placid  as  a   mill-pond,  and  shone  like  a 

E 


50  Adveniitres  in  New  Guinea. 

mirror  under  tlie  liglit  of  the  sun,  wliicli  was 
very  hot.  As  we  drew  near  to  the  shore, 
crowds  of  natives,  entirely  naked,  ran  along 
the  beach,  ready  to  help  us  to  land  and  un- 
load. The  reader  may  be  sure  that  we  were 
in  a  state  of  great  anxiety  as  to  our  fate,  and 
sought  to  divine  it  from  the  faces  of  those 
around  us.  We  had  heard  diverse  accounts 
of  the  inhabitants  of  this  island ;  some  said 
that  they  were  a  warlike  people,  but  capable 
of  great  generosity ;  others  that  they  were 
unmitigated  savages,  even  cannibals.  With 
the  last  thought  in  our  minds,  we  scanned 
every  indication  with  deepest  interest.  Of 
course  we  could  not  know  the  meaning  of  a 
word  that  was  said  to  us,  yet  we  made  our 
captors  understand  that  we  were  hungry,  at 
which  some  food  was  given  us — yams,  dates, 
and  some  flesh,  I  do  not  know  of  what  kind. 
As  the  canoes  were  coming  and  going  between 
the  ship  and  the  bay  all  the  remainder  of  the 
day,  we  were  handed  over  to  the  care  of  the 
women  and  older  men,  who  kept  guard  over 
us  and  exercised  their  curiosity  to  an  un- 
limited extent  at  our  expense.  The  natives 
displayed  great  shrewdness  in  their  attacks 
vipon  the  ship's  cargo,  for  they  worked  in- 
cessantly, knowing  that  at  any  moment  she 
might   disappear;   and  as  a  fact  I  learned 


Adventtires  in  Nezo  Guinea.  51 

afterwards,  towards  evening, when  lier  balance 
had  been  disturbed  bj  the  shifting  of  the 
cargo,  she  suddenly  careened  over,  and, 
shpping  off  the  reef,  sank  in  deep  water,  so 
that  not  a  vestige  of  her  could  be  seen.  So 
suddenly  had  this  occurred,  that  no  warning 
was  given  to  the  numerous  savages  at  work 
in  her  hold,  many  of  whom  were  carried 
down  in  the  Y'dle  du  Havre.  A  good 
many  of  these  scrambled  out  of  their  watery 
prison,  and,  floating  to  the  top  like  corks, 
were  hauled  on  board  the  canoes  of  their 
astonished  companions.  Several,  however, 
were  drowned  in  the  hold  of  the  ship.  I  did 
not  learn  this  for  some  months  after  it  all 
occurred. 

When  night  came,  we  were  carefully  con- 
fined in  an  empty  house,  consisting  of  two 
storeys,  and  built  very  neatly  of  wood,  our 
hands  and  feet  being  tied  to  prevent  us 
making  our  escape ;  and  so  we  passed  a 
miserable  night,  not  knowing  what  would 
befall  us  in  the  morning.  At  sunrise  several 
of  our  captors,  who  had  slept  on  the 
ground  floor  (we  were  on  the  second  floor), 
came  up  to  see  if  we  were  safe.  We  made 
signs  to  them  that  the  rope,  formed  from  the 
bark  of  a  tree,  hurt  us,  and  made  them  under- 
stand that  we  wished  to  be  free.  In  a  little 
E  2 


52  Adventures  in  Neiv  Gtnnea. 

while,  tlie  chief  who  had  captured  us  was 
brought,  and,  on  his  giving  directions  to  his 
men,  our  bonds  were  cut  and  we  were  set 
free.  Some  breakfast  was  brought,  and  we 
were  encouraged  to  eat  heartily.  Our  food 
consisted  of  fish  and  yams,  with  a  pleasant 
drink,  made,  I  afterwards  learnt,  from  the 
leaves  of  a  tall  tree.  Its  taste  was  pungent 
and  appetizing.  In  a  little  while  we  slept 
again,  for  some  opiate  had  been  put  into  our 
beverage  to  bring  about  this  result.  On  our 
recovering  consciousness,  the  sun  was  in  the 
mid-heavens,  and  we  were  in  a  large  paddock 
(I  cannot  call  it  by  any  other  name),  perfectly 
naked.  We  had  been  robbed  of  every  vestige 
of  clothing.  A  numerous  crowd  of  savages, 
men,  women,  and  children,  surrounded  the 
palisading,  expressing  by  their  gestures  the 
astonishment,  admiration,  or  dislike  which 
affected  the  different  members  of  the  crowd. 
When  it  was  seen  that  we  were  awake,  some 
more  food  was  brought  to  us,  and  although 
we  did  not  then  care  to  eat,  yet  before  the 
day  closed  we  were  glad  enough  to  satisfy 
the  sharp  cravings  of  hunger.  At  night  we 
were  allowed  to  shelter  ourselves  in  one  of 
the  recesses  of  the  yard,  where  a  plentiful 
supply  of  rushes  was  thrown  to  us,  just  as  if 
we  were  so  many  pigs.     This  treatment  con- 


Adventures  in  Nezv  Guinea.  53 

tinued  for  about  a  week,  and  every  day  a 
crowd  of  idlers  gathered  about  our  prison  to 
amuse  tliemselves  at  our  expense.  They 
seemed  to  be  biglily  amazed  by  our  colour 
and  general  appearance,  and  tried  to  enter 
into  conversation  with  us.  This  enabled  us 
to  learn  a  few  words  of  their  language.  On 
our  pointing  to  the  sun,  and  showing  that 
we  would  know  its  name,  they  turned  their 
heads  away,  and  putting  up  their  hands  in 
deprecation,  said,  *'  Otaroo."  This,  I  after- 
wards learned,  was  living  one,  or  great  king, 
emphatically  the  living  one. 

As  we  were  not  molested  in  any  other  way 
than  the  manner  which  I  have  described,  we 
began  to  feel  at  our  ease,  and  to  accept  our 
position  with  cheerfulness.  We  ate  heartily, 
and  dismissed  all  concern  from  our  minds. 
When  our  captors  saw  this  they  were  evidently 
pleased,  for  they  brought  us  a  plentiful  supply 
of  food  and  gave  us  plenty  of  eu  to  drink. 
This,  as  I  have  said,  was  very  appetizing, 
and  we  always  ate  heartily  after  drinking 
it. 

At  the  end  of  a  week  we  noticed  that  there 
were  great  shoutings  every  few  hours,  and, 
consequent  upon  these  noises,  a  large  increase 
to  the  crowd  of  watchers.  This  night  a  great 
noise  of  drums  was  kept  up,  and  as  soon  as 


54  Adventures  in  New  Guinea. 

the  day  broke  and  the  light  streamed  in  upon 
our  faces  we  found  ourselves  again  tied  hand 
and  foot,  and  a  guard  of  savages  about  us. 
They  were  all  well  armed,  and  had  sharp  flint 
knives.    I  did  not  like  the  look  of  our  captors, 
and  cried  out  to  my  fellow-prisoners  that  we 
were  all  dead  men.    They  carried  us  with  tlie 
greatest  ease  to  a  large  open  space,  around 
which  the  whole  population  of  the  place  was 
gathered.     Here  we  were  surrounded  by  at 
least  a  hundred  armed  men.     A  great  fire 
was  burning  in  the  open  air,  which  was  tended 
by   half-a-dozen    stalwart    savages,    naked. 
Five  large  stone  slabs  were  placed  over  the 
fire,  and,  judging  from  appearances,  were  as 
hot  as  the  floor  of  an  oven.    Our  hearts  sank 
within  us  as  we  saw  these  preparations.    We 
remembered  all  the  stories  of  cannibalism  we 
had  heard,  and  felt  that  such  would  be  our 
fate.     A  repulsive-looking  man,  wearing  an 
apron  of  hemp  (he  was  the  priest,  it  appeared), 
came  forward  and  examined  us  very  carefully. 
He  was  watched  intently  by  our  guards,  who 
were  ready  to  obey  his  least  wish.     By  his 
direction  we  were  arranged  in  a  line,  according 
to    some   order ;    a  very  fat    sailor,   named 
Blewitt,  on  the  left,  I  was   on  the  extreme 
right.     When  this  ceremony  was  finished  the 
old  mnn'a  nssistunts,  three  in  number,  simi- 


Adventures  in  New  Gninea.  55 

larly  attired,  only  in  shorter  aprons,  stepped 
forward,  and  began  to  sing  or  cbant  some 
strange  words.  At  tlie  chorus,  which  was 
taken  up  by  the  crowd,  accompanied  by  the 
beating  of  drums,  two  of  the  most  powerful 
of  our  guards  seized  poor  Blewitt,  and, 
dragging  him  forward,  threw  him  upon  the 
heated  slab,  at  the  same  time  striking  him  on 
the  head  with  a  club,  which  rendered  him 
unconscious.  Again  the  chant  began,  and 
again,  at  the  chorus,  a  second  of  my  poor 
mates  was  despatched  in  the  same  way  as  the 
former  sailor  was  destroyed.  By  the  time 
the  ceremony  had  reached  myself  I  was  in  a 
kind  of  stupor,  and  was  hardly  conscious  of 
my  movements.  As  the  first  strains  of  the 
chorus  arose,  I  put  my  hands  up  instinctively 
to  protect  my  head,  and  in  a  moment  after 
felt  my  hand  grasped  by  the  old  priest.  I  was 
conscious  that  he  had  given  me  the  first 
masonic  grip.  Immediate^  I  replied,  and 
was  answered  again  by  him.  Coming  forward, 
the  old  priest  cut  the  rope  with  which  my 
hands  and  feet  were  bound,  and,  turning 
himself  to  the  crowd  of  astonished  gazers, 
addressed  them,  pointing  now  at  myself,  now 
at  the  sun,  and  using  the  word  *'  Otaroo." 
Whenever  this  word  was  pronounced  the 
whole  crowd  turned  away  their  heads,  and, 


56  Adventures  in  New  Guinea. 

putting  out  their  hands,  cried,  in  a  subdued 
voice,  "  Otaroo  !  " 

I  was  free,  and  was  now  invited  to  take  a 
seat  by  the  priest's  side,  and  wait  for  my 
share  of  the  horrible  repast.  The  latter  part 
of  the  invitation  I  declined,  while  accepting 
the  former  from  motives  of  policy.  I  was 
thus  constrained  to  sit  by  while  the  remains 
of  my  unfortunate  companions  were  served 
round  by  the  filthy  cooks.  The  women  and 
children  were  not  permitted  to  share  in  the 
repast,  which  was  one  reserved  exclusively 
for  the  warriors  of  the  tribe. 

Deeply  grieved  and  shocked  as  I  was  at 
the  terrible  fate  of  my  companions,  yet  I  wai 
filled  with  thankfulness  at  my  own  fortunate 
escape,  and  I  could  not  help  wondering  how 
it  had  been  brought  about.  The  old  priest 
certainly  knew  something  of  masonry,  but 
how  much  knowledge  he  possessed,  and  where 
he  had  obtained  it,  I  cannot  say.  I  know 
only  that  his  knowledge  was  the  means  of 
saving  my  life,  and  of  inducing  him  to  treat 
me  w^ith  kindness.  I  was  now  permitted  to 
go  about  freely,  and  was  taken  by  the  priest 
to  his  house.  I  thus  became  sacred,  and  my 
safety  was  secured  at  least  for  a  time. 

The  priest's  house  was  different  in  many 
respects  from  the  houses  of  the  other  chiefs. 


Adventures  in  New  Gtiinca.  57 

It  was  larger,  and  consisted  of  three  floors, 
one  of  which  was  dug  out  of  the  earth.  Into 
this  room  no  person  was  permitted  to  enter 
but  the  priest  himself.  The  second  floor, 
level  with  the  street,  consisted  of  only  one 
yery  large  room,  twelve  feet  by  twenty,  which 
had  no  connection  with  either  the  upper  or 
lower  storey.  The  upper  storey,  divided  into 
three  compartments,  was  occupied  by  the 
priest's  wives,  one  in  each  compartment.  In 
this  respect  he  differed  from  the  other  savages, 
who  were  only  permitted  to  have  one  wife. 
A  distinguished  chief  was  permitted  to  have 
two,  and  was  expected  to  have  two  rooms  on 
the  upper  storey.  The  commoner  people  lived 
wholly  on  a  ground  floor.  Many  of  the  houses 
had  verandahs  round  them,  sometimes  on 
both  upper  and  lower  storeys. 

But  this  was  a  privilege  that  was  not  per- 
mitted to  the  smaller  houses,  unless  their 
occupants  had  distinguished  themselves  in 
some  way.  The  fact  is  that  the  storeys  and 
compartments  of  a  man's  house,  together 
with  the  style  of  the  verandah,  were  a  mark 
of  his  position  in  his  tribe.  At  one  glance 
you  could  tell  who  among  the  people  of  the 
village  were  the  principal  and  who  the  inferior 
people.  The  village  of  R^gek  consisted  of 
about  fifty  or  sixty  houses,  and  was  delight- 


58  Advenhires  in  New  Guinea. 

fully  situated,  affording  opportunities  for 
hunting  and  fishing  during  the  greater  portion 
of  the  year.  Here  I  remained  for  several 
months,  and  made  great  progress  in  speaking 
the  language.  By  this  means  I  picked  up 
considerable  information  about  the  interior, 
and  heard  many  wonderful  reports  of  its 
mysteries,  which  awakened  in  me  the  desire 
to  penetrate  the  dense  forests  which  sheltered 
it,  and  reach  the  kingdom  of  K'ootar  enclosed 
within  the  high  ranges,  whose  peaks  of  snow 
I  had  seen  when  on  a  hunting  expedition 
some  ten  miles  inland,  from  tho  higher 
ground. 


Adventures  in  New  Gtiinca.  59 


CHAPTER  VII. 

As  tlie  reader  may  learn  from  tlie  closing 
sentence  of  the  last  chapter,  I  was  allowed 
the  exercise  of  a  great  deal  of  liberty,  indeed 
was  perfectly  unrestrained,  sharing  freely  in 
all  the  expeditions  of  the  tribe  for  hunting  or 
fishing  purposes.  On  one  of  these  expedi- 
tions inland  we  reached  a  very  high  hill — 
part  of  a  range  of  mountains,  running  north 
and  south. 

As  T  was  anxious  to  obtain  some  idea  of 
the  country  beyond,  I  persuaded  my  com- 
panions to  ascend  the  range  with  me,  and  on 
reaching  the  top  I  was  able  to  see  the  sum- 
mits of  a  distant  mountain,  or  range  of 
mountains,  whose  whitened  peaks  were  lost 
in  the  clouds.  On  inquiring  the  name  of  this 
mountain  the  natives  shook  their  heads,  and 
became  silent.  After  much  persuasion  on  my 
part  they  told  me  that  it  belonged  to  the 
kingdom  of  K'ootar,  and  that  a  great  king 
ruled  over  the  surrounding  country.  His 
power  was   so  great  that  none  of  the  chiefs, 


6o  Adventures  in  Neiu  Guinea, 

nor  even  the  priests  on  the  coast  country, 
were  able  to  stand  against  him.  I  could  get 
very  little  information  about  this  inland  tribe, 
as  my  companions  did  not  care  to  speak  about 
the  kingdom  of  K'ootar,  being  fearful  of  the 
vengeance  of  the  mountaineers.  The  fact  is 
many  of  them  had  a  superstitious  belief  that 
their  words  were  carried  to  these  terrible 
people  by  invisible  spirits.  Hence  they  spake 
only  in  whispers  about  the  Great  Kingdom  in 
Tanna-Vorkoo  (the  mountain  range).  I  had 
heard  enough,  however,  to  excite  my  imagi- 
nation, and  to  prepare  me  for  adventure. 
Part  of  the  information  that  I  thus  g'athered 
was  this.  The  people  inhabiting  the  mountain 
sometimes  came  down  to  the  coast,  riding  on 
evil  spirits  which  moved  like  the  wind, 
breathing  out  fire  from  their  nostrils,  and 
that  nothing  could  withstand  them.  The 
horsemen  who  rode  on  these  fierce  spirits 
were  clothed  with  flames,  and  burnt  up  every- 
thing like  the  sun,  dazzling  the  eyes  of  all 
who  looked  upon  them.  From  this  I  made 
out  that  these  mountain  men  were  well  armed, 
and  had  bright,  perhaps  golden  armour ;  for 
one  of  the  prevailing  stories  in  Australia  be- 
fore we  started  was  that  the  interior  of  the 
country  was  rich  in  gold. 

AlthouQ:h  much  that  was  told  me  about  the 


Advenhtres  in  New  Guinea.  6i 

Orangwoks  (for  such  was  their  name)  was 
utter  folly,  yet  I  felt  sure  that  there  was 
some  foundation  in  fact,  for  these  exaggerated 
reports,  and  by  some  curious  circumstances 
I  was  able  to  make  out  the  truth  about  the 
mountain  tribe. 

The  priest  (whose  name  was  Lakangeoo) 
had  taken  me  to  live  in  his  house,  for  a  reason 
which  will  presently  appear,  and  I  obtained 
through  his  favour  the  restoration  of  my 
clothes,  with  those  of  my  poor  mates  who  had 
been  murdered.  I  obtained  also  some  of  the 
things  which  had  been  stolen  from  the  ship. 
Amongst  these  were  some  books,  a  Bible,  the 
old  "  Pilgrim's  Progress,"  and  some  pictures. 
I  got  also  some  pencils,  and  a  few  quires  of 
foolscap  paper,  which  were  very  useful  to  me. 
But  to  return.  The  " Pilgrim's  Progress" 
was,  as  the  reader  may  remember,  illustrated ; 
and  among  the  illustrations  was  a  highly- 
coloured  picture  of  Christian  on  the  Delectable 
Mountains.  On  the  plain  was  a  flock  of 
sheep,  several  of  which  were  brought  out 
towards  the  foreground.  After  my  conver- 
sation about  the  kingdom  of  K'ootar,  I  was 
showing  these  pictures  to  one  of  the  natives 
who  had  given  me  the  information  about  the 
evil  spirits  ridden  by  the  mountaineers,  and 
when  we  came  to  the  picture  of  the  sheep  on 


62  Adventures  Z7i  Neiv  Gtiinea. 

tlie  Delectable  MountainSj  lie  exclaimed, 
*'  Ahze,  abze," — evil  spirit,  evil  spirit,  and 
pointed  to  the  sheep.  I  understood  from 
this  that  the  mountain  tribe  were  possessed 
of  horses,  or  ponies. 

Lakangeoo  (the  priest)  was  a  very  shrewd 
man,  and  endeavoured  to  obtain  from  me 
information  that  might  be  useful  to  himself. 
He,  I  suspect,  fully  understood  that  white 
men  were  superior  to  black  men.  From 
words  that  fell  from  him  from  time  to  time, 
I  came  to  the  conclusion  that  many  years  ago 
he  had  been  in  possession  of  a  white  man, 
and  I  suspected  that  the  priest's  knowledge 
of  masonry  was  derived  from  his  white 
prisoner,  as  he  often  made  inquiries  about 
European  practices  (in  these  inquiries  he  be- 
trayed the  existence  of  a  previous  knowledge). 
I  related  incidents  of  my  own  life,  and  among 
them  I  told  him  of  my  digging  experiences. 
The  old  man's  eyes  twinkled  as  he  listened 
to  me,  and  his  manner  became  eager  as  I  told 
him  that  the  metal  which  was  thus  dug  out 
of  the  earth  was  the  same  as  that  used  by 
the  mountain  chiefs  in  their  dress  and  shields  ; 
and  showing  him  a  highly-coloured  picture 
in  the  "  Pilgrim's  Progress,"  where  a  bright 
yellow  colour  was  conspicuous,  I  illustrated 
my   meaning    to   him.     After   this   he   was 


Adventures  in  Nciv  Guinea.  63 

always  ready  to  talk  to  me  about  the  way 
the  English  gold-miner  obtained  the  precious 
metal  from  the  earth.  From  the  persistency 
with  which  he  dwelt  on  the  idea,  I  knew  he 
had  some  plot  in  his  head,  and  felt  sure  that 
a  short  time  would  reveal  what  it  was.  So 
one  day,  after  renewing  our  conversation 
about  the  way  of  procuring  gold,  Lakangeoo 
said  to  mo, — 

"  There  is  gold  in  K'ootar  dug  out  of  the 
mountains  in  large  quantities." 

"  So  I  thought,"  was  my  reply;  *' do  the 
Orangwoks  work  their  mines  ?  " 

"  Yes,  after  a  fashion.  We  could  show 
them  how  to  work  them  to  greater  advan- 
tage." 

"  But  would  they  not  kill  us  if  we  crossed 
the  great  Tannavorkoo  ? "  for  so  was  the 
mountain  called. 

He  replied,  with  an  expression  of  contempt, 
"  If  we  can  show  them  how  to  work  their 
mines,  they  will  welcome  us.  I  have  lived 
many  suns,"  he  said,  pointing  to  his  white 
hair,  as  one  might  appeal  to  one's  knowledge 
of  the  world. 

From  this  time  he  began  to  plan  with  me 
an  adventure  kito  the  K'ootar  territory.  I 
was  as  eager,  although  from  a  different 
motive,  as  Lakangeoo,  and  resolved  to  share 


64  Adventures  in  New  Guinea. 

the  adventure  with  him ;  so,  giving  out  that 
he  was  going  to  confer  with  Otaroo,  he  and 
myself,  accompanied  by  six  strong  men  as  an 
escort,  carrying  all  that  we  considered 
valuable,  started,  taking  a  north-east  route. 
Under  the  guidance  of  the  old  priest,  we 
skirted  the  ground  of  other  tribes  that  lay 
between  ourselves  and  the  frontier,  which, 
after  three  days'  travelling,  we  reached  in 
safety.  The  land  had  been  gradually  rising 
since  we  left  the  coast ;  now  it  suddenly  fell 
some  hundreds  of  feet,  making  a  natural 
rampart  like  a  precipice  some  hundreds  of  feet 
deep.  Before  descending  the  precipitous 
rampart,  I  will  describe  the  view  which  we 
now  saw.  A  vast  plain,  well- watered,  well- 
wooded,  well-cultivated.  Streams  of  water 
ran  through  all  its  extent,  rendering  it 
wonderfully  fertile.  These  streams  dis- 
charged themselves  into  a  lake  at  the  foot  of 
the  natural  rampart  which  bounded  the 
kingdom  of  K'ootar.  The  lake  had  (as  far 
I  could  learn)  no  outlet,  so  I  conclude  the 
water  escaped  by  some  subterranean  channel, 
so  passing  on  to  the  sea,  and,  as  some 
believed,  fertilizing  the  coast  country,  in  its 
underground  progress.  The  whole  of  this 
immense  plain  was  under  cultivation,  and 
was  like  the  garden  of  Eden  for  beauty  and 


Adventures  in  New  Gtiinea,  65 

fertility.  Even  now  I  could  see  througli  the 
clearings  evidences  of  cultivation.  The  rising 
smoke,  curling  high  above  the  tall  palm- 
trees,  showed  in  places  innumerable  the 
presence  of  habitation — herds  of  cattle, 
buffalo  or  bison,  antelopes,  and  other  game 
were  to  be  seen  in  all  directions.  As  we 
went  through  this  natural  paradise,  we  saw 
richly  plumaged  birds,  in  size  and  variegated 
colours  such  as  I  had  never  imagined.  These 
birds  were  called  wawkoo. 

Beyond  all,  about  fifty  miles  distant,  a  very 
high  mountain  rose,  and  Lad  its  highest 
snow-capped  peaks  in  the  clouds ;  this  was 
the  range  called  Tannavorkoo.  It  spread 
itself  out  far  beyond  the  limits  of  my  vision, 
maintaining  everywhere  its  altitude.  It  was 
such  a  range  as  might  bar  the  progress  of  the 
inexperienced  traveller,  and  turn  him  back  to 
the  fertile  plain,  out  of  which  it  rose.  1  had 
not  the  least  suspicion  at  this  time  that  there 
was  a  habitable,  still  less  that  there  was  an 
actually  inhabited  territory,  in  the  midst  of 
this  range  of  high  hills. 

Before  descending  to  the  plain, we  sent  back 
our  escort,  who  had  scarcely  dared  to  look  out 
over  K'ootar  territory.  It  would  have  been 
instant  death  to  any  one  of  them  to  set  his 
foot  in  that  plain,  so  at  least  said  Lakangeoo. 

p 


66  Adventures  in  Nczu  Guinea. 

No  sooner  had  tlie  priesfc  and  myself 
descended,  carrying  our  luggage  with  us,  than 
as  if  from  the  ground,  a  score  of  Orangwoks 
enclosed  us.  They  were  mounted  on  little 
ponies,  striped  with  yellow  and  white,  which 
moved  with  great  speed.  Their  riders  were 
clothed  in  a  long,  loose-fitting  robe,  reaching 
below  the  knee ;  this  was  the  common  dress 
of  the  country.  They  were  armed  with 
swords,  spears,  and  bows  and  arrows.  Some 
of  them  carried  shields  of  pure  gold,  and 
others  had  a  breastplate  of  gold  bars.  They 
had  a  warlike  look,  although  they  were  of 
small  stature.  We  were  seized  before  we 
had  time  to  otfer  resistance,  even  had  we 
thought  of  doing  so,  and  bound  with  a  well- 
made  rope  of  bark  and  gold  thread. 

The  head  of  the  troop  demanded  our  names 
and  business  in  a  tone  of  authority.  He 
spoke  the  same  language  as  the  coast  tribe, 
but  spoke  it  differently.  The  coast  tribe 
spoke  from  the  throat ;  the  Orangwoks  spoke 
from  their  lips  and  upper  part  of  the  mouth; 
their  voice  too  was  more  resonant,  their 
pronunciation  of  the  words  was  also  different, 
and  many  of  the  words  used  were  unknown 
to  me.  Lakangeoo  replied  to  the  speaker, 
and  explained  in  an  undertone  our  business. 
The  officer  listen ened  with  an  indifferent  air 


'  ^KS^jA^x  =^/i  Wjj^o^i^^f/flZ  f^. 


THE    CAPTURE. 


Page  I 


Adventures  in  Neio  Gttmea.  67 

until  the  priest  meutioned  tiie  goldmines. 
The  chief's  attention  was  at  once  aroused, 
and  he  now  displayed  the  keenest  interest. 
When  the  priest  finished  speaking,  at  a  word 
from  the  leader,  every  Orangwok  sheated  his 
sword,  or  lowered  his  spear,  from  which  I 
inferred  that  we  were  safe,  and  prepared  to 
ride  onward.  Oar  course  lay  along  a  well- 
made,  well-beaten  road;  the  officer  at  the 
head  of  the  troop  having  first  sent  on 
two  of  his  soldiers  (I  suppose  I  must  call 
them  such)  in  the  direction  of  the  mountain 
range  of  which  I  have  spoken.  Their  little 
ponies  went  like  the  wind,  and  their  white 
and  yellow  stripes  flashed  in  the  passing  light 
in  a  striking  manner ;  so  too  did  the  arms 
and  shields,  which  were  brightly  burnished. 
I  could  now  understand  how  the  imagination 
of  the  coast  natives  had  been  wrought  upon 
by  the  vision  of  some  hundreds  of  the  Oraug- 
woks  riding  rapidly  in  their  bright  armour. 


]?  2 


68  Adventwes  in  New  Guinea. 


CHAPTER  YIII. 

Lakang:^oo  and  myself  were  still  carrying  tlie 
heavy    bundles    containing    our    valuables, 
■which  had  hitherto  been  borne  by  our  escort. 
These  packages  weighed    upwards    of  fifty 
pounds  each,  and  under  a  hot  sun,  for  it  was 
now  past  noon,  we  found  the  burden  as  heavy 
as  we  could  well    bear    at    the  rapid   pace 
we    were    travelling,    for,   of    course,  there 
were   no    ponies    for   us.     After    an   hour's 
quick  walking  we  reached  a  well-constructed 
house  built  on  the  side  of  the  road,  and  sur- 
rounded   by    waving    trees,    very    tall    and 
graceful,  which  sheltered  the  building  from 
the  great  heat.     "We  were  glad  of  the  rest 
which  we  were  allowed  to  take  at  this  place ; 
some  refreshments  had  been  prepared  for  us, 
ordered  by  the  couriers  who  had  been  sent 
on  in  advance,  and  who,  it  appeared,   still 
continued   in    advance    of   us    all  along   the 
route.     The   house   was    the    finest-looking 
one  I  had  yet  seen.     It  was  built  of  wood 
throughout,     and     the     rooms     were     very 


Advenhcres  in  Neio  Guinea.  69 

cnpacioiis.  There  were  underground  rooms 
for  summer  use,  and  two  stories  above. 
Although  the  wood-work  was  generally  of  a 
rough  description,  yet  there  were  indications 
of  a  better  taste  in  the  carved  finishings,  and 
the  worked  pillars  supporting  the  verandah 
which  here,  as  on  the  coast,  ran  all  round  the 
house,  both  upstairs  and  down.  The  upstair 
rooms  were  reached  on  the  outside  by  a  well- 
made  ladder.  The  yard  in  which  this  house 
was  built  was  surrounded  by  tropical  vegeta- 
tion and  tropical  fruits.  In  one  corner  of 
the  court  was  a  fine  bath,  sheltered  by  trees. 
This  was  the  first  bath  I  had  seen,  and  I 
was  glad  to  avail  myself  of  the  permission  to 
have  a  swim  in  the  water,  which  I  found 
delightfully  cool.  A  magnificent  specimen 
of  the  wawkoo  sat  in  one  of  the  tall  trees, 
watching  my  bathing  operations.  Its 
feathers,  which  were  of  gold,  crimson,  blue,  of 
every  colour  of  the  rainbow,  shone  richly 
in  the  sun.  The  note  of  the  bird  is,  how- 
ever, very  coarse  and  unmusical. 

After  a  rest  of  a  couple  of  hours  our 
captors  prepared  to  continue  their  march. 
The  priest  and  myself  were  now  placed  upon 
horseback — that  is,  we  were  put  upon 
little  ponies  such  as  our  captors  rode.  This 
was  a    great   relief  to  me,  especially  as  our 


7o  Adventures  in  New  Guinea. 

burdens  had  been  strapped  upon  another  pony. 
When  all  was  ready  we  were  placed  in  the 
middle,  four  riding  in  advance,  four  on  either 
hand,  and  the  remainder  of  the  troop  bring- 
ing up  the  rear.  At  the  word  "  blanputt  " 
we  started  at  a  rapid  pace,  a  quick  canter, 
which  soon  quickened  to  a  hand-gallop, 
as  our  little  ponies  got  warm,  and  thus  we 
continued  for  a  full  hour,  the  horses'  feet, 
with  the  spears  and  swords  of  our  escort, 
making  a  great  clatter. 

The  Orangwoks — judging  from  our  guards, 
and  I  found  that  they  were  good  specimens 
of  the  tribe  generally — were  short,  not  more 
than  five  feet  in  height,  some  of  them  as  little 
as  four  feet  six.  They  were  fairer  than  the 
coast  natives,  and  had  straight  hair.  In 
many  there  was  a  tendency  to  curl  at  the 
ends,  and  in  some  few  there  was  an  actual 
frizziness  all  over  the  head.  They  were 
very  proud  of  their  hair  and  their  teeth, 
which  were  pearly  white.  In  this  there  was 
a  striking  contrast  with  the  shore  tribe,  whoso 
hair  stood  up  like  a  huge  mop,  or  like 
porcupine  quills,  all  round  the  head,  and 
whose  teeth  were  often  very  offensive.  An 
Orangwok  reminded  me  of  a  Malay,  and  yet 
he  was  somethiDg  like  a  negro  too,  but  very 
much    superior    to    the    ordinary'-    Papuan. 


Adventures  in  N'eiv  Guinea,  71 

While  I  make  these  reflectious  we  are 
galloping  along  the  great  highway,  every  few 
miles  passing  a  house  like  the  one  at  which 
we  had  rested.  These  houses  were  placed 
every  ten  or  twelve  miles,  and  were  posting 
houses  for  the  king's  service.  Once  we  met 
a  troop  of  horsemen  passing  eastward,  a  short 
parley  ensued,  the  priest  and  myself  were 
examined,  in  much  the  same  way  as  indolent 
men  would  examine  some  curious  specimen, 
with  a  mixture  of  indifference,  contempt, 
and  curiosity,  and  then  on  we  went  again. 
At  night  we  rested  in  one  of  the  posting- 
houses,  and  were  off  again  at  sunrise.  I 
was  in  great  agony,  for  I  had  not  ridden  for 
nearly  twelve  months,  and  the  priest  was  in  a 
worse  condition.  Still  we  were  hurried  on, 
until  towards  noon  we  approached  the  foot  of 
the  great  Tannavorkoo.  We  now  halted  at 
the  last  posting-house  on  the  plain,  and  had 
some  refreshments. 

About  four  o'clock  we  mounted  our  ponies 
again,  and  began  to  ascend  the  range.  I  was 
surprised  to  find  so  good  a  road  cut  out  of  the 
solid  rock.  Places  which  seemed  inaccessi- 
ble, had  been  reached,  great  blocks  of  stone 
broken  away,  and  a  good  roadway  cleared. 
We  continued  to  rise  until  night  fell ;  even 
now  we  did  not  draw  rein,  but  kept  on  at  a 


72  Adventures  in  New  Guinea. 

quick  pace  for  an  hour,  until  I  could  no  longer 
see  llie  road,  whicli  I  knew  was  not  more  than 
eight  or  ten  feet  wide  in  places.  AYe  now 
reached  a  small  posting-house,  and  remained 
there  for  the  night.  Early  in  the  morning 
we  were  again  on  our  way,  after  taking  a 
look  at  the  road  which  we  had  passed  over  in 
the  dark.  We  had  been  travelling  along  the 
edge  of  a  precipice  which  fell  away  from  the 
parapet  abruptly,  and  had  a  descent  of  nearly 
1000  feet.  AYhen  we  had  reached  an  altitude 
of  about  3000  feet  above  the  level  of  the 
plain,  we  entered  a  vast  plateau  clothed  with 
some  tropical  vegetation,  and  very  fertile,  we 
saw  the  smoke  of  a  town  or  village  before  us, 
and  were  glad  to  hurry  on  and  rest  ourselves, 
for  I  thought  that  now  our  journey  was  over. 
Some  ten  or  twelve  miles  farther  inland  the 
land  began  to  rise  again,  and  form  a  new 
base  for  Tannavorkoo  whose  peaks  seemed  to 
reach  to  the  clouds.  It  was  evident  that 
we  were  still  at  the  base  of  the  great  moun- 
tain. We  rested  at  this  village,  or  town,  the 
first  that  I  had  seen  of  the  Orangwoks,  but  as 
I  shall  have  opportunity  to  describe  the 
capital  city,  I  need  not  stay  to  describe  this, 
which  was  only  a  town  of  about  three 
thousand  inhabitants.  I  was  much  struck 
by  the  evidences  of  superior  civilization  which 
it  presented. 


Adventures  in  Neiv  Gttinca.  73 

After  a  few  hours'  rest,  I  learned  to  my 
regret  that  we  had  still  to  travel  onward, 
and  upward.  This  plateau  was  for  spring 
habitation,  and  it  was  now  the  height  of 
summer.  It  was  well- watered  by  a  river, 
which  descended  from  the  mountain  range, 
and  which  was  judiciously  directed  into 
numerous  channels  or  canals.  The  danger 
incident  to  mountain  torrents  or  rivers 
was  thus  avoided,  and  \}ciQ  whole  land  was 
fertilized  by  the  general  diffusion  of  the 
water.  As  we  neared  the  defile  of  the  upper 
Tannavorkoo,  a  horseman  started  out  and 
challenged  us.  On  receiving  our  pass-word 
he  allowed  us  to  enter  the  defile.  As  we 
entered,  I  saw  the  shields  and  spears  of  a 
troop  of  horse,  who  were  guarding  the 
approaches,  rising  out  of  a  plantation.  A 
handful  of  men  could  keep  such  a  pass 
against  thousands.  Another  day's  travelling 
brought  us  to  the  higher  plateau  of  the  king- 
dom of  K'ootar,  where  the  king  and  Lis 
warriors  have  their  summer  residence.  As 
we  rose  to  the  level  of  the  plain  we  felt  the 
agreeable  change  in  the  atmosphere.  Every 
man,  as  we  ascended  to  the  level  country, 
lifted  his  head-gear,  which  consisted  of  a 
light  frame  of  bamboo,  covered  with  neat 
grass-work.  I  thought  that  this  was  some 
religious  act,  but  I  learnt  that  it  was    au 


74  AdventiLvcs  in  Nczv  Guinea, 

act  of  homage  to  the  king,  whose  sacred 
presence  filled  the  whole  plain.  We  now 
.moved  on  more  quietly,  although  we  still 
,  moved  quicklj^  As  we  neared  the  city 
every  man  again  took  off  his  head-gear, 
and  after  mumbling  some  words  replaced 
it  on  his  head.  On  entering  the  city 
every  one  became  silent,  or  spoke  only  in 
whispers.  This,  I  was  informed,  was  out  of 
respect  for  the  king's  palace,  which  was 
inside  the  city;  and  here  I  may  mention 
that  it  was  not  considered  good  manners  to 
speak  above  a  whisper  while  inside  the  Avails 
of  K'ootar  (the  city  gave  its  name  to  the 
kingdom).  It  was  this  restriction  which 
doubtless  formed  that  habit  of  restraint  and 
silence  which  was  so  observable  in  the 
Orangw6ks,  especially  when  contrasted  with 
the  Papuans  proper,  who  were  a  highly 
excitable  and  boisterous  people.  We  walked 
the  streets  in  silence,  having  dismounted. 
Our  coming  did  not  apparently  occasion  any 
surprise  on  the  part  of  the  inhabitants.  No 
one  turned  to  look  at  us ;  and  those  who 
passed  us  only  noticed  us  by  turning  up 
the  palms  of  their  hands,  and  looking  into 
it,  their  mode  of  salutation. 


Adventures  in  N'eiu  Gninea. 


/D 


CHAPTER  IX. 

K'ooTAR  consisted  of  about  two  thousand 
or  three  thousand  houses,  and  had  a  popula- 
tion of  nearly  ten  thousand  people.  It  was 
by  far  the  finest  city  of  the  kingdom, 
though  by  no  means  the  largest.  None  but 
chiefs  and  warriors  were  permitted  to 
live  in  K'ootar,  although  any  person,  on 
receiving  permission,  was  allowed  to  stay 
in  it  for  a  limited  time.  The  houses 
were  of  several  storeys,  varying  from 
three  (including  the  ground  floor)  to 
seven.  The  palace  of  the  king  consisted  of 
seven  storeys.  A  few  of  the  more  distin- 
guished chiefs  had  houses  of  six  storej'S, 
others  less  distinguished  had  five,  four,  or 
three.  No  house  of  less  than  three  was 
allowed  to  be  built  in  K'ootar.  This  pro- 
cured a  uniformity  which  was  very  agreeable  to 
the  eye.  The  streets  were  narrow^ — the  only 
fault  I  could  find  with  the  style  of  the  city — 
so  narrow,  that  one's  movements  were  con- 
siderably impeded   if  ^  one  was  in  a   hurry. 


76  Adventures  in  New  Guinea. 

As,  however,  nobody  was  permitted  to  hasten 
or  appear  hurried  in  K'ootar,  this  incon- 
venience was  not  felt.  The  houses  were 
verandahed  as  on  the  coast,  but  more 
elaborately,  and  with  greater  regard  to  the 
rank  and  distinction  of  the  possessor.  The 
palace  had  a  verandah  running  right  round 
the  house  on  each  storey.  In  many  of  the 
chiefs'  houses  these  verandahs  did  not  go 
completely  round.  It  was  a  point  of  etiquette 
rigidly  enforced  that  no  verandah  could  be 
added  on  any  pretence  whatever,  without  the 
express  sanction  of  the  king,  who  even  held 
a  consultation  with  his  wise  men,  the  uoo, 
before  granting  it.  A  description  of  one  of 
these  houses  will  suffice  for  all. 

The  house  at  which  I  was  lodged,  until 
the  king's  pleasure  respecting  me  was  known, 
consisted  of  two  large  rooms  on  the  ground 
floor,  each  fifteen  feet  by  twenty ;  out  of  one 
of  these  rooms  there  was  an  approach  by 
means  of  a  ladder  to  the  upper  storey,  which 
ag;ain  consisted  of  two  rooms.  Above  this 
storey  were  two  other  storeys,  but  the  lower 
one  was  reached  from  the  outside  from  a  court- 
yard by  means  of  a  carved  ladder,  which  had 
a  balustrade  running  down  one  side  of  it. 
From  this  third  storey  the  top  floor  was 
reached  from  within.     This  was  the  floor  of 


Adventures  in  New  Gtimea.  "jy 

honour,  and  the  two  upper  storeys  were 
reserved  for  the  women  of  the  family.  There 
was  little  or  no  furniture  in  our  sense  of  the 
term.  "Well-carved  settles  were  placed  round 
each  room,  which  were  used  as  both  seats 
and  beds.  The  floor  was  covered  with  well- 
wrought  mats,  and  the  walls  were  decorated 
with  bright-coloured  feathers  and  skins. 
The  meals  were  taken  in  the  second  storey, 
the  members  of  the  family  in  the  upper  rooms 
coming  down  to  take  part  in  the  common 
meal.  After  all  the  family  had  seated  them- 
selves on  mats  or  rushes,  a  slave  brought 
the  food  on  clean  leaves  or  well-scoured 
marble  dishes,  according  to  the  nature  of  the 
food.  When  many  guests  were  present,  and 
it  was  desired  to  honour  them,  a  different 
method  was  observed  in  serving  thedinner 
or  breakfast,  for  there  was  no  evening  meal. 
Each  room  had  a  large  opening  in  the  centre 
of  the  floor,  which  was  skilfully  concealed 
under  ordinary  circumstances,  but,  on  the 
occasion  to  which  I  refer,  these  openings 
were  exposed,  and  the  guests  and  members 
of  the  family  sat  round  them  chatting  and 
laughing.  Presently  the  head  of  a  slave 
would  appear  above  the  opening,  and  then 
his  shoulders,  until  his  waist  was  on  a  level 
■with   the   floor.     He   had   in    his  hand  the 


^8  Adventures  in  New  Guinea. 

supply  of  food,  wliicli  was  handed  about  by 
him  in  a  remarkably  quick  manner,  for  it  is 
not  considered  etiquette  for  one  guest  to 
handle  the  food  of  another.  The  slave  had 
to  move  all  round  the  opening,  serving  each 
guest  with  whatever  he  required.  This  was 
managed  by  an  apparatus  set  up  on  the  lower 
storey,  by  which  means  he  was  enabled  to 
walk  rapidly  round  the  inside  of  the  table 
so  to  speak.  At  least  one  other  slave,  was 
kept  waiting  upon  the  slave  who  was  serving 
the  guests.  It  was  considered  a  mark  of 
distinction  to  be  invited  to  dine  with  a  chief 
who  required  three  or  four  slaves  to  serve  his 
guests.  In  the  houses  of  the  chiefs  who  were 
able  to  do  this,  the  dining-room  would  be  on 
the  third  or  fourth  storey.  That  of  the  king 
was  on  the  fifth  floor,  and  full  a  dozen  slaves 
were  kept  upon  his  diniug-ladder.  It  seemed 
to  me  that  the  most  difficult  and  unpleasant 
thing  to  do  was  considered  the  most 
honourable  by  this  people.  But  it  is  time  to 
return  from  this  digression,  as  I  do  not 
doubt  the  reader  is  equally  anxious  as  my- 
self to  know  how  I  am  to  be  received  by  the 
king.  At  first  I  was  lodged,  or  placed  in 
custody  of  an  old  chief,  of  moderate  distinc- 
tion, who  had  a  three-storeyed  house. 

Lakangeoo  was  placed  in  charge  of  some 


Adventures  in  Neiv  Gninca.  79 

otlier  cliiof.  Old  Kayliar,  tliG  chief  with 
whom  I  was  placed,  had  one  wife  and  a 
daughter  about  fifteen,  the  latter  being  evi- 
dently in  delicate  health.  They  were  all  very 
kind  to  me,  and  entered  into  conversation, 
inquiring  how  I  became  white,  and  whether 
there  was  any  other  country  than  K'ootar, 
except  the  country  of  the  Kahshi — coarse 
spirits — the  coast  tribes.  These  Papuans 
were  universally  called  Kahshi  by  the  Orang- 
woks,  and  no  greater  term  of  contempt  or 
offence  was  known  among  them.  I  replied 
by  telling  them  of  Europe,  and  describing  its 
great  cities,  its  fleets  of  ships,  the  grandeur 
of  its  kings.  At  this  they  were  all  silent. 
They  evidently  did  not  believe  me,  yet  were 
unwilling  to  contradict  what  I  said.  As  they 
all  left  the  rooni  that  night,  they  raised  their 
hands,  and,  turning  up  the  palm  as  if  they 
would  examine  it,  bade  me  good  night. 

Here  was  I  in  such  a  position  as  probably 
no  European  had  ever  been  in  before.  I 
thought  my  life  was  safe,  yet  I  was  too  ex- 
cited to  sleep.  My  mind  revelled  in  the  idea 
of  adventure,  and  I  gave  full  play  to  my 
imagination. 

In  about  a  fortnight  a  great  chief,  who  had 
been  brought  from  a  distant  part  of  the  king- 
dom, arrived,  and,  after  repeated  conferences 


8o  Adventures  in  New  Guinea. 

with  him,  the  king  decided  that  I  shouki  be 
admitted  to  his  presence.  It  appears  that 
Lakangeoo  had  been  interrogated  about  me, 
and  had  revealed  our  knowledge  of  gold- 
mining  to  my  captors.  The  chief  who  had 
been  brong-ht  from  a  distance  had  been  in 
charge  of  the  gold-mining  operations.  Hence 
the  reason  of  his  coming.  He  had  conferred 
with  me  several  times  before  it  had  been  de- 
cided that  I  should  be  presented  to  the  king. 
Once  having  seen  him,  my  kind  host's 
daughter  told  me,  my  life  was  safe.  Lakan- 
geoo had  not  been  permitted  to  see  him ;  and 
here  I  may  say  that  I  never  again  saw  the 
old  priest,  nor  do  I  know  what  became  of  him. 
I  never  could  obtain  a  scrap  of  information 
respecting  his  fate.  The  day  I  was  presented 
was  ushered  in  by  the  beating  of  drums,  the 
blowing  of  horns,  and  the  jingling  of  a  small 
instrument  made  of  gold  bars.  The  sounds 
made  were  very  pleasing,  but  I  am  not  able 
to  say  how  far  they  were  musical. 

At  sunrise  the  town  was  astir,  for  the  day 
was  a  gala  day,  and  people  poured  into  the 
streets  from  the  country.  Dressed  in  their 
best,  I  was  going  to  write,  but  this  would  be 
a  misnomer.  They  were  nearly  naked,  having 
only  a  thin  piece  of  well-wrought  stuff 
desccndino*  from  the  loins  to  the  knees.    Tho 


AdvcntiLves  iii  Neiv  Guinea,  8i 

men  avIio  were  permitted  to  enter  the  palace 
courtyard,  had  on  only  a  short  strip  of  thin 
stuff,  not  more  than  six  inches  long.  The 
women  who  took  part  in  the  proceedings  of 
the  palace  were  perfectly  naked,  with  the 
exception  of  a  few  ornaments.  This  was  to 
me  a  disgusting  and  immodest  exposure ;  and 
yet  the  women  themselves  did  not  seem  to 
think  there  was  any  immodesty  in  their  dress, 
or  want  of  dress.  What  makes  this  the  more 
noticeable  is  the  fact  that  ordinarily  they  are 
decently  covered,  and  are  generally  a  re- 
markably modest  class  of  women. 

During  the  time  I  was  lodging  with  Kayhar 
I  had  learnt,  if  not  to  speak  like  the  Orang- 
woks,  yet  to  understand  their  pronunciation. 
For  a  time  I  was  very  much  puzzled  by  their 
speech,  which  was  not  at  all  like  that  of  the 
Kahshi.  The  sound  was  loud  and  resonant, 
and  appeared  to  come  from  a  distance.  Even 
in  K'ootar  itself  the  whispers  were  marked 
by  the  same  characteristic ;  they  seemed  to 
come  from  the  top  of  the  speaker's  head.  I 
had  got  somewhat  accustomed  to  this  in  my 
host's  family,  and  could  now  readily  under- 
stand their  speech,  although  many  of  their 
words  were  still  unknown  to  me.  I  had  been 
carefully  instructed  in  the  etiquette  connected 
with  a  presentation  by  my  host,  so  I  did  not 

G 


82  Aaventures  in  New  Guinea, 

fear  tlie  ceremonies  of  tlie  coming  day.     In- 
deed I  was  most  anxious  to   see  tlie  terrible 
king,  of  whom  everybody  stood  in  sucli  awe. 
I   had   thought   that    there   was   something 
special  about  this  particular  levee,  if  I  may 
call  the  ceremony  of  a  savage  court  by  such 
a  name — that  it  was   specially  convened  in 
connection  with   myself.     This,  was  not   the 
case,  however.     It  was  the  regular  assembly 
held  every  month,  except  in  the  winter,  on 
the  day  of  the  full  moon.     The  presentations 
were  made  in  a  spacious  courtyard,  reserved 
for  state  occasions.     The  floor   of  this  yard 
was  of  marble,  inlaid  with  bars  of  gold.    The 
marble  was  smooth  and   well   polished,  but 
the  gold   was    rough  and   frosted.      In  the 
centre  of  the  floor  was  a  dais,  very  roomy, 
and  on  the  dais  were  two   thrones  raised  by 
means   of  several  steps    considerably  above 
the  level  of  the  dais  itself.    The  thrones  were 
of    pure    gold,    and    were    surrounded    by 
brightly-polished  mirrors,  which  caught  and 
reflected  the  sun's  light  in  a  most  dazzling 
manner.     Indeed  one  could  not  look  without 
blinking  at  the  king  and  his  wife,  who  occu- 
pied the  thrones.     On  the  first  step  on  either 
side  of  the  king  stood  one  of  the  uoo  men 
with  long  grey  hair  and  beard ;  below  them, 
on  the  next  step,  stood  two  more  of  the  iioo. 


Advenkires  in  Neiv  Gtunea.  8 


J 


younger  iu  years,  while  the  dais  was  occupied 
by  a  troojo  of  guards,  who  surrounded  the 
sacred  steps.  Immediately  on  either  side  of 
the  thrones,  but  standing  on  the  dais,  were 
two  immense  tigers,  beautifully  striped.  They 
looked  as  if  they  were  ready  to  spring  upon 
the  prostrate  crowd  of  courtiers,  but  they 
were  firmly  secured  by  means  of  well- wrought 
ropes,  twisted  with  gold  wire.  The  whole 
yard  was  lined  with  guards  who  sat  upon 
their  little  ponies  against  the  wall,  and,  with 
couched  spears  or  drawn  swords,  looked  as  if 
they  were  only  waiting  for  a  nod  from  the 
despot  to  fall  upon  the  crowd  and  slay  them. 
Every  one  who  entered  passed  up  a  lane  of 
such  guards,  and  on  approaching  the  dais  fell 
upon  his  stomach,  drawing  himself  along  in 
this  position  until  he  was  opposite  the  king's 
throne.  He  then  turned  up  his  hand  towards  the 
king  three  times,  keeping  his  face  to  the  ground 
all  the  time,  and  on  receiving  a  gentle  prick 
from  the  spear  of  one  of  the  many  guards,  he 
moved  on  again  until  he  got  beyond  the  limits 
of  the  dais.  On  reaching  this  limit,  he  sprang 
to  his  feet,  and,  entering  the  crowd  of  spec- 
tators who  were  in  the  galleries  around  the 
courtyard,  took  his  place  among  the  onlookers. 
Although  the  ceremonies  were  very  painful,  yet 
they  were  performed  with  great  rapidity,  jis 
G  2 


84  Adventures  in  New  Guinea, 

one  person  followed  quickly  upon  tlie  lieels 
of  another.  Nearly  five  hours,  however, 
elapsed  before  my  turn  came  to  be  presented. 
I  was  neither  courtier  nor  criminal — a  kind 
of  suitor  for  mercy ;  so  my  case  was  peculiar. 
When  I  came  opposite  the  throne  I.  stopped, 
and  was  questioned  amid  the  breathless 
silence  of  the  crowd. 
"  What  is  your  name  ?  " 
"  Tregan."  (My  sailor  friends  had  short- 
ened my  name  to  Trigg — sometimes  Trik — 
but  the  Kahshi  had  called  me  Tregan,  Avhich 
suited  the  genius  of  their  language,  so  I  gave 
my  name  as  Tregan.) 

"What  country  did  you  come  from?" 
"  A  country  beyond  the  great  ocean." 
After  this  answer  there  was  a  short  silence, 
and  some  consultation. 

"  How  did  you  become  white  ?  " 
"  I  was  born  so.     All  people  are  white  in 
my  country." 

At  this  there  was  another   short   silence, 
and    a   further    consultation.     I    heard   the 
word   "  edze "   used    several    times.      I  was 
afraid  I  was  getting  into  disgrace  again. 
"  What  do  people  in  your  country  do  ?  " 
"  Dig  gold  out  of  the  earth." 
"  How  is  the  gold  obtained  ?  " 
To  this  I  replied  shortly  by  explaining. 


Adventures  in  New  Guinea.  85 

"Will  you  go  to  the  gold-mines  of  the 
Great  King  ?  "  (And  here  I  could  feel  there 
was  a  general  movement  of  reverence.) 
"  And  teach  his  servants  to  get  gold  ?  " 

To  this  I  replied  that  I  would. 

These  questions  were  not  put  to  me  by 
the  king  himself.  He  addressed  the  wise 
man  on  his  right  hand,  who  again  communi- 
cated with  one  on  the  next  step,  and  he  to 
one  on  the  dais.  My  answer  was  conveyed 
to  the  king  after  a  similar  manner,  but  going 
the  reverse  way,  being  delivered  to  him  by 
the  wise  man  on  his  left  hand. 

I  was  now  gently  touched  with  the  spear, 
and  moved  on,  pleased  that  the  wearisome 
and  painful  exhibition  was  over.  On  going 
up  into  the  galleries  already  mentioned,  I 
was  struck  with  the  magnificence  of  the  cere- 
monial. The  bright  sun,  which  fell  upon  the 
gorgeous  spectacle,  illuminated  the  vast 
court  with  dazzling  light;  for  every  guard 
was  clothed  in  bright  uniform  overlaid  with 
gold.  Everywhere  there  was  a  profusion  of 
this  metal. 

The  king  was  very  small,  not  more  than 
four  feet  high,  and  made  in  proportion.  His 
wife  was  still  smaller.  They  were  richly 
dressed,  and  their  jewels  (they  were  the  only 
persons  permitted  to  wear  jewels)  shone  with 


86  Adventures  in  N'eiv  Guinea, 

a  dazzling  lustre.  In  addition  to  the  tigers 
I  have  mentioned  there  were  on  the  outer 
rim  of  the  dais  four  wild-looking  animals 
(bisons,  I  believe  they  were) ;  while  in  the 
trees  which  shaded  the  throne,  and  which 
were  carefully  cultivated,  there  sat  several 
mao;'nificent  wawkoo. 

As  the  king  and  the  queen  descended  from 
their  high  seat  the  crowd  prostrated  them- 
selves, and  so  remained  until  their  Majesties 
had  withdrawn.  The  ceremony,  to  which  so 
many  looked  forward  with  eager  anxiet}^,  had 
DOW  come  to  an  end,  and  we  were  free  to 
return  to  our  houses.  I  may  mention  here 
that  no  sooner  had  the  king  withdrawn  than 
I  was  surrounded  by  an  eager  throng  of 
Orangwok  warriors,  their  wives  anddaughters, 
who  saluted  me,  and  welcomed  me  to  K'ootar, 
pressing  invitations  to  visit  them  at  their 
houses  upon  me.  It  seemed  as  if  I  was  in  a 
charmed  world. 

On  my  return  to  the  house  of  Kayhar  I 
was  welcomed  very  heartily  b}?"  Lamlam,  my 
host's  daughter,  who  was  eager  to  know 
what  I  thought  of  the  great  ceremony.  I 
expressed  my  admiration  and  wonder  at  the 
splendour  which  I  had  seen,  which  gratified 
my  fair  questioner.  I  could  not  help,  how- 
ever, remarking  upon  the  women's  want  of 


Adventures  in  New  Guinea.  87 

costume  on  sucli  occasions.  Lamlam  seemed 
surprised  at  this,  and  said, — 

"  It  is  usual ;  everybody  does  it.  Wliere 
is  the  harm  in  it  ?  " 

'*  It  is  not  done  in  my  country,"  I  replied. 
*'  Any  woman  who  acted  so  would  be  looked 
upon  with  abhorrence  as  indecent." 

This  hurt  the  gentle  Lamlam,  so  I  hastened 
to  explain  that  probably  habit  made  all  the 
difference  between  the  usages  of  diflferent 
people. 

"  Yes,"  she  replied,  "  we  are  accustomed 
to  this  practice  from  the  time  we  are  children, 
and  no  one  refuses  to  conform  to  it  except 
those  who  are  edze  (that  is,  out  of  their 
mind),  and  they  are  sent  out  of  K'ootar. 
Wo  one  is  permitted  to  live  here  who  does 
not  conform  to  our  customs." 


SS  Adveninres  in  Nezv  Guinea- 


CHAPTER  X. 

HoTARwoKoo,^  for  sucli  was  the  name  of  tlie 
king  of  K'ootar,  meaning  the  living  one — 
terrible  king  of  beauty — such,  at  least,  is  the 
nearest  approach  that  can  be  made  in  English 
to  the  meaning  of  the  name — Hotarwokoo 
was  about  thirty  years  old.  He  had  succeeded 
the  previous  king  five  years  before,  and  had 
been  selected  to  succeed  by  a  council  of  the 
iioo.  It  appears  from  what  I  could  learn 
that  the  eldest  son  of  the  king  does  not 
necessarily  succeed  his  father  to  the  throne. 
The  heir  is  elected  by  the  council  of  wise 
men,  who  meet  in  secret,  in  a  darkened 
chamber,  for  the  purpose  of  designating  the 
king's  succesor.  He  must  belong  to  one  of 
the  principal  families,  and  must  not  be  more 
than  four  feet  high ;  for  such  is  one  of  tlie 
absurd  restrictions  imposed  upon  the  choice 

'  The  frequent  recurrence  of  tlie  vowels  oo  in  com- 
bination lias  led  me  to  the  conclusion  that  they  have 
an  adjective  foi'ce  ;  and  that  tliej  are  equivalent  to 
good,  or  y?"ea^.— Ed. 


Adventures  in  New  Guinea.  89 

of  tlie  lioo.  I  could  not  ascertain  how  or 
when  this  restriction  was  first  imposed,  but 
suspect  that  it  was  a  device  of  the  chieftains 
in  an  earlier  age  to  protect  themselves  and 
their  families  from  the  mere  brute  force  of 
their  superior  chief.  But  however  the  practice 
arose,  it  is  certain  that  no  one  now  questions 
its  expediency.  Yet  it  had  a  very  bad  effect 
upon  the  physical  training  of  the  Orangwqks, 
for  it  set  a  kind  of  fashion  of  smalluess, 
which  had  an  injurious  effect  upon  the  people 
generally ;  at  any  rate,  upon  the  chiefs.  The 
present  king  had  the  reputation  of  being  an 
amiable  man,  and  was  held  in  very  high  re- 
gard in  consequence.  I  do  not  know  that  he 
ever  distinguished  himself  in  any  way,  but  as 
the  kingdom  was  prosperous,  and  had  been 
long  at  peace,  much  of  this  favourable  con- 
dition of  things  was  ignorantly  attributed  to 
him ;  and  as  he  did  not  mix  with  the  nobles 
(if  I  may  call  them  by  a  name  which  is  so 
misleading),  and  lived  in  a  very  secluded 
manner,  he  was  held  in  greater  awe,  as  well  as 
affection,  than  any  of  his  predecessors,  I  was 
assured.  I  have  several  times  spoken  of  his 
wife.  I  should  have  mentioned  his  wives,  for 
he  had  seven;  only,  six  of  them  were  not 
supposed  to  be  known,  nor  were  they  ever 
spoken  of  in  the  presence  of  the  wives  and 


90  Adventures  tn  New  Gtiinea. 

daugliters  of  the  otlier  chiefs.  These  wives 
were  never  seen  in  pubhc,  and  nobody  knew 
anything  about  them.  Here  is  a  fitting  place 
to  mention  the  usages  of  the  Orangwok 
nobles  respecting  wives.  Polygamy  was  al- 
lowed, but  was  not  encouraged.  The  women, 
I  was  glad  to  learn,  were  entirely  opposed  to 
it,  except  in  very  exceptional  cases.  No 
chief,  however,  was  permitted  to  have  more 
than  four  wives,  and  they,  like  the  additional 
wives  of  the  king,  were  not  generally  known. 
It  is  not  to  be  supposed  that  many  of  the 
chiefs  really  had  so  many  as  four  wives,  for 
such  was  not  the  case.  For  every  separate 
wife  a  chief  was  bound,  by  strict  custom,  to 
build  and  maintain  a  separate  establishment. 
This  fact  naturally  tended  to  hinder  the 
growth  of  polygamy. 

As  it  is  not  my  intention,  even  if  I  had  the 
ability  or  knowledge  which  would  enable  me 
to  do  so,  to  write  a  book  about  the  customs 
and  habits  of  the  people  of  K'ootar,  I  will 
return  from  this  digression  to  my  own  personal 
adventures  while  in  this  country.  As  I  have 
said,  I  was  heartily  welcomed  by  Kayhar  and 
his  family  on  my  return  from  the  palace,  and 
was  treated  with  great  kindness.  A  room 
was  now  assigned  me  for  my  own  sole  use 
until  it  was  decided  when  I  was  to  start  for 


Adventures  in  Nezv  Guinea.  9! 

tlie  king's  mines.  I  had  also  my  clothing 
restored  to  me,  together  with  several  of  the 
books  and  the  paper  which  had  been  saved 
from  the  wreck.  Both  books  and  paper  were 
a  great  source  of  comfort  to  me.  The  pictures 
were  intensely  amusing  to  Lamlam,  and  when 
she  saw  me  reading  off  the  page  of  the  book 
a  real  story,  which  I  translated  as  well  as  I 
could  as  I  read,  she  was  excessively  astonished, 
and  called  her  mother  to  witness  this  mar- 
vellous feat.  After  seeing  these  things,  and 
seeing  me  use  the  pencil  for  the  purpose  of 
drawing  in  a  rude  way  some  figures,  they 
began  to  question  me  more  minutely  about 
the  great  world  beyond  the  sea.  Next 
morning,  Lamlam  came  to  me,  and  begged 
me  to  teach  her  to  speak  to  the  wonderful 
book.  I  explained,  after  reading  the  English 
aloud,  that  it  would  be  impossible  for  her  to 
understand  it;  but  I  would  teach  her  to  write 
with  the  pencil.  So  apt  was  she  that  before 
the  day  closed  she  had  learnt  several  words, 
quite  a  dozen,  off  by  heart.  The  characters 
were  of  course  English,  but  the  words  spelt 
were'  Orangwok  words.  I  then  wrote  them 
in  the  order  of  a  sentence,  which  she  read 
aloud  with  childish  delight.  This  was  the 
sentence  I  composed  for  her  : — 

"  Pretty    Lamlam    has    asked    Tregan   to 


92  Adventures  in  Neiv  Guinea. 

teacli   her.     Tregan  will   teacli   Lamia  m   to 
read.     Lamlam  is  pretty  and  good." 

Having  read  this  over  again,  making  ont 
each  word  slowly,  she  ran  to  her  mother,  and 
showing  her  what  she  had  on  the  paper,  read 
it  aloud.  Every  day  after  this,  she  came  to 
me  to  give  her  a  lesson,  which  I  gladly  did. 

I  had  a  natural  talent  for  drawing,  and 
although  I  had  not  cultivated  it,  yet  I  could 
draw  anything  that  I  saw  roughly  in  outline. 
One  day  I  took  a  rough  sketch  of  Tannavor- 
koo,  and  showed  it  to  Lamlam.  This  again 
amazed  her,  for  these  people,  though  not 
wanting  in  ability,  yet  had  no  literature  of 
any  kind,  and  made  no  attempt,  beyond  a 
little  carving,  to  imitate  the  works  of  nature. 
They  would  say,  "  If  you  want  a  wawkoo 
keep  one  in  your  house."  I  then,  while 
Lamlam  sat  patiently,  tried  to  make  a  sketch 
of  her  face.  After  a  sort  I  caught  its  ex- 
pression, and  then  gave  the  drawing  to  her. 
Situated  as  I  w^as,  I  resolved  to  endeavour  to 
improve  myself  in  every  way  that  I  could. 
I  felt  that  this  would  relieve  the  tediousness 
of  my  captivity,  for  such  I  began  to  feel  my 
position  to  be.  I  often  walked  out  with 
Kayhar  to  see  the  city.  The  character  of  the 
houses  has  been  described.  Behind  them 
there  ran  in  every  case  a  large  garden-plot — 


Adventures  in  New  Guinea.  93 

in  some  cases  very  large — kept  like  a  park. 
This  park  had  in  it  rare  trees  and  flowers, 
beautiful  specimens  of  thebirds  of  the  country, 
and  an  abundant  supply  of  tropical  fruits. 
jSTearly  every  chief  kept  a  slave,  whose  sole 
business  it  was  to  play  some  musical  instru- 
ment, generally  a  drum.  This  was  accom- 
panied by  a  shrill  instrument,  made  from  a 
bamboo  reed.  Occasionally,  the  more  dis- 
tinguished chiefs  added  a  third  of  gold  bars, 
and  so  formed  a  small  band,  which  played  of 
an  afternoon  in  the  garden-parks.  As  these 
garden-parks  were  attached  to  every  chief's 
house,  K'ootar  covered  a  very  large  extent  of. 
ground. 

After  I  had  been  idle  for  about  three  weeks 
longer,  I  was  warned  that  in  seven  days  (the 
day  after  the  monthly  levee)  I  must  start  for 
the  king's  mines.  I  at  once  signified  my 
readiness  to  start  whenever  his  Majesty 
should  be  pleased  to  direct  me  to  do  so. 

I  left  some  of  my  pencils  and  paper  (indeed 
the  greater  portion  of  the  latter)  with 
Lamlam ;  I  left  her  also  the  illustrated 
<«  Pilgrim's  Progress,"  and  the  pictures.  I 
took  with  me  my  Bible — the  present  of  my 
dear  mistress — some  pencils,  and  a  few  quires 
of  foolscap  paper. 

When  the  time  drew  near  for  me  to  leave 


94  Adventures  in  JVeiu  Guinea. 

tlie  lioiise  of  my  kind  liost,  I  felt  very  heavy 
and  sorrowful.  I  had  become  quite  attached 
to  the  whole  family. 

As  I  was  to  leave  in  the  morning  at  four 
o'clock,  just  as  the  sun  rose,  I  bade  my 
kind  friends  good-bye  (Euglish  fashion)  by 
shaking  hands  overnight,  and  then  retired  to 
rest.  At  four  o'clock  I  was  ready  to  start, 
and  was  preparing  to  leave  the  door-way, 
when  little  Lamlam  entered.  The  tears 
stood  in  her  eyes,  as  she  gave  me  her  hand 
and  bade  me  good-bye  again.  I  was  much 
touched  with  this  instance  of  her  affection, 
and  could  not  resist  the  impulse  to  bid  her 
farewell  Frenchwise,  telling  her  I  would  often 
think  of  Lamlam. 


Adventui'es  in  Nezv  Gtnnea.  95 


CHAPTER  XL 

OcJE  party  consisted  of  the  old  chief,  who 
was  governor  of  the  mining  territory  Watiira, 
and  who  was  accompanied  on  his  return  to 
that  district  by  several  other  chiefs,  a  com- 
pany of  not  less  than  twenty  guards,  several 
— not  fewer  than  six — criminals  (these  were 
picked  up  about  ten  miles  from  K'ootar), 
and  myself.  We  were  all  mounted  on  ponies, 
and  the  guards  were  well  armed.  The  old 
chief  and  his  companions  formed  a  party  of 
their  own,  so  the  officer  in  command  of  the 
troop  invited  me  to  ride  by  his  side,  an 
invitation  which  I  very  gladly  accepted. 
The  sun  was  already  showing  like  a  ball  of 
fire  above  the  eastern  hills,  when  we  started 
from  the  gate  of  K'ootar.  The  rays  of  tho 
sun  were  shining  clearly  and  strongly  on  the 
snowy  tops  of  Tannavorkoo,  dispersing  the 
light  mists  which  hung  around  its  brow. 
Even  now  the  heat  was  great,  but  our 
quick  motion  created  a  pleasant  breeze,  which 
kept  us  beautifully  cool.     At  a  distance  of  ten 


96  Adventures  in  New  Guinea. 

miles  we  readied  a  small  outpost,  consisting 
of  several  guard-houses.  Here  we  took  up 
our  contingent  of  criminals,  for  persons 
under  sentence  for  any  crime  were  not 
allowed  to  come  within  ten  miles  of  K'ootar. 
I  found  now  that  all  criminals  were  sentenced 
to  work  at  the  mines.  And  once  there  it 
was  not  often  that  they  returned  to  K'ootar 
proper.  They  might  collect  sufficient  gold 
at  Watdrd  to  redeem  their  liberty;  and  on 
doing  this  they  were  in  a  position  to  return, 
of  whatever  crime  they  had  been  convicted, 
short  of  treason  against  the  king.  The 
Orangwoks  did  not  appear  to  have  any  idea 
of  the  immoral  nature  of  crime.  Crime  was 
to  them  simply  a  violation  of  the  laws  or 
usages  of  their  land.  It  did  not  leave 
behind  it  any  moral  taint,  which  would 
prevent  the  person  who  had  recovered  his 
liberty  (very  few  ever  did  redeem  themselves, 
I  found)  from  returning  to  his  old  place 
among  his  friends. 

After  baiting  our  hardy  little  ponies — for 
we  had  a  long  day's  ride  before  us — we  started 
again,  the  prisoners  in  the  centre  of  the 
troop.  As  I  rode  by  the  side  of  the  officer 
of  the  troop,  named  Lanna,  I  entered  into 
conversation  with  him  respecting  the  nature 
of  the  prisoners'   offences.     There  was  one 


Adventures  in  New  Guinea.  97 

of  the  criminals,  who  had  a  very  repulsive 
appearance,  sullen  and  cruel-looking.  I 
asked  my  companion  the  nature  of  his 
offence. 

"  He,"  was  the  reply,  "  committed  murder, 
and  stole  the  murdered  man's  property.  He 
escaped  to  the  mountains,  and  defied  all  our 
attempts  to  take  him.  He  was  caught  at 
last  by  a  clever  stratagem." 

"  What  was  its  nature  ?  "  I  asked. 

"  "Well,  it  was  known  that  he  was  very 
fond  of  his  son,  a  boy  of  about  fourteen  years 
old,  very  small  in  stature,  so  our  chief,"  he 
said,  lifting  his  hat,  "  sent  for  the  youth,  and 
had  him  kept  in  close  quarters  until  a  power- 
ful man  of  theyouth's  size  could  be  discovered. 
This  was  a  work  of  some  difficulty,  for 
strength  requires  size."  (At  this  my  friend 
swelled  his  little  body  out  to  its  full  dimen- 
sions.) At  last  a  very  small  man  was  found 
who  was  extremely  powerful.  The  fact  is, 
there  is  not  a  man  in  our  troop,  and  we  have 
some  very  powerful  men  "  (again  my  friend 
inflated  himself)  "  among  us,  who  was  able 
to  hold  him  or  throw  him,  and  what  was  of 
more  importance,  was  able  to  get  out  of  his 
clutches  when  once  in  them.  Now,  the  boy 
was  very  pale,  and  had  a  limp  in  his  left  leg, 
so  our  chief  procured  a  skilful  imitator,  and 

H 


98  Adventures  in  N'ew  Guinea. 

directed  him  to  make  tlie  little  man  like  the 
murderer's  son.  This  was  not  easily  done, 
yet  all  things  yielded  to  skill  and  patience, 
and  at  last  the  boy  was  brought  into  the 
presence  of  our  chief.  *Well,  my  boy,'  ho 
said,  '  so  3'ou  wish  to  return  to  your  home  ? ' 

" '  If  you  will  graciously  allow  me  to  do 
so,'  was  the  reply. 

"  The  chief  started.  He  had  been  deceived 
by  the  striking  likeness  to  the  murderer's 
son. 

"  This  man  was  now  sent  to  the  moun- 
tains, and  shortly  found  himself  in  the 
embrace  of  yonder  villain.  You  may 
imagine  the  scoundrel's  surprise  to  find  that 
his  beloved  son  grasped  him  so  firmly,  and 
that  by  no  effort  could  he  succeed  in  freeing 
himself  from  that  iron  grasp.  At  first  he 
thought  his  son  was  edze.  But  when  he 
learned  the  fact  that  he  was  actually  in  the 
hands  of  his  enemies  his  rage  knew  no  bounds. 
It  was  a  clever  trick,"  continued  the  youug 
officer,  laughing  heartily  at  his  recollection 
of  the  stratagem, 

"  And  can  that  man  return  again  to  \h.Q 
society  of  innocent  people  after  a  time  ? 
How  many  years  is  he  sentenced  to  remain 
at  the  mines  ?  " 

*'  He  may  never  come  back  again.     The 


Adventures  in  New  Guinea.  99 

probability  is  tliafc  he  will  turn  scoundrel 
there,  and  die  at  the  mines.  He  is  not  sent 
for  any  particular  time,  only  until  he  has 
raised  a  certain  amount  of  gold.  The  time 
he  takes  to  do  this  will  depend  upon  his  luck 
as  well  as  his  skill  and  industry.  And  when 
he  has  done  this,  why  shouldn't  he  return  to 
K'ootar  ?  He  is  not  worse  than  others.  All 
men  have  murder  in  their  hearts." 

"  And  w^ho  is  that  young  man,  with  rather 
a  pleasant,  intelligent-looking  face,  who  is 
bound  with  the  murderer  ?" 

"  He  is  a  worse  character  still.  You  see 
how  you  may  be  deceived  by  a  man's  face." 

"  "What  did  he  do,  then  ?  I  cannot  imagine 
a  much  worse  crime  than  that  of  the  man  you 
have  told  me  of." 

"  He  burnt  down  one  of  the  groves  at 
Otaroo." 

On  saying  this,  the  man  reverently  lifted 
his  hat,  and  relapsed  into  silence.  This  was 
the  first  hint  I  had  of  anything  like  the  exis- 
tence of  a  reliofious  belief  or  service  amons^ 
these  people,  but  I  could  not  obtain  any  fur- 
ther information  on  the  subject  at  that  time. 

TVe  had  been  travelling  rapidly,  and  were 

now  approaching  the  termination  of  the  j^lain, 

in  a  south-westerly  direction  from  K'ootar. 

"We  now  halted,  and  under  the  shelter  of  a 

H  2 


lOO         Adventures  in  New  Guinea. 

high  rocky  peak,  which  started  out  of  the 
plain,  we  dismounted  to  refresh  ourselves.  It 
was  about  seven  o'clock,  and  as  it  was  our  inten- 
tion to  reach  a  certain  posting-house  by  eleven 
o'clock,  we  halted  for  half  an  hour  only,  enter- 
ing the  mountain  range  at  eight  o'clock.  For 
the  next  two  days  we  did  nothing  but  climb 
steep,  dangerous  paths,  hedged  in  by  yawn- 
ing precipices  on  the  one  side,  and  blank 
stone  walls  on  the  other.  But  our  little  beasts 
were  hardy  and  sure-footed ;  never  giving  a 
chance  in  all  the  journey.  Towards  the  end 
of  the  second  day  we  met  a  company  descend- 
ing the  mountain.  They  were  laden  with 
gold,  and  were  strongly  armed.  After  we  had 
passed  the  descending  troop,  I  asked  my 
companion, — 

"  Is  there  ever  any  attempt  to  rob  these 
escorts  of  their  gold  ?  " 

"  There  used  to  be,"  he  replied,  with  a 
strange  smile. 

"And  were  these  attempts  successful?"  I 
asked. 

"  I  will  answer  you  presently,"  was  Lanna's 
reply. 

We  now  entered  a  plantation  of  thick  trees, 
through  which  the  road  lay.  When  we  reached 
the  centre  of  this  grove  I  was  conscious  of  an 
excessively  offensive    smell,  which  poisoned 


Adventures  in  New  Gtdnea.  loi 

the  whole  atmosphere.  Before  I  could  obtain 
any  answer  to  my  eager  questions  my  com- 
panion stopped,  and,  pointing  to  a  tall  tree, 
showed  me  the  corrupting  bodies  of  five  men. 
They  were  enfolded  by  the  coils  of  a  huge 
snake,  which  was  wound  around  them  very 
elaborately.  The  snake,  of  the  boa-constrictor 
kind,  was  about  seventeen  feet  in  length.  Of 
course  it  was  dead,  and  bad  been  used  as 
the  instrument  of  death  to  the  unfortunate 
men. 

*'  There,"  said  the  officer,  "  there  are  the 
men  who  attempted  to  rob  a  guard  of 
Orangwoks  of  the  gold  they  were  carrying 
to  the  king." 

He  said  this  with  a  curl  of  contempt  on 
his  lip. 

We  were  glad  to  get  beyond  the  range  of 
this  poisonous  stink.  In  another  hour  (we 
were  still  rising)  we  entered  a  small  plain 
enclosed  in  the  mountains.  It  was  a  black, 
weird-looking  spot;  no  trees  grew  upon  it, 
and  only  the  most  stunted  kind  of  herbage. 
The  sun  never  shone  upon  it,  for  his  rays  were 
intercepted  by  the  high  mountain  peaks  that 
were  all  around.  Only  in  one  place  did  the 
light  of  the  sun  fall,  and  there  only  for  half 
an  hour  in  the  day.  As  we  entered  this 
dreary-looking    level,    our    leader,    pointing 


I02  Adventures  hi  N'ew  Gtiinea. 

with  his  sword  to  a  high  ledge  of  rock,  con- 
siderably beyond  us,  said, — 

"  There  are  robbers.     Orangwoks,  ready." 
And  in  a  short  space  six  of  our  troops  were 
careering  at  full  speed  towards  the  robbers, 
who  sat  for  a  time  in  ignorance  of  our  ap- 
proach.    No  sooner,  however,  did  they  see 
us,  than  they  rose  to  their  feet,  and  began  to 
scramble  up  the  steep  hill- side  with  great  speed. 
Our  troop  followed  them  on  their  ponies,  the 
little  things  climbing  like  goats.  We  watched 
the  pursuit  with  interest ;  all  except  the  chief 
and  his  immediate  friends,  who  sat  apart  and 
took  no  notice  of  such  contemptible  things  as 
robbers.  Our  interest  was  sustained  by  seeing 
that  the  troop  was  gaining  upon  one  of  the  rob- 
bers, who  had  separated  himself  from  his  com- 
panions. At  last  springing  up  the  steep  face  of 
a  huge  rock,  he  signified  by  his  movements 
that  he  had  escaped.     His   triumph  was  of 
short  duration,  for  one  of  the  troop,  springing 
from  his  pony,  climbed  up  the  face  of  the  same 
rock,  and,  on  the  robber  attempting  to  push 
him   back  again,    grappled   with    him,    and 
pulled  him  down  the  steep  side  of  the  cliff. 
We  heard  one  cry,  as  the  two  men  came  roll- 
ing down  first  the  rock  and  then  the  steep 
side  of  the  hill,  thumping  from  stone  to  stone 
like  huge  boulders.     When  their  descent  was 


Adventures  in  Neiv  Gninea.  103 

cliecked  tliey  were  both  dead — bruised  and 
beaten  to  pieces.  After  catcliing  tlie  unfor- 
tunate trooper's  pony,  and  taking  off  his  dress 
and  arms,  we  rode  on  as  if  nothing  had  hap- 
pened, leaving  the  bodies  unburied. 

*'  The  king  has  one  enemy  less,"  said  my 
companion,  "  and  one  soldier  less,  but  as  he 
has  more  soldiers  than  enemies  the  king  is  a 
gainer  by  this  result." 

Our  chief  had  hardly  condescended  to 
notice  the  result  of  the  fray,  an  indifference 
to  human  life  which  did  not  raise  him  in  my 
estimation. 


I04  Adventures  in  New  Guinea, 


CHAPTER  XII. 

This  little  episode  gave  me  an  insight  of  the 
Orangwok  character,  which  was  a  very  un- 
pleasant and  painful  one.  It  showed  that 
there  was  an  indifference  to  human  life  and 
suffering,  which  was  surprising,  when  con- 
trasted with  their  advancement  in  some  other 
respects. 

We  had  now  reached  an  altitude  of  ten  or 
twelve  thousand  feet,  I  should  think,  and 
began  to  feel  the  change  in  the  state  of  the 
atmosphere  very  keenly  at  night.  JSText  day  we 
continued  our  advance  upward,  in  a  more 
direct  route,  and  saw  at  times  the  line  of  snow, 
which  was  not  far  from  us.  I  may  here  say, 
without  particularizing  any  further,  that  our 
route  lay  through  the  Tannavorkoo  moun- 
tains, and  that  the  path  which  we  travelled 
was  cut  out  of  the  solid  rock  in  many  places, 
and  although  well  made  for  a  mountain  path, 
yet  we  had  many  perilous  and  difficult  pas- 
sages to  pass. 

About  noon,  on   the  third   day,  we   had 


Adventures  in  New  Guinea.  105 

readied  the  snow  limit,  and  should,  my  friend 
informed  me,  begin  to  descend  at  once.  No 
person  ever  climbed  beyond  the  position  we 
had  now  attained,  for  the  spirit  of  Tanna- 
vorkoo  lived  beyond.  He  could  be  heard 
talking  to  himself  frequently,  and  no  one 
would  venture  to  intrude  upon  his  privacy.  It 
is  often  said  that  sailors  are  superstitious,  yet 
the  Orangwoks  are  as  full  of  superstitions  as 
any  sailor  that  I  have  ever  known.  Anything 
that  is  unknown  to  them  they  invest  with  life, 
and  strange  and  terrible  powers,  and  although 
they  do  not  always  worship  it,  yet  they  are 
always  afraid  of  it.  They  were  afraid,  I 
gathered  from  my  companion,  of  the  spirit  of 
the  mountain,  and  gave  him  a  wide  berth,  by 
not  venturing  higher  than  our  present  halting- 
place.  We  were  now  fully  fifteen  thousand  feet 
above  the  level  of  the  sea.^ 

I  had  never  been  so  high  in  the  air  in  my 
life.  The  prospect  was  wonderful  and  fasci- 
nating. The  eye  was  carried  over  all  the  lower 
winter  territory  of  the  Orangwoks — the  plain 
which  was  first  entered  by  the  priest  and  my- 
self.    Of  course,  I  could  not  distinguish  any- 

^  It  must  be  borne  in  mind  that  all  the  measurements 
of  space  and  time  in  this  narration  are  mere  approxima- 
tions to  the  fact.  Tregan  had  no  means  of  determining 
either  distance  or  time  with  accuracy. — Ed. 


io6  Adventures  in  New  Guinea. 

thing  at  tliis  distance,  except  tlie  lake,  which 
I  formerly  mentioned.  This  I  could  now 
see,  like  an  immense  blue  cloud  lying  on  the 
ground. 

"We  halted  at  night,  some  hundreds  of  yards 
lower  down  than  the  highest  point  we  had 
reached  at  noon.     It  was  well  that  we  had 
descended  so  far,  for  a  storm  came  on  during 
the   night,    and  swept  round  the  mountain 
peaks  with  great  violence.  I  had  never  heard 
such  thunder  as  rolled  about  the  rocky  sides 
of  the  range,  crash  after  crash,  reminding  me 
of  the  firing  of  heavy  artillery,  followed  by  a 
long   rolling    sound,   which    shook  the    hill, 
coming  when  least  expected,  and  from  unex- 
pected quarters.     Roll  after  roll  of  thunder, 
long-continued    vivid    flashes    of   lightning, 
forked,  and  in  broad  sheets  of  flame.     Such 
were  some  of  the  phenomena,  and  these  con- 
tinued for  some  hours.     All  the  while  heavy 
rain  fell,  soaking  us  to  the  skin,  for  we  w:ere 
only  under  the  shelter  of  an  old  shed  made 
of  rough  logs,  and  put  up  very  carelessly.  As 
I   listened    to  the  thunder,  rolling  about  so 
grandl}^,  I  could  fancy  there  was   some   wild 
spirit  upon  the  mountain — such  a  fancy  had 
probably  suggested  itself  to  the  minds  of  the 
Orangwoks,  and  given  rise  to  the  superstition 
of  which  I  have   spoken.     After  the    storm 


Adventures  in  New  Guinea.  107 

passed  off,  which  it  did  in  about  two  hours, 
we  made  ourselves  a  little  comfortaljle,  and 
waited  for  the  raornino^. 

I  was  awakened  by  a  loud  report,  as  if  of  a 
cannon,  followed  by  noises  above  our  heads. 
My  friend  said, — 

"Hark!  Tannavorkoo  sp.eaks.     Listen!" 

After  listening  for  a  short  time,  I  thought 
I  understood  the  cause  of  the  noises.  They 
reminded  me  of  the  breaking  up  of  ice,  which 
I  had  heard  when  at  sea  in  southern  latitudes, 
so  I  concluded  that  there  was  a  lake  above  our 
heads,  farther  up  the  mountain,  and  that  it  was 
covered  with  thick  ice,  which  was  now  break- 
ing up  under  the  action  of  the  heavy  rain.^ 

These  sounds,  which  were  frequently  heard, 
were  supposed  by  the  Orangwoks  to  proceed 
from  the  spirit  of  Tannavorkoo,  and  always 
portended  mischief.  This  superstition  made  the 
old  chief,  and  other  members  of  our  party, 
extremely  anxious  to  descend  the  mountain  ; 
yet  no  one  dared  to  move  until  dayhght,  as 
the  paths  were  narrow  and  perilous.  By  the 
first  streak  of  light  we  were  on  our  way 
down,  glad  to  be  on  the  move,  as  the  cold  was 
intense.  Our  path  was  now  exceedingly 
dangerous,  as  the  water  rushed  over  it  in 
torrents,  and  broke  across  our  road  at  many 
2  This  was  probably  a  glacier. — Ed. 


io8  Adventures  in  New  Guinea. 

points.  The  noise,  too,  of  cataracts  and 
waterfalls  filled  the  atmosphere  with  disturb- 
ing, although  pleasant  sounds.  In  about  a 
couple  of  hours  we  were  able  to  travel  with 
greater  rapidity,  as  the  road  was  much  better, 
and  from  this  point  all  the  danger  and  much 
of  the  diflB-Culty  of  our  route  were  over.  We 
descended  with  great  rapidity.  At  night  the 
atmosphere  was  again  pleasant,  although  rather 
cool.  As  we  lay  watching  the  sky  and  the  large 
bright  stars  which  filled  the  field  of  vision, 
my  companion  drew  my  attention  to  the 
flashes  of  a  bright  light  on  our  right,  and 
said, — 

"  Tannavorkoo's  kitchen.  He  is  cooking 
his  food." 

I  looked,  and  after  watching  for  a  time,  I 
saw  a  deep,  rose-coloured  light,  like  that 
caused  by  the  reflection  of  a  large  fire.  The 
light  kept  changing  its  outline,  rising  and 
falling,  and  spreading  itself  about.  I  could 
imagine  some  part  of  the  mountain  on  fire. 
There  was  hanging  over  the  spot  a  mass  of 
dark  clouds,  the  outline  of  which  was  con- 
tinually changing,  being  affected  by  the 
changes  of  the  light;  but  the  mass  itself 
never  seemed  to  move.  As  I  had  seen  one 
volcano  in  active  work,  T  came  to  the  con- 
clusion that  this  was  a  volcano — one  of  the 


Adventures  in  New  Guinea.  109 

many  in  active  operation  in  the  interior  of  the 
country.     It  was  a  grand  sight,  and  I  felt  a 
rush  of  pleasurable  feelings  as  I  looked  upon 
these  wonders  of  this   unknown  land,    and 
felt  that  I  was  the  first   European  who  had 
ever  penetrated  so  far.  My  thoughts  naturally 
went  back  to  my  early  home,  and  the  expe- 
riences of  my  past   life.     I  recalled  the  little 
graveyard,  in  which  lay  the  dust  of  my  dear 
father,  and  wondered   would  my   dust  ever 
mingle  with  his  ;  and  then  I  reflected  upon  his 
teaching,  and  asked  myself  how  far  I  had  en- 
deavoured to  profit  by  it,  and  was  constrained 
to  confess  that  I  had  too  often  failed.     Such 
thoughts    so  worked  upon  my  mind,  that  I 
rose  up  from  my  place,  and  kneeling  down,  as 
my  companions  slept,  offered  a  prayer  to  God. 
I  had  not  done  this  for  years,  although  I  had 
not  lived  without  the  sense  of  God's  presence. 
My  mind  was  more  composed,  yet  I  could  not 
sleep,  for  I  began  again  to  think  of  the  past. 
I  thought  of  my  poor  mother,  and  shed  tears 
at  the  thought  of  her  sufferings  and  her  sorrow 
on  my  account.     She  would,  I  felt,  never  see 
me  again. 

Dear  Miss  Cunningham,  to  whom  I  owed 
so  much,  rose  before  me,  and  I  felt  compelled 
to  review  all  her  kindness  to  me ;  and  Philip, 
my  early  friend  and  brother,  and  our  long 


I  lo  Adventtwes  in  N'eiu  Guinea, 

painful  travel,  wlien  we  ran  away  from 
our  homes  ten  years  ago — tliese  passed  before 
me.  Poor  Philip  !  his  bones  were  lying  in 
the  ocean,  to  wait  the  coming  of  the  Day  of 
Judgment.  And  thus  my  night  passed  away, 
in  melancholy  recollections  of  the  past. 

In  the  morning,  I  was  informed  that  our 
journey  would  terminate  on  the  following 
day.  We  were  descending  rapidly,  and  entered 
upon  a  large  valley,  filled  with  trees  and  rich 
vegetation.  The  sides  of  the  mountain  were 
clothed  with  short  trees,  of  the  fir  kind  in 
appearance,  very  much  like  some  of  those 
which  grow  in  our  public  parks,  only  much 
smaller.  Here,  in  the  valley  mentioned,  the 
trees  were  large,  and  the  foliage  rich  and 
plentiful.  I  will  close  this  chapter  by  relating 
an  interesting  conversation  held  between  my 
friend  Lanna  and  myself.  On  this  day,  as 
we  rode  together,  he  said  to  me,- — • 

"  I  saw  you  get  up  last  night,  and  fall 
down  upon  your  knees ;  your  lips  moved. 
What  were  you  saying?  " 

"  I  was  praying;  speaking  to  my  God." 
"  Who  is  he  ?     What  is  his  name  ?  " 
"  His  name  is  Grod,  and  He  lives  up  yonder, 
beyond  Otaroo  (the  sun)." 

At  my  mentioning  the  word  sun  (Otaroo), 
my  companion  lifted   his   hat,  and   replied, 


Adventures  in  Nezu  Guinea:  1 1 1 

"  Is    lie,  to  whom  you  spoke,   greater  than 
Otaroo?" 

I  replied  by  suggesthig  that  Otaroo  was 
probably  the  same  God,  and  that  he  lived 
beyond  the  stars,  or  beyond  the  sun  (for  the 
Orangwoks  think  the  stars  are  only  little 
pieces  of  light  stuck  in  the  heavens),  and  that 
this  name  was  given  to  him  because  it  was 
the  only  thing  worthy  to  represent  him.  On 
my  saying  this,  my  companion  became 
thoughtful,  and  the  conversation  ceased. 


112         Adventures  in  New  Guinea, 


CHAPTER  XIII. 

The  change,  when  we  readied  tlie  large 
valley,  was  exceedingly  agreeable,  for  the 
cold  farther  up  the  Tannavorkoo  had  been 
excessive.  We  were  now  warned  that  travel- 
ling was  dangerous  from  other  causes,  and 
advised  to  keep  together,  and  to  keep  a  good 
look-out.  Wild  animals  were  plentiful  a 
little  farther  down,  so  too  were  serpents,  for 
in  this  part  of  the  country,  which  was  not 
frequented  much  by  the  natives,  wild  beasts 
and  snakes  abounded.  By  nightfall  we  had 
entered  upon  a  broad  plain  covered  with  the 
usual  foliage  of  tropical  countries.  The  heat 
was  now  considerable.  Next  day  we  should 
be  at  the  mines. 

About  eight  o'clock  the  next  morning  the 
plain  narrowed  itself  to  a  large  valley,  through 
which  our  course  lay.  We  halted  before 
entering  this  comparatively  narrow  defile,  for 
hills  rose  on  either  side  of  it  whose  sides  were 
thickly  covered  with  immense  trees.  Here 
we  were  informed  that  our  eyes,  those  of  the 


Adventures  in  New  Guinea.  1 1 3 

prisoners  and  myself,  must  be  bandaged,  as 
the  passage  was  one  of  considerable  danger. 
I  did  not  like  the  idea,  and  begged  that  I 
might  be  allowed  to  ride  with  my  eyes  un- 
covered, as  I  could  look  upon  anything. 
Lanna,  my  friend,  informed  me,  however, 
that  it  was  absolutely  necessary  that  I  should 
be  blindfolded,  and  advised  me  to  submit  and 
leave  myself  with  confidence  in  his  hands, 
comforting  me  with  the  assurance  that  all 
would  be  well.  When  we  had  all  been  ban- 
daged, the  guards  took  hold  of  our  bridles  to 
lead  us.  I  thought  the  pony's  head  had  been 
turned  about,  as  we  began  to  move,  but  was 
not  sure.  From  a  quick  ambling  pace  we 
passed  into  a  gallop,  and  I  found  it  very 
difficult  to  keep  my  seat,  for  I  could  not 
assist  my  judgment  with  my  sight,  so  I  was 
constrained  to  hold  on  by  clutching  the  pony's 
long  mane  with  both  hands.  For  half  an 
hour  at  least  this  pace  was  kept  up,  greatly 
to  my  inconvenience.  At  the  end  of  that 
space  of  time  we  halted,  and  after  a  few 
minutes'  delay  our  eyes  were  unbandaged. 
We  were  standing  before  the  mouth  of  the 
valley  down  which  we  had  galloped.  We 
were  now  informed  of  the  reason  for  blind- 
folding us.  This  was  the  celebrated  serpents' 
valley,  of  which  one  heard  so  much  at  Watara, 

I 


% 


114  Advenhires  in  Neiv  Guinea, 

and  wliich  had  much  to  do  with  keeping 
people  at  the  mining  country;  for  it  was  a 
dangerous  undertaking  to  travel  through  this 
opening,  and  no  other  way  to  K'ootar  was 
known.  As  we  stood  here  to  give  our  ponies 
a  blow,  my  guide  volunteered  to  take  me 
back  to  the  entrance  of  the  valley,  that  I 
might  get  a  better  idea  of  the  way  we  had 
come.  I  consented,  and,  on  our  approaching 
its  mouth,  I  was  struck  very  much  by  the 
height  and  size  of  the  trees.  Their  clear 
stems  ran  up  nearly  a  hundred  feet  before 
the  limbs  began  to  appear  on  them,  and  were 
very  thick.  Here  too  were  many  palm-trees, 
whose  feather-like  plumes  gave  a  graceful 
appearance  to  the  whole  valley.  There  was 
also  a  large  tree-flower  in  this  valley,  which 
was  now  in  full  bloom.  The  flower  was  a 
bright  -scarlet,  which  hung  suspended  in  long 
folding  pendants  from  the  branches.  At  a 
distance  one  might  easily  imagine  these 
scarlet  trees  to  be  trees  of  fire,  whose  pen- 
dants, as  they  moved  in  the  wind,  were  the 
flames  leaping  and  jumping.  I  was  lost  in 
admiration  as  I  contemplated  these  things ; 
and  as  we  continued  to  advance  up  the  valley, 
new  beauties  opened  out  before  us. 

"  Stop  !  beware,  Tregan  !  "  cried  my  guide 
in  warning  tones. 


Adventures  in  Neiv  Guinea.  1 1 5 

I  stopped  at  once,  and,  looking  forward 
under  his  direction,  saw  a  vast  snake  cnrk^d 
lip  at  the  foot  of  a  tall  tree  in  front  of  us. 
I  could  not  judge  of  its  length,  yet  it  must 
have  been  very  great.  Another  and  another 
of  these  coils  were  pointed  out  by  him,  and  I 
had  an  unpleasant  sensation  of  cool  perspi- 
ration oozing  out  of  the  pores  of  my  skin. 

"  Take  care,  take  care  !  "  he  cried  out  in 
terror,  and  catching  my  pony  by  the  head 
he  pulled  me  back  towards  the  mouth  of  the 
valley. 

After  we  had  got  away  some  twenty  yards, 
I  saw  an  immense  boa-constrictor  curled 
round  the  stem  of  the  tree,  near  which  we 
had  been  standing.  The  beast's  neck  was 
stretched  some  ten  or  twelve  feet  over  the 
pathway,  and  its  head  kept  rising  and  falling 
in  much  the  same  way  as  I  have  seen  that  of 
a  turkey  wriggle  about.  The  terrible  reptile 
had  evidently  been  sunning  itself,  and,  having 
been  awakened  by  our  approach,  had  pro- 
ceeded to  uncoil  its  immense  body  in  order 
to  obtain  its  mid-day  meal.  It  was  not  less 
than  sixty  feet  long,  I  am  sure,  for  I  counted 
at  least  six  coils  round  the  body  of  the  tree — 
allowing  seven  feet  for  the  length  of  each 
coil,  and  fifteen  feet  for  the  head  and  neck,  I 
made  it  out  about  sixty  feet  long.  After 
I  2 


1 1 6  Adventures  in  New  Guinea, 

this  we  hurried  back  to  the  guard,  and  re- 
ported "what  we  had  seen.  Several  of  the 
prisoners  expressing  a  wish  to  see  the  serpent, 
they  were  permitted  to  approach  the  mouth 
of  the  valley  to  catch  a  distant  glimpse  of 
the  boa,  with  which  they  were  quite  satisfied. 
I  learned  afterwards — some  years  afterwards 
— that  this  valley  was  never  traversed  by  any 
persons ;  that  the  escorts  really  made  a  con- 
siderable detouTy  and  came  out  through  a 
secret  channel  whose  approaches  were  care- 
fully hidden  by  trees  and  rocks.  This  fact 
was  concealed  from  the  mining  population, 
to  hinder  their  return  to  K'ootar.  They 
knew  of  no  other  path  than  that  through  the 
boa  valley,  and  were  too  fearful  of  its  horrors 
to  dare  an  attempt  through  it.  Some  had 
indeed  attempted  to  pass  through  it,  but,  as 
they  had  never  been  heard  of  again,  it  was 
"universally  believed  that  they  had  been 
destroyed  by  the  serpents ;  and  there  can  be 
little  doubt  that  such  was  the  case.  I  have 
heard  somewhere  that  an  army  was  once 
stopped  by  a  great  snake,  and  I  can  readily 
believe  that  the  boas  in  this  valley  would 
hinder  the  progress  of  the  bravest  army,  if 
not  completely  obstruct  it.  From  this  point 
our  road  lay  along  a  well-sheltered  plain,  the 
track  running   by  the    side  of  tall,  thickly- 


Adventures  in  Neio  Guinea.  1 1 7 

foliaged  trees.  In  about  an  hour  from  our 
leaving  the  valley,  I  was  startled  by  hearing 
a  cry  for  help,  the  sound  coming,  as  it  seemed 
to  me,  from  directly  over  my  head.  On 
looking  upward  I  was  horrified  to  see  an  un- 
fortunate wretch  fastened  to  a  tall  tree  by 
means  of  ropes,  and  near  him  was  a  small 
snake  about  eio-ht  feet  lono^.  The  snake  was 
standing  erect,  and  hissing  at  the  unfortunate 
man,  who  was  beating  his  hands  wildly,  and 
trying  to  avoid  the  fangs  of  the  serpent. 

"  Can  we  not  help  him  ?  "  I  asked,  greatly 
excited. 

"  No,  he  is  a  criminal,  and  must  die. 
Better  to  die  thus  than  wait  to  be  starved  or 
torn  to  pieces  by  birds.     He  is  fortunate." 

The  snake  had  now  bitten  the  man,  at 
least  so  I  judged,  for  he  gave  a  scream  of 
fear  and  pain,  and  seized  the  serpent's  head 
with  his  half-loosened  hands.  The  venomous 
beast  now  curled  itself  rapidly  round  the 
neck  and  arms  of  the  poor  man,  and  strove 
to  draw  its  head  to  the  man's  face.  But 
desperation  gave  the  poor  fellow  strength, 
and  for  a  long  time  he  resisted  successfully. 
At  last  his  strength  failed,  and  we  saw,  to 
my  great  horror,  the  snake's  fangs  steadily 
approaching  the  man's  open  mouth,  for  he 
was    nearly    suffocated.      I    could   look    no 


Ii8  Adven{7ires  in  Nczu  Guinea. 

longer,  and,  turning  my  head  away,  continued 
my  journey.  Again  I  remarked  that  the  old 
chief  was  indifferent,  and  gave  no  more  than 
a  single  glance  at  the  unfortunate  criminal, 
who  was  suffering  so  terrible  a  death.  In 
another  half-mile  we  saw  a  number  of  birds 
hoveringj  over  a  tree,  and  on  our  reaching:  it 
saw  another  unfortunate  creature  chained  in 
its  upper  branches.  He  was  vainly  trying 
to  defend  himself  from  the  attacks  of  an 
immense  eagle  which  sailed  backwards  and 
forwards,  every  now  and  then  descending 
upon  the  poor  wretch  and  striking  him  with 
its  powerful  talons.  AYhen  we  were  seen  the 
poor  fellow  cried  to  us  in  piteous  terms  to 
save  him.  This,  however,  was  impossible. 
The  old  chief  was  immovable,  so  we  were 
compelled  to  ride  on,  and  leave  him  to  his 
fate.  Another  and  another  tree  contained 
the  corrupting  corpses  of  men  who  had  shared 
similar  fates.  These  things  made  mo  look 
upon  the  governor  of  the  gold-mines  with 
feelings  of  distrust,  and  I  began  to  regret 
that  I  was  so  completely  in  the  power  of  such 
a  cruel  despot. 

Now  we  reached  a  broad  river,  nearly  half 
a  mile  wide,  formed  by  the  confluence  of  all 
the  mountain  streams.  The  river  was  deep 
and  rapid,  and  sometimes   its  passage  was 


AdventiLves  in  Neiv  Guinea.  119 

exceedingly  dangerous.  It  was  crossed  by 
means  of  rough  planking  laid  upon  inflated 
skins,  which  were  kept  supplied  by  proper 
persons  appointed  to  take  care  of  them.  As 
the  planking  was  not  more  than  three  feet 
wide,  and  had  no  protection  on  either  side, 
the  crossing  was  no  pleasant  undertaking, 
especially  as  the  planks  jumped  up  and  down 
under  our  feet  as  if  they  were  elastic.  They 
were  also  deflected  by  the  strong  current 
that  was  running,  so  that  they  formed  almost 
a  semicircle  whose  extreme  points  were 
resting  on  either  bank. 

Here  we  all  dismounted,  and,  handing  our 
ponies  to  the  guards,  proceeded  to  walk  over 
the  narrow  crossing.  The  ponies,  after  their 
bridles  had  been  tied  to  a  long  rope,  were 
plunged  into  the  Avater,  one  of  the  guards 
swimming  in  front  of  them,  and  leading  them. 
They  accomplished  the  crossing  with  some 
difficulty,  and  came  safe  to  the  other  side. 


120         Adventtires  in  New  Guinea, 


CHAPTER  XIV. 

After  crossing  tlie  river,  whicli  is  called 
Irfak,  we  proceeded  in  a  northerly  direction, 
and  arrived  in  about  an  hour  and  a  half  at 
the  mining  country.  I  had  expected  to  see 
tents  and  windlasses,  with  all  the  parapher- 
nalia of  a  digging  life,  to  which  I  had  been 
accustomed  in  Australia,  and  was  therefore 
disappointed  to  see  no  such  indication  at 
Watara,  for  so  was  the  whole  of  the  gold- 
bearing  region  called.  For  miles  the  country 
was  covered  with  men  in  the  dress  of  the 
common  Orangwoks,  only  dirtier,  who  were 
engaged  in  the  work  of  procuring  gold.  We 
hardly  stopped,  but  pushed  on  rapidly  until 
we  reached  the  town  of  Watara.  This  was 
the  place  where  most  of  the  miners  lived. 
Here  they  had  their  houses,  such  of  them,  at 
least,  as  possessed  houses ;  here,  at  any  rate, 
most  of  them  lived.  Watdrd,  named  after 
the  gold-bearing  country,  was  a  large  town, 
the  largest,  indeed,  in  the  kingdom  of 
Orangwok.     There  were  fully  10,000  miners 


Adventures  in  Neiv  Gtnnea.  121 

living  here,  and  quite  3000  women  and 
children,  besides  the  governor's  staff  of 
guards,  by  which  order  was  duly  maintained. 
Altogether,  the  population  could  not  be  much 
less  than  15,000. 

The  first  night  was  spent  in  the  governor's 
quarters,  and  on  the  next  day,  the  old  chief 
took  me  with  him  on  a  tour  of  inspection 
over  the  digging  country.  It  is  unnecessary 
to  describe  this  country,  farther  than  by 
saying  that  it  consisted  of  hills  and  valleys, 
and  was  evidently  formed  by  some  volcanic 
eruption.  The  gold  was  found  principally  in 
the  valleys,  and  on  the  sides  of  the  hills.  It 
was  picked  out  of  the  surface  to  a  depth  of 
two  or  three  feet.  There  had  been  no  attempt 
to  sink  holes — no  attempt  to  wash  the  soil. 
This  at  once  showed  me  that  there  was  a 
capital  field  for  the  exercise  of  the  knowledge- 
I  had  gained  on  the  Australian  diggings.  ,  I 
remarked  this  to  my  companion,  who  had 
never  opened  his  lips  since  we  had  left  his 
camp,  or  quarters. 

"  It  will  be  well  for  you,  if  it  is  as  you  say. 
Words  should  not  be  like  the  wind." 

This  was  said  in  an  ominous  tone  of  voice, 
and  did  not  restore  my  confidence  in  the  old 
tyrant.  I  said  no  more,  but  on  reaching  the 
quarters  of  the  governor,  said, — 


122  Adventures  in  Nezv  Guinea. 

"  Give  me  wood  and  tools,  and  I  will  prove 
mj  words." 

I  had  resolved  to    make   a  "  Ions:  Tom," 
such  as  I  had  seen  in  Victoria. 

On  the  hills  we  had  visited,  the  men  were 
picking  out  gold  nuggets  of  various  sizes — ■ 
the  small  gold  was  entirely  lost.  I  saw  that 
the  soil  which  was  thus  thrown  aside,  was 
full  of  fine  gold-dust,  not  that  I  could  actually 
see  the  gold  in  the  earth,  but  I  knew  from 
my  knowledge  of  gold-digging  that  such  was 
the  case,  that  where  there  were  such  rough 
pieces  there  would  be  plenty  of  fine  gold. 
Hence  my  idea  of  the  "  long  Tom,"  for  I 
proposed  to  carry  this  earth  and  wash  it  in 
the  river  below,  by  means  of  the  apparatus  I 
was  making.  Several  rough  pieces  of  wood 
were  brought,  by  some  assistants,  placed  at 
my  disposal,  and,  with  the  help  of  the  flint 
tools,  I  succeeded  in  knocking  up  a  "  long 
Tom"  composed  of  three  compartments,  and 
having  a  fine  sieve  made  of  twisted  grass  or 
hemp.  The  old  chief  came  every  day  to  look 
at  my  work;  so,  too,  did  my  young  friend, 
the  officer  of  the  troop,  and  he  gave  me  a 
hint  that  the  former  was  by  no  means  too 
well  affected  towards  me. 

"However,"  he  said,  "your  life  is  quite 
safe,  for  he  would  not  dare  to  harm  you  if 


Adventures  in  New  Guinea.         123 

you  are  successful  in  your  undertaking,  as  I 
am  sure  you  ^yill  be." 

"  And  how  long  must  I  remain  here,"  I 
asked,  "  if  I  succeed  in  what  I  have  promised 
to  do  ?  " 

*'  That  depends,  to  some  extent,  upon  the 
governor.  You  see  he  can  send  what  report 
he  likes  about  you,  and  if  it  suits  him  to  keep 
you  here,  he  may  endeavour  to  do  so.  Have 
you  any  friends  in  K'ootar  ?  " 

"  Yes,  old  Kayhar  is  my  friend."  The 
name  of  Lamlam  was  on  my  lips. 

"  Well,  his  influence  may  be  of  use  to  you 
some  day,  so  do  not  despair,  even  if  the 
governor  should  turn  out  to  be  unfavourable 
to  you." 

After  my  "  long  Tom  "  was  finished,  I  ex- 
plained to  my  young  friend  how  it  was  intended 
to  act.  He  understood  at  once,  and  took  as 
much  interest  as  myself  in  proving  the  success 
of  my  scheme.  The  day  following  the  "  long 
Tom  "  was  carried  by  half-a-dozen  Orangwoks 
to  the  river  under  the  hill,  where  much  sur- 
face-gold was  being  obtained.  At  eight 
o'clock  I  informed  the  governor  that  all  was 
ready,  and  begged  him  to  be  present.  Lanna 
and  several  other  of  the  officials  also  came  to 
watch  the  proceedings.  I  had  placed  the 
**  long  Tom  "  on  the  bank,  under  a  slight  fall 


124         Adventures  in  New  Guinea. 

of  water,  wliicli  I  had  diverted  by  means  of  a 
bark  trough  into  the  "  Tom  "  itself.  I  was 
thus  able  to  keep  a  steady  current  running 
continually  through  the  "  Tom."  Several 
skins  full  of  the  most  likely-looking  earth, 
from  a  spot  which  I  had  seen  rich  in  nuggets, 
were  procured  and  were  thrown  into  the 
upper  compartment,  which  was  about  six  feet 
long,  and  divided  from  the  lower  by  a  ridge 
of  six  or  eif^ht  inches  hio^h.  I  continued  to 
puddle  this  earth  until  all  the  clay  had  been 
washed  away,  and  nothing  but  sand  and 
stones  remained.  Another  supply  of  earth 
was  brought  and  treated  in  the  same  way, 
and  still  another,  until  I  thought  that  I  had 
had  sufficient  to  give  me  a  very  good  chance. 
I  now  turned  the  water  off  and  began  to  pick 
out  the  stones.  They  were  all  washed  per- 
fectly clean,  and  as  I  tossed  them  out,  the 
governor  and  my  young  friend  standing  close 
by  my  side,  watching  intently  every  operation, 
I  scanned  them  carelessly,  not  expecting  to 
find  a  nugget  in  the  upper  compartment. 
How  great  was  my  surprise  and  pleasure, 
therefore,  to  see  a  large  lump  of  gold  lying 
among  the  stones,  perfectly  bright.  I  seized 
it  eagerly,  and  handed  it  to  the  old  chief,  who 
clutched  the  valuable  mass  most  greedily.  It 
weighed  a  pound  and  a  half,  I  should  say. 


Adventures  in  New  Guinea.         125 

After  this  every  stone  was  examined  with 
care  before  it  was  thrown  away;  but  no 
farther  discovery  was  made.  This  one  find, 
however,  excited  my  highest  hopes,  and  I 
now  proceeded  to  wash  out  the  fine  sand 
which  had  collected  in  the  other  compart- 
ments. As  the  water  carried  off  every  suc- 
cessive coating  of  sand,  and  the  layer  of  each 
compartment  became  smaller,  I  could  see 
occasional  gleams  of  gold,  which  warned  me 
to  proceed  with  greater  caution ;  so  I  now 
turned  off  the  water  a  second  time,  and 
drawing  the  attention  of  the  governor  and 
his  officials  to  my  movements,  drew  out  the 
first  plug,  and  scraped  all  the  glittering  sand, 
which  was  mixed  with  good  coarse  gold,  into 
a  stone  dish.  The  old  chief  bent  over  the 
"  long  Tom  "  eagerly,  as  he  saw  that  the  sand 
was  only  a  thin  coating  lying  on  a  basis  of 
gold.  After  repeating  this  process  in  the 
other  compartments,  and  scraping  from  each 
one  a  large  quantity  of  fine  gold,  I  took  the 
dish  to  the  river-side,  and  washed  off  the  sand 
very  carefully,  still  watched  by  the  eager 
eyes  of  all  the  officials.  At  last,  to  my  own 
surprise  and  delight,  I  found  that  I  had 
about  two  pounds  of  fine  gold  remaining  in 
the  dish,  which  I  handed  to  the  governor  for 
inspection.     He  was   amazed  at  the  result, 


126  Adventures  in  New  Guinea. 

and  could  not  trust  the  evidence  of  his  senses. 
He  required  me  to  wash  out  some  more  soil, 
which  I  did,  he  superintending  the  collection 
of  every  skinful  of  earth,  to  see  that  no  gold 
was  intentionally  mixed  with  it.  Again  the 
same  process,  and  again  a  similar  result,  only 
this  time  there  was  no  nugget  among  the 
stones,  and  a  smaller  quantity  of  gold  in  the 
"  Tom."  I  explained  to  him  that  the  quantity 
of  gold  would  differ  at  times,  as  the  yield  de- 
pended entirely  upon  the  quality  of  the  soil 
for  gold-producing  purposes ;  but  that  what- 
ever of  fine  gold  the  earth  contained  was 
collected  in  the  manner  that  I  had  shown 
him.  He  was  satisfied  with  the  result,  and 
was  now  exceedingly  civil  to  me,  asking  me 
to  dine  with  him,  which  I  was  glad  to  do,  as 
it  was  now  noon  and  I  was  very  hungry. 

The  old  chief  kept  a  good  table,  as  we 
Europeans  would  say,  and  had  fowl,  fish, 
yams,  and  rice  laid  before  me  (for  he  did  not 
dine  himself).  He  gave  me  also  plenty  of 
eu  to  drink.  His  present  kindness  relieved 
my  mind  of  some  of  the  anxieties  which  the 
young  officer's  words  had  aroused  within  me, 
and  towards  evening  my  friend  reassured  rae 
completely  by  saying, — 

"  You  are  quite  safe  now.  I  shall  report 
all  that  you  have  done  to  the  king  and  to 


Adventures  in  New  Guinea .  1 2  7 

your  friends.     Your  services  are  too  valuable 
to  be  lost." 

In  a  few  weeks  Lanna  was  required  to 
start  for  K'ootar  in  charge  of  a  quantity  of 
gold  which  was  ready  for  transmission,  so  he 
came  to  me  to  become  the  bearer  of  any 
message  I  wished  to  send,  and  to  bid  me 
good-bye.  It  occurred  to  me  to  write  a  few 
words  to  Lamlam,  hoping  that  she  might  be 
able  to  read  them,  or  at  least  tliat  she  might 
learn  to  spell  them  out.  After  writing  a  few 
lines,  I  asked  him  to  deliver  the  bamboo  in 
which  I  had  deposited  the  paper  to  Lamlam, 
and  bade  him  good-bye.  "With  a  word  of 
warning  in  my  ear  he  was  gone. 


I2S  Adventures  in  New  Guinea, 


CHAPTER  XY. 

As  ifc  is  not  my  intention  to  give  a  full 
account  of  my  digging  experience,  I  shall 
here  say  that  I  remained  nearly  five  mono- 
tonous years  at  "Watani,  and  might  have  been 
there  to  this  day  had  it  not  been  for  the 
energy  and  affection  of  my  friends.  The 
digging  life  was  not  by  any  means  a  desirable 
one.  The  miners  spent  all  they  earned  in 
gambling  (strange  how  this  vice  exists  as 
much  among  savages  as  in  the  midst  of  the 
highest  civilization  !),  and  lived  generally  a 
miserable  life,  brawling  and  fighting.  The 
governor,  as  this  tended  to  the  increase  of 
his  power,  did  not  discourage  this  state  of 
things,  so  that  very  few  of  those  who  came 
to  the  mines  ever  returned  again  to  K'ootar. 
They  could  do  so,  on  their  obtaining  a 
certain  amount  of  gold,  proportioned  to  the 
crime  which  they  had  committed,  but  not 
otherwise.  As  the  men  got  accustomed  to 
the  reckless  life  of  Watard,  they  lost  all 
desire  to  return,  and  the  great  majority  spent 


Adventures  in  New  Guinea.  129 

tlie  remainder  of  their  days  in  this  territory. 
Some    of   tbem   committed   further    crimes, 
viz.  hid  or  stole  the  king's    gold.     In   this 
case,  if  thoy  were   convicted,   most  terrible 
was   the   fate   which   awaited    them.     They 
were    exposed    in    trees,    sometimes    being 
allowed  to  starve  to  death  ;  at  others,  being 
regularly  fed,  and  kept  alive  to  be  the  prey 
of  snakes  and  birds.     If  any  one  attempted 
to  recover  his  liberty  by  escaping,  he  simply 
lost   his   life ;   either  he  was    starved   upon 
the  mountain  range,  or  he  was  destroyed  in 
the   terrible   valley   of   the  serpents.       The 
monotony  of  the  hfe  at  AYatara  was  broken 
occasionally  by  an  overflow  of  the  Irfak,  the 
river  that  I  have  mentioned,  or  by  an  out- 
break of  the  nearest  volcanic  mountain.     I 
had  an  experience  of  each  of  these  while  I 
was  at  Watard.     But  to  resume,  I  was  at 
first   constantly  employed   in   directing  the 
making  of  "long  Toms"  and  cradles,  as  it 
had  been  resolved  to  bring  them  into  general 
use.     Further,   I  taught  the  miners  to  s'nih 
holes,  in  order  to  obtain  the  precious  metal, 
and  I  was  fortunate  enough  to  be  successful 
in  my  first   shaft.     This  success    improved 
my  position  immensely,  and  brought  me  into 
still  greater  favour  with  the   old  chieftain. 
The  country   was    exceedingly   rich   in   the 

K 


1 30         Adventures  in  N'eiv  Gtiinea. 

precious  ore.  It  was  found  in  every  direction, 
and  in  large  quantities.  I  have  picked 
after  a  heavy  fall  of  rain,  a  piece  of  ^icL 
from  the  surface  weighing,  I  am  certain,  fifty 
pounds.  One  day  I  was  sitting  upon  a  piece 
of  quartz  cropping  above  the  surface;  this 
stone  had  been  used  for  a  resting-place  for 
months  ;  on  this  occasion  I  began  to  beat  it 
with  my  flint  hammer,  and  a  large  piece  of 
the  reef  flew  off,  exposing  a  mass  of  gold 
embedded  in  the  quartz.  Here  was  a  new 
field  for  my  operations,  so,  breaking  off  a 
large  lump  of  the  rock,  which  was  spotted 
with  gold,  I  took  it  to  the  governor,  and 
showed  it  to  him,  explaining  the  difficulty  of 
obtaining  the  gold  from  the  stone,  but  asking 
his  permission  to  try  (which  was  readily 
granted).  I  got  several  pieces  of  quartz, 
veined  thickly  with  gold,  and  tried  to  break 
them  to  small  grains.  After  destroying 
several  flint  hammers  in  my  attempts,  I 
found  I  had  made  very  little  progress ;  so, 
resolving  to  try  the  effects  of  fire,  I  put  the 
quartz  into  a  kiln,  heated  to  a  great  degree 
of  heat,  and  kept  this  fire  up  for  several 
days,  as  I  had  known  men  engaged  in  burn- 
ing limestone  do.  "When  I  found  the  quartz 
was  pulverized,  and  the  gold  melted,  I  let 
the  fire  go  out,  and  I  obtained  several  pounds 


Adventures  in  New  Guinea.  131 

of  gold  from  the  cold  aslics.  All  this,  of 
^e,  took  time,  yet  the  life  I  lived  was 
riiL/.  Dnoiis  enough,  except  when  it  was 
varied  by  a  fishing  or  a  hunting  expedition, 
which  was  rather  frequent,  as  there  were 
abundance  of  fish  in  the  Irfak,  and  we  were 
dependent  upon  the  river  and  the  forest  for 
a  large  portion  of  our  food  supply.  Rice 
was  grown,  and  yams,  and  other  vegetables 
were  plentiful,  besides  such  fruits  as  are 
common  to  tropical  climates  —  cocoa-nuts, 
dates,  and  raisins.  The  first  year  of  my  stay 
at  Watdrd  I  had  been  appointed,  by  the 
governor,  overseer  of  all  the  mines,  and  a 
part  of  my  duty,  in  this  capacity,  was  to 
receive  and  account  for  all  gold  that  was 
procured.  I  was  in  the  habit  of  keeping 
memoranda  for  my  own  pleasure  of  the  gold 
that  was  collected  from  the  mines.  I  men- 
tion this  as  it  was  of  use  to  me  afterwards. 
About  the  middle  of  the  second  year  I  was 
displaced  from  my  position,  which  was  taken 
by  one  of  the  governor's  own  creatures,  and 
I  myself  was  put  to  employment  of  a  less 
responsible  character.  I  understood  this 
change  to  mean  that  I  was  no  longer  in  the 
governor's  favour,  although  how  I  had 
offended  him  I  do  not  know.  At  the  end  of 
two  years,  a  little  incident  occurred  which 
K  2 


I  ".2 


Adventiwes  in  New  Guinea. 


gave  me  much  pleasure.  The  officer  in 
command  of  one  of  the  troops,  arriving  from 
K'ootar,  brought  me  a  neat  head-dress,  which 
had  been  committed  to  his  care  by  old 
Kayhar,  the  chief.  It  was  to  be  given  into 
my  own  hands,  he  said.  I  felt  that  I  owed 
this  little  attention  to  Lamlam,  and  was 
greatly  pleased  by  it.  Another  two  years 
passed  away,  making  four  years  of  banish- 
ment from  K'ootar.  I  knew  now  that  I  was 
nnder  the  displeasure  of  the  governor,  yet 
did  not  know  the  reason.  During  these  two 
latter  years,  several  events  occurred  to  break 
in  upon  the  dull  routine  of  our  life ;  one 
was  an  eruption  of  the  volcano  on  one  of 
the  spurs  of  Tannavorkoo.  For  some  days 
before  the  eruption,  the  atmosphere  was  dull 
and  heavy,  and  towards  evening  the  sky 
became  lurid  and  dark,  blotting  out  the  stars. 
Soon  after  we  saw  the  bright  flames  shoot  up 
to  the  height  of  several  hundred  feet  from 
the  crater.  This  was  repeated  many  times, 
for  several  days  after  which  the  crater  began 
to  discharge  its  molten  flood,  which  ran  for 
miles  over  the  country,  doing  a  vast  amount 
of  injury,  and  causing  the  loss  of  many  lives. 
A  great  panic  fell  upon  the  population  of 
AVatdrii,  as  the  lava  threatened  to  reach  the 
town  itself.       Shortly  after   this  event,  the 


Advcnhircs  in  N'ezv  Gninea.  133 

overflow  of  the  Irfak  occurred,  wliicli 
threatened  to  destroy  the  town.  As  I  have 
mentioned  before,  the  Irfak  is  formed  by  a 
confluence  of  many  tributary  streams,  and 
attains  a  considerable  width  almost  as  soon 
as  it  issues  from  the  mountain.  It  is  thus 
exposed  to  sudden  overflows,  some  of  thera 
of  a  dangerous  nature,  for  whenever  ihe 
snow  begins  to  melt,  the  torrents  run  down 
the  sides  of  the  great  water-shed,  and, 
rushing  into  the  channel  of  the  Irfak,  over- 
flow its  banks  for  fully  a  mile  and  a  half. 
The  river  is  thus  only  crossable  with  safety 
at  certain  times.  These  risings  can  rarely 
be  anticipated.  The  one  to  which  I  now 
refer  came  on  after  a  week's  heavy  rain, 
followed  by  a  sudden  burst  of  heat.  Some 
of  the  experienced  miners  watched  the  signs 
w^itli  anxiety,  and  warned  their  companions 
of  the  dano;er  of  an  overflow.  As  we  were 
fully  twelve  miles  from  the  river,  we  paid  too 
little  attention  to  these  warnings,  and  went 
to  our  beds  as  usual.  In  the  middle  of  the 
night  I  was  awakened  by  a  dull,  heavy  roar, 
like  the  rolling  of  weaves  upon  a  distant 
shore.  As  the  noise  continued,  I  sat  up  to 
listen,  and  could  hear  distinctly  a  loud, 
roaring  noise  approaching.  Immediately  I 
thought    of  the  warnings  which   had    been 


134  Adventtires  in  New  Guinea, 

uttered  about  tlie  overflow  of  tlie  river,  and, 
springing  from  my  bed,  ran  outside.  It  was 
a  clear,  moonlight  night,  most  fortunately. 
Others  had  been  aroused,  and  a  large  crowd 
was  in  the  street;  some  ran  backwards  and 
forwards,  crying  out  that  the  spirit  of  Tan- 
navorkoo  was  coming;  others  stood,  like 
myself,  watching  the  southern  approaches  to 
the  city.  There  was  no  time  to  escape,  for 
I  had  heard  that  a  flood  travels  swifter  than  a 
horse  could  gallop.  The  governor's  troop, 
however,  were  ordered  out,  and  directed  to 
escape  to  the  high  hills,  ten  miles  beyond 
Watiird.  All  this  had  occurred  in  less  than 
fifteen  minutes,  so  at  least  I  should  think, 
for  I  could  not  take  any  note  of  time  under 
such  circumstances.  "We  saw  now  the  long, 
dark  wall  of  advancing  water,  coming  on 
with  a  dull,  but  deafening  roar.  Every 
person  escaped  to  the  upper  stories  of  the 
houses.  The  highest  houses  were  filled  with 
the  poor  creatures  seeking  refuge.  AVhen  the 
column  of  water,  which  was  about  six  feet 
high,  struck  the  first  row  of  houses,  there 
was  a  great  crash,  and  the  enemy  was  upon 
us,  sweeping  through  the  streets,  and  carry- 
ing away  everything  in  its  fierce  flow.  Few 
lives  comparatively  were  lost ;  not  more 
than    a    hundred    and    fifty    persons    were 


Adve7itnres  in  Neiv  Guinea.  135 

drowned,  and  these  would  not  have  been 
sacrificed  if  they  had  not  insisted  upon  trying 
to  save  their  property  from  the  rushing  flood. 
There  had  been  several  previous  overflows, 
but  this  was  the  w^orst  that  had  been  ever 
experienced.  It  occasioned  a  great  loss  of 
property,  and  all  mining  was  suspended  for 
a  long  time.  This  overflow  took  place  in  the 
third  year  of  my  captivity,  and,  following 
close  upon  the  eruption  of  the  volcano, 
quickened  my  desire  to  escape. 

I  have  mentioned  the  fact  that  we  some- 
times went  upon  hunting  expeditions.  With 
the  account  of  one  such  expedition,  which 
was  the  most  strange  that  I  have  ever  heard 
of,  I  will  conclude  this  portion  of  my  adven- 
tures in  Wiitdrd. 

The  governor  punished  his  criminals,  as 
has  been  noted,  by  chaining  them  in  high 
trees,  near  the  valley  of  the  boa-constrictors, 
leaving  them  generally  to  die  of  starvation 
and  fear,  or  from  the  attacks  of  snakes  and 
eagles.  These  terrible  punishments  were  of 
frequent  occurrence,  for  the  Orangwoks  have 
no  sense  of  the  value  of  life,  nor  have  they  any 
sympathy  with  human  suffering.  One  ele- 
ment in  the  sufferings  of  these  poor  captives, 
was  the  fear  that  the  dreaded  serpent  of  the 
valley  would  come  forth  and  attack  them, 


136  Adventures  in  N'ew  Guinea. 

winding  its  terrible  coils  around  tlie  body, 
and  crushing  the  trembling  wretch  to  death. 
None  had  been  ever  known  to  leave  this 
valley  until  the  occasion  now  referred  to. 
Word  was  brought  that  an  immense  boa  had 
escaped  from  the  pass,  and  had  travelled 
down  a  distance  of  ten  miles  toward  Watara, 
drawn,  as  was  supposed,  by  the  presence  of 
the  criminals  in  the  trees.  Whatever  was 
the  cause,  here  was  one  of  these  huge  reptiles 
on  tlie  high  road,  and  it  might  at  any  time 
come  on  to  Watara  itself.  So  it  was  resolved 
to  form  a  hunting  party,  and  attack  the 
beast.  Many  a  brave  heart  quailed  at  the 
idea,  but  a  large  party  was  formed,  of  which 
I  was  one,  well  armed  with  spears,  swords, 
and  bows  and  arrows.  This  forlorn  hope 
was  followed  by  a  numerous  army  of  be- 
holders, ready  to  assist,  in  the  event  of  the 
reptile  being  killed  by  us,  and  equally 
ready  to  run  away  in  the  event  of  his 
being  victorious.  We  started  from  Watara 
about  eight  o'clock,  hoping  to  arrive  at  the 
object  of  our  foray  about  ten  or  eleven 
o'clock,  and  to  catch  him  taking  his  midday 
nap.  After  crossing  the  Irfak,  we  turned 
into  the  highway,  and  proceeded  with  great 
caution,  for  the  monster  might  have  already 
made  a  nearer  approach  to  the  town.  In 
about  half  an  hour  we  halted,  and  resolved 


AdvenUircs  in  N'civ  Guinea.  137 

to  send  out  a  couple  of  scouts.  As  there 
was  some  hesitation  about  vohmteers,  I 
offered  to  become  one,  and  was  accepted. 

The  reader  may  be  sure  that  I  moved  on 
with  great  care,  scanning  narrowly  every 
tree,  and  examining  every  bush  lest  our 
enemy  might  lie  concealed  in  it.  In  an- 
other half-hour,  we  reached  a  high  tree, 
where  criminals  were  frequently  chained. 
Its  limbs,  which  spread  out  in  all  directions, 
were  of  a  straggling  nature.  After  slightly 
glancing  at  its  stem,  and  its  branches,  we 
prepared  to  ride  on  under  the  tree;  but  my 
little  pony  beginning  to  tremble  and  snort,  I 
w^arned  my  companion  that  there  was  some- 
thing near. 

"  It  is  the  skeletons,"  he  said  ;  ''  the  pony 
is  afraid  to  pass  the  bones  of  men." 

There  seemed  to  bo  reason  in  this,  so  I 
tried  to  force  her  gently  past  the  tree.  Again 
she  snorted,  and  ran  back,  trembling 
violently.  I  could  not  understand  this,  and 
looked  up  again  to  the  tree,  to  examine  it 
more  carefully.  As  I  did  so,  I  met  the  eyes 
of  the  terrible  serpent  fixed  upon  me,  not 
more  tlian  ten  feet  above  my  head.  It  was 
approaching  me  with  subtle  movements.  I 
thought  of  the  stories  I  had  heard  of  snakes 
fascinating  those  who  came  within  reach  of 
them,    and    began  to  feel  that  I  was    lost. 


o 


8         Adventures  in  New  Guinea, 


Mj  pony  too  could  not  move,  and  the  brute's 
head  was  swinging  itself  nearer  to  me.  His 
neck  and  head  were  hanging  from  a  high 
branch,  and  looked  for  all  the  world  like  a 
loose  limb  hanging  from  the  upper  part  of 
the  tree,  his  folds  being  hidden  in  the  midst 
of  the  green  leaves. 

As  the  serpent  oscillated  to  and  fro,  it 
found  that  it  had  not  sufficient  lenorth  of 
neck  to  reach  either  myself  or  the  pony,  and 
began  therefore  to  shake  out  a  reef,  as  we 
sailors  would  say.  This  action  disturbed 
the  leaves,  and  shook  them  down  in  dozens 
to  the  ground.  My  companion,  now  seeing 
my  condition,  came  to  my  help,  catching 
hold  of  the  pony's  head,  and  leading  her 
beyond  the  snake's  influence.  I  had  felt 
paralyzed,  and  should,  I  fear,  have  perished, 
had  it  not  been  for  the  assistance  of  my 
companion.  We  now  rode  back  to  the  troop, 
and  informed  them  of  our  discovery.  All  at 
once  pressed  on  to  attack  the  monster.  On 
our  return  he  was  coiled  around  the  upper 
limbs  of  the  tree,  beyond  our  reach — an 
immense  brute.  The  Orangwoks  kept  at  a 
respectful  distance  from  the  enemy,  who  took 
no  further  notice  than  that  of  fixing  his 
keen,  bright-looking  eyes  upon  us.  I  confess, 
after  my  late  experience,  I  did  not  care  to 


Adventtires  in  New  Gtunea.  139 

get  into  too  close  quarters.  The  thing  was 
beyond  our  reach  ;  what  was  to  be  done  ? 
We  could  not  watch  here  until  it  came  down. 
Could  we  not  get  it  down  by  stratagem? 
This  was  suggested,  on  which  it  was  resolved 
to  tie  an  old  pony  under  the  tree,  in  sight  of 
the  boa.  I  commiserated  the  fate  of  the  un- 
fortunate pony.  Not  so  the  Orangwoks, 
they  had  no  sympathy  with  pain  or  suffering 
in  any  form.  One  of  the  followers  who  was 
at  a  distance  was  compelled  to  dismount,  and 
give  up  his  little  horse  to  the  officer  in  com- 
mand of  the  troop.  She  was  then  led  under 
the  tree  and  tied  to  its  stem  by  one  of  the 
volunteers. 

This  being  done,  we  waited  with  our  spears 
couched.  Several  of  our  number  had  been 
using  their  arrows,  but  without  success,  as 
the  folds  of  the  reptile  were  well  concealed 
in  the  leaves,  and  those  who  shot  at  him 
were  not  good  marksmen.  Presently  we  saw 
the  beast  uncoiling  itself,  and  swinging  his 
head  and  neck  towards  the  place  occupied  by 
the  pony,  who  now  began  to  snort  and 
tremble  greatly.  After  an  unsuccessful  at- 
tempt to  reach  his  victim,  the  boa  still  further 
uncoiled  itself,  and  began  to  descend.  It  was 
now  level  with  the  pony's  back,  the  poor  crea- 
ture being  paralyzed  in  every  limb  with  fear. 


140  Adventures  in  Neiv  Guinea, 

We  waited  until  it  had  taken  several  coils 
around  the  pony,  and  then  rushed  on.  I  had 
dismounted,  distrusting,  from  my  j)reviou3 
experience,  the  little  horse  I  rode.  As  we 
all  charged  in  upon  the  beast,  several  of 
those  who  were  mounted  were  carried  on  one 
side  beyond  the  boa,  several  stopped  short, 
and  I  found  myself  alone  close  upon  it.  I 
could  see  its  balefid  eyes,  and  hear  its 
breathing,  and  felt  a  most  unpleasant  sensa- 
tion. Nevertheless  I  lifted  my  spear  and 
drove  it  through  its  thick  body.  Before  I 
had  time  to  make  a  second  attack,  the  serpent 
had  uncoiled  its  head,  and  began  to  attack 
me,  the  pony  falling  down  upon  the  ground 
from  fright.  My  sensations  are  not  to  be 
described.  I  ran  back,  and  found  myself 
rapidly  followed  by  the  fearful  serpent,  and, 
to  make  matters  worse,  the  troop  made  off 
at  full  speed,  screaming  aloud.  I  gave 
myself  over  for  lost;  but  as  I  had  a  good 
start  of  the  reptile,  I  did  not  lose  heart. 
There  was  a  small  stream  (one  of  the  tri- 
butaries of  the  Irfak)  directly  in  my  path, 
about  twelve  feet  wide  and  four  or  five  feet 
deep.  As  the  boa  was  now  gaining  on  me 
(indeed  I  might  as  well  try  to  outrun  a  zebra), 
I  determined  to  take  to  the  water.  I  reached 
the  bank  as  the  quick  strokes  of  the  terrible 
creature    seemed    at    my  back.     I    fancied 


Adventures  in  New  Guinea.  141 

I  could  feel  hia  hofc  breath  upon  my 
neck.  I  sprang  at  once  into  the  water,  and 
dived,  swimming  under  the  surface  some 
distance.  I  knew  that  serpents  often  swam 
in  the  water,  and  did  not  therefore  expect  to 
escape  by  merely  getting  into  the  stream. 
The  fact  is,  it  was  my  only  chance  of  escape 
to  dive  as  I  did  out  of  sight. 

After  I  had  been  down  fully  a  minute,  I 
raised  my  head,  and  was  conscious  of  a  loud 
lashing  of  the  water.  I  saw  also  the  head 
of  an  alligator  or  crocodile.  "  Out  of  the 
frying-pan  into  the  fire,"  I  thought,  strangely 
enough,  at  such  a  moment,  and  made  again 
for  the  bank,  the  loud  splashing  continuing. 
On  my  reaching  the  bank,  half  expecting  to 
find  the  boa  waiting  for  me,  I  was  surprised 
to  see  nothing  of  it.  On  my  looking  towards 
the  water,  which  was  beaten  into  foam,  I 
beheld  a  sight  which  transfixed  me  with 
astonishment.  The  boa  was  engaged  in 
deadly  conflict  with  a  vast  crocodile.  Its 
tail  was  wound  round  the  stem  of  a  strong 
tree  on  the  bank,  and  several  of  its  folds 
were  coiled  around  the  saurian  reptile.  I 
half  thought  of  cutting  the  serpent's  tail, 
yet,  after  my  late  experience,  decided  that 
it  was  wiser  to  leave  it  alone.  I  have  since 
found  that  it  would  have  been  a  good  thing 
to  have  cut  the  tail  off,  as  it  would  have 


142  Adventures  m  New  Guinea. 

weakened  tlie  serpeut  considerably.  I 
hastened  back  to  tlie  main  road,  and  when  I 
appeared  my  companions  were  astonished 
to  see  me  come  back  safe  and  whole. 
They  crowded  round  m.e  while  I  told  them 
how  I  had  escaped,  and  of  the  fight  between 
the  crocodile  and  the  boa.  Again  we  deter- 
mined to  advance  to  attack  the  reptile,  but 
resolved  to  wait  until  he  had  swallowed  his 
yictim,  after  which,  it  was  said,  he  would 
sleep.  Some  of  our  company  were  told  off 
to  watch,  and  the  rest  of  us  sheltered  our- 
selves from  the  burning  heat  of  the  tropical 
sun.  After  he  had  eaten  the  crocodile,  he 
coiled  himself  up  to  sleep,  and  while  in  this 
condition  we  attacked  him,  and  I  am  thank- 
ful to  say,  without  loss  of  life,  killed  the 
great  brute,  and  cut  off  its  wrinkled  head. 
The  snake  measured  seventeen  yards  in 
length.  I  do  not  wish  to  take  part  in 
another  such  hunt  while  my  life  lasts.  The 
remembrance  of  this  one  is  even  now  full 
of  painful  and  unpleasant  sensations.  We 
returned  to  Watdrd  with  flying  colours,  and 
celebrated  our  victory  with  the  beating  of 
drums.  I  was  the  hero  of  the  day,  and  was 
held  in  greater  honour  by  all  the  Orangwoks, 
in  consequence  of  the  part  I  had  taken.  So 
ended  my  boa  hunt. 


Adventures  in  Nezu  Guinea.  143 


CHAPTER  XVI. 

In  my  recontre  wltli  the  boa-consfcrlctor, 
described  in  tlie  last  chapter,  I  had  been 
handled  rather  roughly,  and  had  my  clothes 
torn  ;  my  hat  or  cap,  for  it  was  like  the  head- 
dress usually  worn  by  the  Orangwoks,  had 
been  injured  and  ripped  slightly.  On  my 
getting  back  to  my  home,  I  overhauled  it  for 
the  purpose  of  repairing.  I  was  unwilling  that 
a  memento  of  my  friends  should  be  destroyed. 
The  cap  was  the  one  sent  to  me  by  Kayhar. 
As  I  was  examining  it  I  was  surprised  to  see 
through  the  rip  a  piece  of  paper.  Immediately 
I  thrust  in  my  fingers,  and  pulled  out  a  long 
sheet  of  foolscap  with  writing  on  it.  I  now 
recalled  the  fact  to  mind,  that  I  had  noticed 
when  I  first  received  the  head-dress  that 
it  contained  some  substance  within  which 
crackled  as  I  handled  it ;  but  I  had  concluded 
that  something  had  been  put  into  the  hat  to 
stiffen  it.  I  spread  out  the  paper  with  eager, 
trembling  hands,  for  I  knew  it  was  a  com- 
munication   from   Lamlam,  and  with  some 


144  Adventures  in  New  Gninca. 

difficulty  made  out  tlie  following  words,  wlilcli 
sent  a  thrill  of  delight  through  me  and  raised 
ray  highest  hopes.  Of  course  the  communica- 
tion was  not  in  English,  but  the  following  is 
a  fair  rendering  of  the  words  : — 

"  Lamlam  salutes  her  friend  Tregan.  Your 
words  came  to  me,  0  my  friend  !  niEiny  moons 
ago,  but  Lamlam  could  not  hear  them, 
because  she  was  without  knowledge.  But  the 
friendship  "  (a  better  word  would,  I  think, 
be  love)  "which  she  has  for  Tregan  made  her 
hearken  diligently  "  (try  to  learn),  "  and  now 
the  words  of  Tregan  have  spoken  to  her,  and 
have  made  her  heart  glad.  0  my  friend  ! 
Lamlam  would  like  to  look  upon  your  face.' 
She  never  forgets  the  morning  that  Tregan 
went  to  the  hills.  My  father,  Kayliar,  has 
been  raised  to  the  dio'uitv  of  the  wise  men, 
and  sits  in  the  dark  room.  He  is  Trdsfan's 
friend,  and  now  the  king  has  consented  that 
you,  0  my  friend !  shall  return  to  K'ootar. 
An  order  from  the  king  to  the  governor  is 
taken  by  the  troops.  In  another  moon 
Lamlam  will  look  upon  the  face  of  Tregan 
and  will  be  glad.     Farewell !  " 

Alternate  feelings  occupied  my  mind  on 
reading  this  document.  It  had  been  written 
two  years  ago,  and  yet  I  was  at  Watara, 
having  never  heard  one  word  of  any  order 


Adventures  in  Neiu  Guinea.  145 

that  I  was  to  return  to  K 'ootar.  I  was  con- 
strained to  feel  that  I  was  in  the  pow^r  of  the 
old  tyrant,  who  was  keeping  me  here  for  some 
reasons  of  his  own. 

Poor  little  Lamlam !  Two  years  had  she 
been  waiting  to  look  npon  my  face,  and  had 
waited  in  yam.  I  was  now  no  nearer  to 
K'ootar  than  when  she  wrote.  On  a  careful 
consideration  of  all  the  circumstances  of  my 
position,  I  came  to  the  conclusion  that  the 
old  chief  had  some  strong  motive  for  wishing 
to  keep  me  at  Watara,  and  that  I  could  only 
escape  by  proceeding  with  great  care  and 
caution.  He  had  at  his  command  two 
thousand  soldiers,  and  could,  if  he  occupied 
the  Monakim  passes,  make  himself  entirely 
free  of  K'ootar.  Whether  such  was  his  in- 
tention I  could  not  say,  yet  the  thought 
occurred  to  mo  as  I  deliberated  on  these 
circumstances. 

If  the  king  had  sent  an  order  for  my  release, 
and  I  could  not  doubt  that  he  had,  it  seemed 
very  much  like  an  act  of  rebellion  that  I  was 
still  kept  by  the  old  chief  in  captivity ;  and  I 
knew  that  if  he  felt  it  to  be  necessary  to  his 
own  safety  that  I  should  be  made  away  with, 
he  would  not  hesitate  a  moment  about  sacri- 
ficing my  life.  This  resolved  me  to  act  with 
the   utmost  caution.     My  first  step  was    to 

L 


146  AdvetitiLres  in  New  Guinea^ 

write  a  letter  to  Lamlam  explaining  my 
position,  but  how  was  I  to  send  this  com- 
munication? I  had  for  tbe  last  two  years 
been  kept  out  of  the  way  of  the  escort  on  one 
pretence  or  another,  and,  moreover,  could  not 
ask  one  of  the  officers  in  command  to  take 
my  communication  for  me  without  the  old 
chief's  consent,  which  I  felt  would  not  be 
given.  I  resorted  to  the  following  strata- 
gem : — First,  I  obtained  the  governor's  con- 
sent to  my  sending  a  small  present  to  Kayhar 
in  token  of  my  appreciation  of  his  past  kind- 
ness to  me.  I  then,  with  great  difficulty, 
divided  a  gold  nugget  into  two  pieces,  and, 
filing  out  the  inside,  made  room  for  a  short 
letter,  which  I  then  squeezed  in,  afterwards 
fastening  the  two  sides  of  the  nugget  with  a 
kind  of  cement.  This  done,  the  gold  looked 
as  natural  as  if  it  had  just  been  washed  out 
of  the  "  long  Tom."  It  was,  however,  only 
a  matter  of  time  for  the  cement  to  dissolve 
and  the  pieces  to  separate,  on  which  my  letter 
would  appear.  I  now  rubbed  and  polished 
the  gold  as  for  an  ornament,  and,  putting  it 
into  a  piece  of  bamboo,  took  it  to  the  governor. 
After  examining  it  closely,  he  allowed  me,  in 
his  presence,  to  give  this  to  the  officer  in 
command  of  '(h^  troop.  When  the  escort  had 
passed  out  of  the  town  on  their  return  to 


Adventm'es  in  New  Guinea.  i.|7 

K'ootar,  I  began  to  breathe  more  freely,  and 
to  hope  that  my  ruse  would  bring  me  freedom. 
I  determined,  however,  that  I  would  not 
depend  upon  one  shot,  that  I  would  try  again 
and  again. 

Thus  several  months  passed,  and  I  heard 
nothing-more  from  K'ootar  ;  foralthough  Iliad 
determined  to  be  on  the  look-out,  yet  I  was 
generally  out  of  the  way  when  the  escort 
arrived  and  departed.  After  about  four  months 
had  elapsed  I  was  sent  away  as  usual  to  a 
distant  part  of  Watara  ;  but  feehng  sure  that 
some  communication  would  arrive,  I  resolved 
to  return  and  visib  the  escort's  quarters.  This 
I  did  in  the  night-time.  The  first  person  I 
spoke  to  was  Lanna,  my  old  friend,  who  was 
overjoyed  to  see  me.  After  some  mutual 
inquiries  of  a  personal  nature,  I  explained  to 
him  my  position,  and  gave  expression  to  my 
fear  that  I  had  not  been  treated  fairly  by  the 
governor.  Lanna  seemed  to  feel  the  gravity 
of  the  communication  I  had  made  to  him, 
and  confirmed  my  fears  by  saying  that  he  had 
also  understood  that  an  order  for  my  release 
had  been  sent  to  the  governor  two  years  ago  ; 
but  he  had  been  further  told  that  I  had 
preferred  to  stay  at  the  gold  territory,  and 
as  this  was  a  common  experience,  nobody  was 
surprised  at  it,  although  he  said  some  of  my 
L  2 


148  Adventtwes  in  Neiv  Guinea. 

friends,  especially  those  who  had  interested 
themselves  in  my  favour,  -were  very  much 
grieved  at  my  decision. 

I  now  explained  to  him  that  I  was  acting 
in  disobedience  to  my  instructions  in  return- 
ing to  the  town,  and  prayed  him  not  to 
mention  the  fact  of  my  visit  to  his  quarters. 
This  he  readily  promised  to  do,  and  also  said 
he  would  render  me  any  assistance  which  lay 
in  his  power. 

"  What  can  be  the  governor's  reasons  ?  '* 
he  asked.     "  Have  you  offended  him  ?  " 

"Not  in  any  way  that  I  am  aware  of." 

''  The  gold-yield  has  fallen  off  very  much 
latterly,  that  may  be  the  reason,"   he  added. 

"  Fallen  off — impossible  !  "  I  exclaimed  ; 
"it  was  never  so  large." 

"  Tregan,  be  careful  what  charges  you 
make,"  he  replied,  standing  up.  "  I  am  your 
friend  and  will  not,  therefore,  take  any  notice 
of  your  rash  words.  Yet,  do  not  repeat  them, 
for  it  would  subject  you  to  a  terrible  death, 
to  make  such  a  charge  as  your  words  imply 
ag^ainst  a  chief." 

"  Lanna,  my  friend,  I  do  not  care.  I  repeat, 
the  mines  never  yielded  so  much  as  they  have 
done  these  last  two  years.  Even  the  year  of 
the  flood  the  yield  was  greater  than  on  the 
previous  years.     I  kept  an  account  of  all  gold 


Adventures  in  Netv  Gtmiea.  149 

received  for  some  time,  and  know  pretty 
correctly  what  was  raised  out  of  the  eartli." 

Lanna  became  very  serious  and  thoughtf  id 
at  this,  and  at  last,  after  deliberating  for  a 
time  said  : — • 

'*  You  say  you  kept  an  account  of  the  gold 
returns  for  a  year.  Have  you  that  account  ? 
Let  me  see  it." 

"It  is  at  my  house,  but  I  remember  the 
amount ;  "  and  I  told  him. 

He  was  struck  with  amazement,  and  said 
in  a  subdued  voice,  not  more  than  two-thirds 
of  that  amount  ever  reached  the  king's 
treasury. 

*'  Tregan,  there  is  something  wrong,  and 
I  see  now  the  reason  of  your  being  kept  here. 
I  will  deliver  you.  But  do  you  leave  me  and 
return  to  your  post.  Come  to  me  again  in 
seven  days,  and  I  will  advise  you  what  I  have 
resolved  upon.  We  must  proceed  with  cau- 
tion, for  the  governor  is  powerful ;  yet  the 
king  shall  not  be  robbed  of  his  own." 

I  returned  to  my  post  twenty  miles  beyond 
"Watara,  and  waited  anxiously  for  the  week  to 
pass.  At  the  end  of  that  time  I  again  met 
Lanna  at  the  place  appointed,  which  was  out- 
side of  the  town,  lest  our  movements  should 
be  watched.  He  had  decided  to  take  me  back 
to  K'ootar  on  his  own  authority,   "  but,"  he 


150         Adventures  in  New  Guinea. 

said,  "  you  must  yourself  join  us  beyond  tlie 
Irfak,  near  tlie  valley  of  tlie  serpents.  I 
leave  Watdni  in  two  days." 

After  lie  had  undertaken  to  obtain  my 
papers  for  me  and  my  Bible — the  only  book 
I  had,  for  I  had  left  the  "  Pilo:rini's  Proo-ress  " 
with  Lamlam — we  separated. 

I  was  now  greatly  excited,  and  in  high 
hopes  that  I  should  return  to  K'ootar.  I  in- 
dulged in  agreeable  visions  of  the  future,  and 
saw  myself  at  one  time  a  great  chief  in  the 
kingdom  of  Tannavorkoo ;  at  another,  return- 
ing to  my  home  laden  with  wealth  and  fame. 

On  the  third  day  I  sent  my  men  to  another 
part  of  Watara,  directing  them  to  remain  there 
several  days,  and  I  myself  rode  on  to  the  Irfak. 
I  reached  it  before  nightfall ;  as  I  had  had 
to  make  a  wide  detour  in  order  to  avoid  those 
engaged  in  digging  operations — even  as  it 
was  I  was  seen  by  several  of  the  miners. 
After  crossing  the  Irfak  I  rode  quickly  to  the 
serpent  valley,  which  I  reached  before  the  sun 
had  set,  and  took  a  farewell  look  at  the 
terrible  opening.  One  of  the  troop  was  wait- 
ino;  for  me  accordinfy  to  ao^reement,  the  others 
having  gone  on  through  the  narrow  pass. 
My  guide  showed  me  the  concealed  entrance, 
and  led  the  way  through  it.  Lanna  and  his 
troop  were  waiting  on  the  other  side,  on  the 


Adventures  in  New  Gtiinea.  151 

large  plain  of  wliich  I  spoke  in  my  account  of 
the  descent  from  tlic  mountain.  It  was 
resolved  to  lialt  here  for  the  night,  and  to 
proceed  before  dawn  towards  Tannavorkoo. 
I  should  not  feel  at  my  ease  until  I  had 
placed  the  mountain  between  Watara  and 
myself.  The  cold  was  intense,  and  the  narrow 
paths  were  slippery  and  dangerous.  We, 
however,  passed  over  to  K'ootar  without  any 
accident  worth  noticino'.  The  rottino-  remains 
of  criminals  were  still  hanging  in  the  high 
trees  by  the  roadside,  and  great  birds  soared 
about  over  the  revolting  spectacle.  When 
we  arrived  at  a  certain  point  in  our  descent, 
K'ootar  stood  out  before  us,  distant  about 
fifty  miles.  Several  other  towns  could  also 
be  seen,  and  as  the  weather  on  the  plain  was 
about  equal  to  spring-time  in  France,  we  had 
a  very  agreeable  view  of  everything.  The 
numerous  forests,  dotting  the  vast  plateau 
like  so  many  parks,  while  here  and  there,  as 
if  between  the  rifts  of  clouds,  were  towns 
and  cultivated  land,  making  an  agreeable 
diversity.  We  were  at  this  point  too  far 
down  to  see  the  lake  on  the  lower  level. 
We  were  glad  to  reach  the  plateau,  as  the 
cold  on  Tannavorkoo  was  very  great,  and 
the  keen  wind  swept  up  its  sides,  increasing 
our  discomfort  considerably. 


152  Advenhires  in  Neiv  Guinea. 

Next  day  we  sliould  be  at  K'ootar,  and  I 
felt  some  amount  of  trepidation  and  excite- 
ment in  tlie  thought  that  I  should  see 
Lamlam  and  Kayhar  again  after  the  lapse  of 
so  many  years.  We  rose  in  haste  early  the 
next  morning,  and  lost  no  time  before  reach- 
ing the  gates  of  K'ootar.  This  Ave  did  about 
three  o'clock  in  the  afternoon.  A  great 
change  was  evident.  People  laughed  and 
talked  without  restraint,  turning  and  staring 
at  us  in  good  homely  style. 

"What  was  the  meaning  of  all  this? 


Adventures  in  New  Guinea,  15.1 


CHAPTER  XVII. 

The  king  had  gone  to  his  winter  residence  in 
the  plain,  and  many  of  his  nobles  or  chiefs 
had  gone  with  him,  hence  the  great  change 
which  I  had  seen  in  the  people's  behaviour. 
They  were  not  under  the  same  constraint  as 
formerly.  We  rode  on  through  the  main 
street  to  the  treasury,  to  deposit  the  gold 
which  we  escorted.  Lanna  then  invited  me 
to  his  home,  to  remain  until  further  arrange- 
ments had  been  made  respecting  me.  A 
number  of  chiefs  crowded  round  us  eagerly 
welcoming  me  back  to  K'ootar,  and  inviting 
me  to  stay  at  their  houses.  As  I  had  already 
accepted  the  invitation  of  Lanna,  I  firmly 
declined  all  other  invitations  for  the  present, 
and  departed  with  my  friend.  I  was  eager 
to  call  upon  Kayhar,  and  may  as  well  confess 
that  I  was  no  less  eager  to  look  upon  the 
face  of  Lamlam.  In  explanation  of  this,  let 
it  be  remembered  that  human  sympathy  is 
always  dear  to  man,  and  especially  under  such 


154  Adventures  in  Nciv  Gtnnea. 

circumstances  as  those  in  wliicli  I  was  placGcl. 
BcsideSj  Lanilam  was  not  black  by  any  means, 
she  was  fairer  than  any  of  the  Orangwoks, 
and  they  were  usually  of  a  dark  olive  com- 
plexion. She  was  also  intelligent,  and 
possessed  of  such  gentle  kindness.  I  owed 
my  liberty  to  her  and  her  father,  and  had 
thought  continually  of  her  kindness  for  the 
last  four  or  five  months.  Let  those  who  feel 
inclined  to  condemn  my  feelings  towards 
Lamlam,  just  place  themselves  in  my  position, 
an  outcast  from  all  civilized  life,  and  their 
judgment  will,  I  am  sure,  be  greatly  modified. 
So  soon  as  I  could  do  so,  I  asked  my 
friend's  permission  to  visit  Kayhar,  and  this 
being  granted,  hurried  with  a  beating  heart 
towards  his  house.  As  I  neared  its  entrance, 
I  looked  up  eagerly  for  the  signs  of  Lamlam's 
presence,  for  she  would  be  aware  by  this  time 
that  I  had  returned.  I  saw  none,  and  felt 
disappointed.  I  reached  the  door  and  found 
the  matting  drawn  down  firmly,  and  could 
obtain  no  admission.  I  could  not  understand 
this,  and  was  much  chagrined.  It  was  a  great 
blow  to  my  hopes  and  anticipations.  I  returned 
to  Lanna  cast  down  and  heavy  at  heart.  He 
was  absent,  but  on  his  return  all  was  ex- 
plained. The  king  was  en  the  lower  level, 
and  with  him  were  his  wise  men,  the  iloo,  of 


Adventures  in  New  Gtiinca.  155 

wliom  Kayliar  was  one.     All  was  explained 
now,  and  I  felt  my  spirits  rise  again. 

Next  day,  after  a  consultation  with  tlio 
principal  chief  in  K'ootar,  who  compared  my 
account  of  the  gold  received  by  me  during 
the  first  year  of  my  residence  at  Watdrd  with 
the  amount  received  at  the  king's  treasury, 
it  was  resolved  that  I  should  be  sent  on  to  the 
king  and  his  wise  men  for  examination.  The 
matter  was  very  serious,  as  the  deficiency  on 
that  year  was  fully  a  third  of  the  amount 
of  the  gold  actually  raised.  I  was  nothing 
loth  at  this  decision,  and  expressed  my 
willingness  to  depart  at  once.  On  the  second 
day,  early  in  the  morning,  we  entered  the 
great  plain,  and  found  the  atmos]3here  most 
pleasant  and  agreeable  ;  for  although  it  was 
now  mid-winter,  yet  on  the  lower  country 
the  cold  was  like  the  warm  spring  weather 
which  one  experiences  in  Australia  or  the 
south  of  France.  The  king's  palace,  for  his 
house  might  be  called  by  such  a  name,  was 
in  a  beautiful  situation,  and  was  surrounded 
by  houses  for  his  wise  men,  and  guard-houses 
for  his  troops.  The  lake  was  distant  about 
two  miles,  and  was  covered,  at  this  season, 
with  elegantly-shaped  canoes,  ornamented  at 
the  stern  and  stem  with  ivory  and  gold, 
elaborately  worked  and  surmounted  by  gor- 


156         AdventtLves  in  Nciv  Guinea. 

geously-coloured  featbers.  To  witness  the 
movement  of  a  fleet  of  these  canoes  is  a  very 
pleasing  sight,  and  charms  one  with  a  sense 
of  elegance  and  refinement  which  one  does 
not  expect  to  find  so  far  from  European 
civilization. 

While  the  ofiicer  who  had  accompanied 
Lanna  and  myself  went  to  make  his  report,  I 
was,  under  Lanna's  guidance,  able  to  visit 
Kayhar's  house.  We  had  no  difficulty  in 
finding  it,  and  I  approached  it  with  such 
feelings  as  I  had  before  experienced. 

Kayhar  was  at  home,  and  was  about  to 
leave  for  a  consultation  with  the  wise  men. 
He  had  just  been  summoned  to  a  council. 
He  was  affected  to  tears  when  he  saw  me, 
and  took  me  by  the  hand,  English  fashion, 
to  welcome  me.  Lamlam  had  received  my  pre- 
sent and  had  discovered  the  letter.  She  had 
not  been  well,  but  was  now  looking  better, 
and  would  rejoice  to  look  upon  me  again. 
At  present  she  was  at  the  lake.  "  Our  iioo 
will  not  break  up  until  the  sun  is  down, 
Tregan  can  then  come  to  me,"  and  the  old 
chief  left  us.  Lanna  and  I  resolved  to 
walk  to  the  lake  side,  to  see  the  Orangwoks 
in  their  canoes.  I,  however,  had  another 
reason.  On  our  reaching  the  shore  we  sat 
down   u23on  a   rock  overlooking  the   inland 


Adventures  in  New  Gninea.  157 

sea,  and  looked  over  its  surface,  which  was 
dotted  with  many  large  canoes  moving  about 
gracefully,  like  so  many  vast  swans.  Lanna 
here  began  to  rally  me  about  the  old  chief's 
daughter,  and  said,  "  You  will  have  to  adopt 
our  customs  if  you  take  her  for  a  wife." 

"  What  customs,  my  friend  ?  " 

"  You  must  become  brown  like  us,"  point- 
ing to  his  own  dark  skin,  "  and  dress  like 
an  Orangwok." 

I  had  never  given  up  wearing  my  sailor's 
"  ducks,"  but  had  on  the  last  remaining 
pair,  which  were  in  a  dilapidated  condition. 

"  I  shall  have  to  do  so  directly,"  I  replied, 
smiling,  "for  I  have  no  more  European 
clothes  to  wear.  What  other  customs  must 
I  adopt?" 

"  You  must  worship  Otaroo,"  he  added, 
lowering  his  voice  and  turning  his  face  from 
the  sun. 

"  That  I  could  not  do,"  I  said,  "  I  am  a 
Christian,  and  worship  the  God  avIio  made 
the  sun." 

*'  Explain  to  me,  my  friend,  for  I  have 
often  thought  of  your  words  on  the  Tanna- 
vorkoo." 

So  I  endeavoured  to  explain  as  well  as  I 
could,  promising  to  read  to  him  from  my 
book  if  he  would  allow  me.     I  was  a  little 


158  Adventures  in  Neiv  Gtiinea. 

depressed  by  this  conversation  with  Lanna, 
although  I  hardly  knew  why.  As  we  rose 
up  from  our  seats  a  canoe  glided  in  to  the 
shore,  and  my  friend,  catching  my  arnijSaidj — 

"  Hush,  there  is  Lamlam." 

My  heart  sent  all  its  blood  to  my  face  as 
I  looked  and  saw  the  graceful  form  of 
Lamlam  springing  from  the  canoe.  She 
was  followed  by  her  mother  and  several 
other  women.  I  did  not  care  to  go  forward 
to  speak  to  them,  for  I  felt  all  power  passing 
from  my  body,  and  in  spite  of  my  friend's 
lively  sallies,  as  I  had  not  been  seen,  I 
moved,  away,  and  began  to  return  to  the 
palace.  I  knew  that  at  least  in  an  hour  or 
so  I  should  see  my  friends,  and  speak  to 
them.  I  went  back  to  Kayhar's,  and 
remained  waiting  for  his  return.  As  I  sat 
meditating  about  the  strange  events  and 
changes  in  my  life,  and  thinking  fondly  of 
Lamlam,  the  matting  entrance  was  drawn 
aside,  and  she  entered  the  room.  On  seeing 
me  her  colour,  yes,  her  colour  changed,  and 
she  turned  back,  only  for  an  instant,  however, 
as  in  the  next  moment  she  rushed  forward, 
and  I  received  her  into  my  arms,  kissing 
her  repeatedly.  "  Oh  !  Tregan,  my  friend, 
my  heart  is  glad,  welcome  back  to  Lamlam  !  " 

I  confess  I  never  felt  so  happy  in  all  my 


Adventures  in  Nezv  G^tinea.  159 

life.  A  new  and  indescribable  sensation 
came  over  me.  We  bad  miicb  to  say  to 
each  otber.  I  found  tbat  sbe  bad  patiently 
devoted  berself  to  study  tbo  letters  and 
words  I  bad  written  out  for  ber,  and  tbat 
on  receiving  my  first  letter  sbe  bad  begun 
to  learn  bow  to  combine  tbe  letters  wbose 
sounds  I  bad  taugbt  ber.  It  was  won- 
derful to  me  tbat  sbe  bad  been  able  to 
pick  it  all  up  so  quickly,  for  I  remember 
tbat  wben  I  bad  received  some  lessons  in 
sbortband,  it  bad  taken  me  many  weeks  to 
learn  tbe  signs  and  tbeir  sounds,  leaving  out 
tbeir  various  combinations. 

On  Kaybar's  return,  I  was  informed  tbat 
tbe  next  morning  I  was  to  be  presented  to 
tbe  king,  and  was  furtber  to  tell  my  story. 

So  next  day  I  was  presented,  if  sucb  a 
term  can  describe  my  attitude  before  a 
savage  king  or  cbief,  for  I  lay  on  my 
stomacb  before  bim,  wbile  be,  tbrougb  bis 
chiefs,  questioned  me  about  AVatara  and  its 
gold-mines.  Wben  I  told  bim  of  tbe  vast 
quantities  of  gold  and  bow  it  was  wasbed 
out  of  tbe  soil,  tbere  was  a  subdued  murmur 
of  amazement  from  all  tbe  cbiefs  and  tbeir 
wives,  wbo  were  present.  Astonishment  and 
indignation  filled  tbe  breasts  of  all,  tbe  king 
included,  wben  my  story  was  concluded.     It 


i6o         Adventures  in  New  Guinea, 

was  evident  that  tlie  governor  was  a  traitor 
and  a  rebel,  that  he  had  been  plundering  the 
king's  treasury,  and  it  was  resolved  at  the 
meetinq;  of  the  iioo  that  he  should  be 
punished  by  being  suspended  on  a  tree. 
One  old  experienced  warrior  advised  that  a 
troop  of  horse  should  be  despatched  at  once  to 
hold  the  mountain  passes.  This  sage  advice 
was  overruled,  as  it  was  now  mid-winter.  It 
was  therefore  resolved  that  any  undertaking 
should  be  delayed  until  the  winter  was  over, 
and  that  the  fact  of  my  return  to  K'ootar 
should  be  carefully  concealed.  Directions  to 
this  effect  were  given,  and  I  was  authorized 
to  remain  at  the  winter  palace  until  the 
expedition  was  ready  to  start.  In  the  mean- 
time I  had  determined  to  ask  Kayhar's 
consent  to  mj  marrying  Lamlam,  who  I  was 
sure  would  not  withhold  her  own.  The  old 
chief  expressed  his  pleasure  and  happiness, 
but  said  that  it  would  be  necessary  for  me 
to  adopt  the  customs  of  the  Orangwoks,  and 
that  on  my  doing  so,  leave  could  be  obtained 
from  the  king  for  me  to  reside  in  K'ootar. 
Without  further  delay  I  may  state  at  once 
that  at  a  council  of  the  wise  men  it  was 
decided  that  I  should,  on  adopting  the 
customs  of  the  Orangwoks,  be  raised  to  the 
position  of  a  chief  of  the  third  degree,  after 


Adventures  in  Neiv  Guinea.  i6i 

wliicli  I  should  be  permitted  to  marry  a 
daiigliter  of  one  of  the  chiefs  ;  but  the  whole 
ceremony  was  to  be  deferred  until  the  ex- 
pedition against  the  Governor  of  Watara  was 
terminated,  for  I  was  to  take  part  in  it.  I 
was  now  anxious  that  there  should  be  no 
further  delay,  and  was  glad  when  the  time 
came  for  the  king's  return  to  the  upper 
plateau.  This  was  the  signal  for  the  march 
of  the  troops,  who  had  been  placed  under 
the  command  of  the  old  warrior  formerly 
mentioned,  with  Lanna  and  myself  as  lieu- 
tenants. It  was  well  known  that  the  gover- 
nor would  offer  a  considerable  resistance,  as 
he  had  now  boldly  thrown  off  his  allegiance 
to  K'ootar,  and  stopped  the  supply  of  gold. 

Before  starting  scouts  had  been  sent 
forward  to  keep  our  way  clear,  and  some  of 
these  now  returned  with  the  alarming  in- 
toUigence  that  the  mountain  passes  were 
occupied  by  the  rebels,  and  that  it  would  be 
impossible  for  us  to  cross  to  Watara.  Every 
one,  now  that  it  was  too  late  to  take 
advantage  of  it,  acknowledged  the  wisdom 
of  the  old  warrior's  advice.  We  were  out- 
manoeuvred by  the  old  rebel,  and  our  case 
seemed  desperate,  for  no  other  approach  to 
Watara  was  known.  Out  of  this  difficulty  I 
was  able  to  deliver  them. 

II 


1 62         Adventiu'cs  in  New  Gicinea. 


CHAPTER  XVIII. 

The  occupation  of  tbe  niouDtain  passes  by 
an  enemy  had  never  been  anticipated  by  the 
Orangwoks.  They  were  now  completely 
perplexed  by  the  fact  that  the  gate  to 
"Watara  was  closed,  as  one  of  the  chiefs 
expressed  it,  and  there  was  no  other  known 
route,  for  the  range  of  Tannavorkoo  stretched 
out  towards  the  south  until  its  heights  were 
lost  in  the  far  distance.  I  was,  however, 
satisfied  that  there  was  a  passage  round  the 
southern  base  of  the  mountain,  and  begged 
permission  to  seek  for  a  new  road  to  Watara. 
This  permission  was  granted,  and  Lanna  and 
myself,  accompanied  by  twelve  hardy  soldiers, 
started  at  once  in  a  southerly  direction. 
This  afforded  me  an  opportunity  of  seeing 
the  lower  country  and  of  examining  tlic 
nature  of  the  animals  with  which  it  abounded. 
At  the  end  of  six  days'  travel  over  the 
plateau  skirting  the  mountain  we  came  to 
the  foot  of  the  Tannavorkoo,  and  descended 
into   the   pjlain  below,    as  the    sides   of  tho 


Adventures  in  Neiv  Guinea.  163 

mountain  itself  were  too  steep  to  allow  us 
to  attempt  their  ascent  equipped  as  we  were. 
We  had  no  sooner  descended  into  the  valley 
than  we  found  we  were  trespassing  on  the 
territory  of  another  tribe.  So  we  halted,  and 
after  a  consultation  between  Lanna  and 
myself  we  determined  to  retrace  our  steps 
until  dark,  and  then,  in  the  secrecy  of  the 
night,  to  attempt  to  pass  through  the 
territory  of  the  tribe,  which  did  not  appear 
to  be  numerous.  This  we  did,  and  passed  in 
the  dark  in  safety  beyond  the  tribe's  con- 
fines. In  half  a  day  we  reached  a  wide, 
deep  river  running  in  a  southerly  direction, 
which  I  named  the  Tannavorkoo.  As  the 
volume  of  water  was  very  great,  I  knew  it 
was  no  use  following  the  course  of  the  river 
down  to  find  a  shallow  ford,  so  I  resolved  to 
plunge  in  and  swim  over.  This  was  a 
dangerous  proceeding,  and  my  companions 
hesitated.  I  had  read  of  soldiers  swimming 
broad  rapid  rivers,  and  had  heard  it  said 
that  there  was  no  danger  if  you  could  give 
the  horse  its  freedom ;  so  plunging  into  the 
water  I  slipped  off  the  back  of  the  pony  and 
got  it  by  the  tail,  leaving  it  otherwise  free. 
The  little  thing  swam  capitally,  and  reached 
the  other  side  in  safety.  My  companions 
were  encouraged  to  follow  my  example,  and 


164  Adventures  in  New  Guinea. 

all  camo  safe  to  land.     We  had  roimded  the 
southern  point  of  the  great  mountain  range  ! 
I   ]iointed  out  with  my    sword  the   way  to 
Wataia,    not  more  than    six    days'    journey 
from  us  ;  and   we    decided   to  continue  our 
survey  of  the   country.     On   the   third  day 
we   sighted  one  of  the  well-known  peaks  of 
the  range — the  Volcano.      I   drew  Lanna's 
attention  to  this  landmark,  and  he  agreed 
with  me  that  it  was  unnecessary  to  push  our 
examination  further  ;  so  we  began  to  return, 
and   on    the    sixteenth   day   of    our  leaving 
K'ootar  we  re-entered  its  gates,  carrying  the 
glad  tidings  that  a  passage  had  been  dis- 
covered to   Watara.     A   consultation  of  the 
uoo    was    held,    and   it   was    concluded    to 
despatch  an  army  without  loss  of  time  by 
the   route   wliich    had   been    opened   up  by 
Lanna    and    myself.       This    army    was    in 
command  of  the  old  warrior  mentioned  before, 
but   Lanna  and  myself  were  to  be  advanced 
to  the  responsibility  of  chiefs,  and  share  in 
his    command.       Oar    course   lay    over   the 
same  country  wliich  we  had  travelled  three 
weeks  before.      It  was  filled  with  herds  of 
game.       Elk,    antelopes,     buffaloes,    bison, 
tigers  abounded.      There  were  also  numbers 
of  kangaroo,  an  Australian  animal,  called  by 
Orangwoks    "  dop-dop."       On  my    pointing 


Adventures  in  New  Gtiinea.  165 

these  out  to  Lanna,  and  explaining  that  I 
had  seen  them  before,  he  replied, — 

"  I  will  show  you  something  that  you  have 
not  seen." 

And  taking  me  to  a  thickly-foliaged  tree, 
he  showed  me  the  same  kind  of  animal,  only 
smaller,  in  a  bough  of  the  tree.  They  were 
kangaroo,  and  were  feeding  upon  the  leaves. 
They  seemed  perfectly  at  home  in  the  tree, 
and  climbed  it  with  as  much  ease  as  opossums. 
I  saw  many  of  the  same  kind  afterwards. 
The  wankoo  too  were  very  numerous  as  we 
advanced  over  the  plateau. 

We  had  plenty  of  sport,  and  kept  ourselves 
well  supplied  in  meat.  Indeed  we  depended 
upon  our  hunting  to  supply  food  for  our 
small  army — about  two  thousand  men.  This 
fact,  of  course,  reveals  a  weak  point  in  the 
Orangwoks'  mode  of  warfare  ;  yet  it  must 
be  remembered  that  such  an  expedition  as  we 
were  undertaking  was  altogether  unknown 
to  them.  It  was  beyond  all  their  previous 
experience,  and  they  knew  not  how  to  cope 
with  its  difficulties.  Nature,  however,  was 
good  to  us,  and  kept  us  in  food.  We  never 
wanted  for  a  meal.  On  the  seventh  day  we 
came  to  the  borders  of  the  plateau,  and  were 
in  sight  of  the  camp  or  village  of  the  savage 
tribe.      Our  coming  had  not  been  unknown 


1 66         Adventures  in  Neiu  Gtiinea, 

to  them,  for  we  were  a  large  host,  and  ttey 
were  determined  to  give  us  battle.  AVe 
halted  before  descending  to  the  lower  level, 
and  endeavoured  to  treat  with  them. 

Our  attempts  were  unsuccessful,  a  flight 
of  arrows  warning  us  that  we  must  be  careful 
in  approaching  tliem.  We  spent  the  night 
upon  the  high  level,  and  prepared  for  battle. 
A  council  of  war,  held  between  tiie  three  of 
us,  decided  that  it  would  be  wise  to  descend 
to  tlie  lower  plain  before  sunrise,  and  not  to 
make  the  attempt  in  the  face  of  a  determined 
enemy  ready  to  dispute  our  passage.  So  at 
three  o'clock  we  began  our  marcli  downward, 
the  stars  our  only  light.  The  hill  side  was 
very  steep,  sometimes  almost  precipitous; 
and  many  a  tumble  occurred  on  our  passage 
down.  By  five  o'clock  we  were  on  the  lower 
level,  drawn  up  ready  to  charge  our  enemies. 
They  were  taken  by  surprise  at  our  un- 
expected appearance  below;  nevertheless, 
they  came  on  to  attack  us. 

Forming  into  three  divisions  we  awaited 
the  first  discharge  of  arrows,  feeling  sure 
that  they  would  pass  over  our  beads.  We 
were  not  deceived.  With  a  great  shout  the 
savages  twirled  tlieir  spears  and  came  on. 
When  within  a  hundred  yards  they  shot 
their  arrows  at  us,  but  did  no  harm,  nearly 


Adventures  in  New  Guinea.  167 

the  whole  of  tliem  passing  over  our  heads. 
No  sooner  had  they  shot  their  arrows  at  us 
than  we  charged  them  with  full  speed,  riding 
in  among  the  compact  mass  of  negroes,  with 
our  spears  couched.  But  for  a  time  they 
resisted  with  great  bravery,  considering  the 
advantages  wo  had  over  them.  In  less  than 
half  an  hour  they  were  put  to  flight,  leaving 
nearly  fifty  men  dead  upon  the  field  of  battle, 
and  a  large  number  of  wounded.  Several  of 
our  men  were  killed  and  a  good  many 
injured.  I  escaped  without  hurt,  although 
an  arrow  entered  my  bamboo  headdress,  an^. 
remained  there  until  the  battle  was  concluded. 
During  the  conflict  a  great  savage  en- 
deavoured to  wrench  my  spear  from  my 
hand,  but  I  was  as  strong  as  himself,  and  so 
successfully  held  my  own  against  him.  He 
would  have  got  the  better  of  me  had  I  not 
sprung  off  my  pony,  which  was  a  very  easy 
thing  for  me  to  do,  for  my  feet  were  already 
nearly  on  the  ground.  On  reaching  the 
earth  I  drew  my  sword  with  my  right  hand, 
while  holding  the  spear  with  my  left,  and 
made  a  lunge  at  my  antagonist.  He  nimbly 
avoided  the  blow,  twisting  the  spear  round 
so  as  to  receive  the  full  force  of  the  blow. 
The  spear  was  shivered  to  pieces,  and  the 
wily  negro  seized  upon  the  barbed  end  to  use 


i68  Advenhires  in  Neiv  Guinea. 

it  against  myself.  I  now  found  that  he  was 
a  match  for  me,  for  he  made  at  me  with  great 
fury.  I  had,  however,  been  taught  the  use 
of  the  foils,  and  could  handle  my  sword  as  a 
Frenchman  ought  to  do  ;  so  that,  in  the 
end,  cool  skill  prevailed,  and  I  had  the 
satisfaction  of  seeing  my  terrible  black  enemy 
lying  at  my  feet  in  the  dust. 

Our  victory  was  followed  by  a  visit  from  a 
chief  of  the  Hokslii  tribe,  who  came  for  the 
purpose  of  concluding  a  peace,  and  of 
granting  us  a  passage  through  the  tribe's 
land  to  the  Tannavorkoo  river.  This  was  a 
very  acceptable  result,  for  we  did  not  wish 
to  fight  our  way  to  Watard. 

After  coming  to  an  understanding  with 
the  Hokshi  chieftain,  we  accepted  his  invita- 
tion to  remain  for  the  rest  of  the  day  with 
his  tribe  to  witness  some  of  the  tribal 
manoeuvres.  It  w^as  strange  to  think  how 
soon  our  deadliest  enemies,  who  had  been 
doing  their  best  to  destroy  us,  had  in  half 
an  hour  become  our  warm  friends,  and  were 
doing  their  best  to  amuse  us.  As  the  usages 
of  civilized  warfare^  were  unknown  among 
these  savages  we  did  not  relax  any  of  our 
vigilance,  while  we  remained  among  the 
Hokshi  on  friendly  terms. 

'  Is  there  sucli  a  thing  ? — Ed. 


Adventures  in  New  Ginnea.  169 

The  next  day,  as  soon  as  the  sun  had  risen, 
we  began  our  march  towards  the  river, 
accompanied  by  several  of  the  Hokshi  chiefs, 
as  we  felt  more  certain  that  the  tribe  would 
not  attempt  to  attack  us  or  intercept  us  as 
we  marched  through  the  wooded  plain,  while 
their  chiefs  were  hostages  in  our  hands. 
Before  reaching  the  Tannavorkoo  river,  how- 
ever, we  dismissed  our  newly-found  friends, 
and  continued  our  march  alone.  On  reaching 
the  river  banks,  where  the  depth  and  width 
of  the  water  were  apparent  to  the  Orangwoks, 
there  was  considerable  trouble  in  getting 
them  to  attempt  the  crossing.  Lanna  and 
myself  plunged  in,  followed  by  several  of  the 
troop  which  had  accompanied  us  previously. 
Others  followed,  until  nearly  one-half  had 
crossed.  The  remainder  hesitated,  and  at 
one  time  I  was  fearful  that  we  should 
leave  a  portion  of  our  little  squadron  behind 
us.  Before  the  day  closed,  however,  the 
whole  of  the  troop  had  crossed.  The 
difficulty  of  such  a  passage  warned  us  that 
we  must  lose  no  time  in  pushing  on  to  the 
Irfak,  lest  by  our  delay  the  rebel  governor 
should  draw  up  his  army  to  oppose  our 
passage  over  that  river ;  we  therefore  made 
forced  marches,  our  hardy  little  beasts 
holding  out  capitally.     I  do  not  know  what 


1 70  Adventiwes  in  New  Guinea. 

European  ponies  to  compare  with  tliem ; 
they  are  so  hardy,  sure-footed,  and  fleet. 
By  this  means,  we  were  able  to  reach  the 
Irfak  on  the  afternoon  of  the  fourth  day. 
Finding  the  passage  clear,  we  resolved  at 
once  to  cross  over,  and  did  so.  At  night-fall 
we  w^ere  within  fifteen  miles  of  Watara. 
During  the  night  we  despatched  a  trooper- to 
the  town  to  reconnoitre.  He  returned  before 
day-break,  reporting  that  there  were  no 
evidences  of  any  preparation  to  meet  ns. 
We  were  overjoyed  at  our  good  luck.  It 
was  as  I  expected  ;  as  the  mountain  passes 
were  well  guarded,  the  old  rebel,  not  ex- 
pecting our  approach  from  any  other  side, 
had  made  no  preparation  to  resist  an  attack. 
We  marched  as  soon  as  our  scout  returned, 
and  before  nine  o'clock  we  were  at  the  gates 
of  Watdrd.  A  hasty  defence  was  thrown  up 
by  the  rebels,  who  were  not  able  to  concen- 
trate their  forces.  As  few  of  the  citizens 
had  any  sympathy  with  the  old  tyrant's 
rebellious  movement,  we  received  some  assist- 
ance from  them.  But  the  best  help  they 
rendered  us  was  by  keeping  out  of  the  way, 
while  we  charged  down  the  narrow  streets, 
following  the  retreating  enemy.  At  every 
point  we  were  successful,  for  our  foes  lost 
heart  at  the  very  outset.      They   had  been 


Adventures  in  New  Guinea.  171 

completely  surprised,  and  tliouglit  we  must 
have  crossed  the  heights;  they  supposed, 
therefore,  that  reinforcements  would  im- 
mediately follow  us ;  that  we  had  the  whole 
strength  of  the  kingdom  at  our  back.  When 
the  governor  fell  into  our  hands,  the  struggle 
at  once  came  to  an  end. 

The  affair  can  only  be  described  as  a 
skirmish,  and  only  a  few  lives  were  lost, 
although  many  more  were  wounded.  In  less 
than  an  hour  after  our  entrance  of  Watard  the 
rebellion  had  collapsed.  Had  it  been  skil- 
fully conducted,  no  power  possessed  by  the 
king  of  K'ootar  could  have  extinguished  it, 
and  a  new  and  rich  kingdom  might  have 
been  constituted  on  the  western  side  of  the 
Tannavorkoo. 

The  old  rebel  was  forwarded  at  once  to 
K'ootar  over  the  mountain  passes,  which 
were  opened  to  us,  the  rebel  soldiers  sur- 
rendering. He  was  taken  before  the  u66,  and 
having  been  condemned,  was  chained  to  one 
of  the  tall  trees  used  for  the  purpose  of 
execution.  Here  he  died  a  lingering  and 
fearful  death,  thus  tasting  something  of  the 
sufferings  \vhich  had  been  endured  by  many 
others  at  his  instance. 


I  'J2  Adventures  in  New  Guinea. 


CHAPTER  XIX. 

I  LOST  no  time  in  returning  to  K'ootar,  bid- 
ding, as  it  has  proved,  farewell  to  Watard  for 
ever.  I  mentioned  in  a  previous  part  of  this 
narrative,  that  it  had  been  resolved  that  I 
should,  on  adopting  the  customs  of  the 
Orangwoks,  be  raised  to  the  dignity  of  a 
chief  (of  the  third  order),  and  allowed  to 
marry  a  chief's  daughter.  In  taking  the 
latter  step,  I  do  not  wish  to  be  misunder- 
stood. It  may  to  Christians  seem  a  singular 
thing  for  a  Christian  man  to  marry  a  heathen 
woman,  of  a  different  colour,  and  to  resolve 
to  live  among  heathen  people  instead  of  try- 
ing to  return  to  civilization.  Yet  it  must  be 
remembered  that  I  had  given  up  any  hope  of 
ever  escaping  from  the  captivity  in  which  I 
was  held  ;  and  further,  that  habit  accustoms 
one  to  everything.  I  had  become,  after  more 
than  five  years'  life  among  the  Orangwoks, 
accustomed  to  their  ways,  and  had  moreover 
found  them  intelligent,  and,  in  their  way  civil- 
ized people.     But,  above  all,  what  resigned 


Adventures  in  New  Guinea.  ly;^ 

me  to  stay  among  them,  was  the  fact  of  my 
having  conceived  a  real  affection  for  Kayhar's 
daughter.  After-events  will  prove  that  she 
was  in  every  way  worthy  of  the  love  of  one 
like  myself;  that  she  possessed  many  quali- 
ties which  would  have  been  highly  esteemed 
even  among  Europeans.  AH  this  will  appear 
as  my  narrative  proceeds.  These  circum- 
stances being  duly  considered,  will,  I  trust, 
procure  a  favourable  judgment  on  the  step  I 
was  about  to  take;  it  must  be  understood, 
moreover,  that  I  did  not  renounce  my  religion 
as  a  Christian.  I  had  too  often  failed  to  act 
up  to  my  duty  as  a  professing  Christian,  yet 
I  never  for  a  moment  intended  to  relinquish 
that  faith.  On  my  return  to  K'ootar,  my 
proposed  marriage  with  Lamlam  was  formally 
sanctioned  by  the  iioo,  to  whom  the  intention 
had  to  be  submitted  for  their  approval.  First, 
however,  I  had  to  be  received  among  the 
Orangwoks,  to  have  my  skin  stained  the 
same  colour  as  theirs,  and  to  adopt  their  cos- 
tume. A  house  of  three  stories  had  been 
built  for  me  while  I  was  absent  in 
Watara,  so  that  there  was  now  no  occasion 
for  further  delay  on  any  account.  The  cere- 
mony was,  therefore,  directed  to  proceed.  I 
was  summoned  to  the  priest's  house  and 
required  to  reside  with  him  for  one  week. 


174         Adventures  in  New  Guinea. 

Here,  my  skin  was  stained  with  some  juices 
until  it  attained  a  dark  colour,  successive 
coatings  having  been  put  upon  me  by  the 
priest's  own  hand.  This  process  having  been 
completed,  I  was  clothed  in  a  long  but  filthy 
robe,  which  completely  covered  me  from  head 
to  foot,  only  leaving  an  opening  for  my  eyes. 
The  priest  now  put  on  himself  a  rich  dress 
covered  with  ornaments  of  gold,  and  directed 
me  to  be  taken  by  some  of  the  assisting 
priests,  clothed  similarly,  only  not  so  gor- 
geousl}^  to  a  stream  which  ran  near  the 
sacred  grove.  Hither  I  was  brought,  dis- 
guised in  the  filthy  robe  that  I  have  men- 
tioned. A  large  crowd  of  people  were  ga- 
thered about  the  banks  of  the  stream,  consist- 
ing of  both  men  and  women.  Drums  were 
beaten,  accompanied  by  such  other  musical 
instruments  as  the  people  possessed.  When 
the  priest  arrived,  he,  standing  by  my  side, 
delivered  an  harangue  to  the  people,  con- 
cluding with  an  address  to  the  sun  (or  Otaroo), 
on  which  all  the  Orangwoks  prostrated  them- 
selves, and  repeating  the  name  in  subdued 
tones  whenever  the  priest  mentioned  it  in  his 
address.  This  was  the  first  instance  of  a 
religious  service  which  I  had  witnessed 
among  the  Orangwoks.  Such  services  were 
more  common   among  the  Kakshi,  as  they 


Adventures  in  Neiv  Guinea.  175 

were  more  superstitious.  Private  religious 
acts  there  were  none  among  either  tribe. 
Whatever  of  such  services  they  had  were  of  a 
pubhc  nature,  and  were  always  connected 
with  something  which  affected  the  public 
mind.  At  Watara  there  was  no  priest,  and 
therefore  no  religious  service  of  any  kind. 
But  to  proceed,  when  the  priest's  address 
was  concluded — he  looked  a  very  striking 
figure  in  his  bright  dress  flashing  in  the  sun, 
and  standing  with  his  hands  outspread  before 
the  crowd  prostrate  before  him.  When  he 
had  concluded,  two  assisting  priests  de- 
scended into  the  water,  and  stationed  them- 
selves ready  to  receive  me.  The  priest, 
taking  me  by  the  hand,  led  me  to  the  stream, 
and,  chanting  a  hymn  to  Otaroo,  whose 
chorus  was  taken  up  by  the  people,  he  cast 
me  into  the  water  as  the  chorus  was  being 
sung.  I  was  at  once  seized  by  the  two 
priests,  and  dipped  several  times  under  its 
surface.  At  each  successive  immersion  the 
chorus  was  repeated  in  louder  strains.  On 
the  last  occasion  I  was  kept  entirely  under 
water  until  my  filthy  robe  was  removed.  I 
was  then  allowed  to  emerge  from  my  bath — 
my  skin  as  black  as  that  of  any  of  theirs. 
When  this  was  seen  a  loud  shout  was  raised, 
and  Otaroo  was   invocated,  all   falling  flat 


176  Adventures  in  Neiv  Gitbiea. 

upon  their  faces  at  tlie  mention  of  liis  dreaded 
name.  On  my  appearing  before  them,  per- 
fectly naked,  the  priest  again  chanted  a 
hymn ;  again  the  crowd,  as  before,  taking  up 
the  chorus.  While  this  was  being  sung, 
another  priest  came  forward,  and  clothed  mo 
with  the  usual  dress  of  a  chief  of  the  third 
class — a  kind  of  smock  of  fine  hemp,  beauti- 
fully barred  with  gold.  I  was  now  an  Orang- 
wok,  and  hardly  knew  myself,  chiefs  and 
their  wives  coming  forward  to  congratulate 
me  on  having  become  one  of  themselves.  So 
ended  the  performances  of  that  day.  Next 
day  I  was  presented  to  the  king,  and  received 
from  him  a  chief's  sword.  I  could  now  marry 
Lamlam,  and  begged  her  father  that  there 
might  be  no  further  delay.  The  usages  of 
the  country,  however,  interfered  again,  and 
hindered  the  performance  of  the  marriage  for 
another  fortnight,  as  no  one  was  allowed  to 
marry  until  the  moon  was  full.  One  of  these 
usages  was,  that  whenever  a  chief's  daughter 
was  married  a  slave  was  sacrificed,  some- 
times two  or  three,  or  even  six — according  to 
the  rank  of  the  chieftain — were  sacrificed.  I 
did  not  become  acquainted  with  this  bar- 
barous custom  until  1  was  requested  to  lay 
my  hand  upon  the  poor  w^retch's  head  in 
order  that  the  priest  might  offer  him  up. 


Adventures  in  Nciv  Guinea.  177 

When  acquainted  with  the  fact  I  refused  to 
consent  to  the  sacrifice,  or  take  any  part 
whatever  in  it.  I  interceded,  moreover,  for 
the  man's  life  to  be  spared.  This  could  not 
be,  it  was  said — that  if  I  did  not  comply  with 
the  law  or  custom,  Lamlam  must  do  so.  The 
poor  wretch  stood  by  trembling  while  I  ex- 
postulated with  the  priest  and  Kayhar.  This 
made  me  the  more  determined  that  he  should 
not  be  slain,  so  I  resorted  to  a  stratagem,  for 
which  I  hope  the  reader  will  not  judge  me 
too  severely.  It  was  this  :  I  professed  the 
greatest  abhorrence  (which  I  really  felt)  at 
the  intended  murder,  and  declared  that  if 
wMie  men  joined  in  killing  a  slave  they  were 
hung  by  the  gods  upon  trees  and  left  to  rot. 
This  statement  made  an  impression  upon 
Kayhar,  and  through  him  upon  the  priest.  I 
offered  to  bring  my  book  in  proof  of  what  I 
said;  and,  on  being  requested  to  do  so,  I 
brought  the  Bible  and  read  the  words  from 
Genesis,  "  Whoso  sheddeth  man's  blood  by 
man  shall  his  blood  be  shed,"  altering  them 
to  this  effect  in  translating  them  into  Orang- 
wok,  "Whoso  sheddeth  slave's  blood  the 
gods  shall  hang  him  on  a  tree  to  rot." 
Whether  I  was  justified  in  doing  this,  I  leave 
my  readers  to  judge.  The  course  I  took  had 
due  effect.     The  man  was  reprieved,  and  ul- 


178         Adventures  in  New  Guinea. 

liraately  liis  life  was  spared,  on  tLe  uuder- 
standing  tliat  lio  was  to  be  my  slave  for  ever, 
ready  at  any  time  to  be  sacrificed.  On  these 
terms  tlie  custom  was  in  my  case  dispensed 
with,  and  onr  marriage  was  allowed  to  pro- 
ceed. The  form  of  marriao:e  was  sino;ular 
and  elaborate. 

I  proceeded  to  the  sacred  grove  over  night, 
and  was  placed  in  a  kind  of  box  or  ark,  care- 
fully covered  in.  Before  the  sun  rose,  or  as 
soon  as  his  first  beams  fell  npon  the  grove, 
which  was  situated  on  \\\o\\  o^round  outside  of 
the  city,  the  priest  began  to  chant  certain 
words  intended  as  prayers,  which  he  con- 
tinued until  the  beating  of  drums  announced 
that  the  bride  was  approaching.  When  she 
entered  the  grove,  led  by  the  priest  and  fol- 
lowed by  her  father  and  friends,  she  was 
taken  first  to  the  marble  altar  on  which  the 
poor  slave  was  to  have  been  slain,  and  then 
some  words  were  chanted  over  her  head  as 
she  lay  upon  the  pacred  earth.  She  was  now 
(on  standing  up)  led  round  the  grove  accom- 
panied by  her  maidens,  seeking  her  husband. 
Of  course  he  could  not  be  found,  being  care- 
fully concealed  in  the  chest  which  I  have  men- 
tioned, and  which  she  was  not  permitted  to 
approach.  At  last  she  returned  to  the  altar, 
and  there,  declaring  that  she  could  not  find 


Adventures  in  Ncio  Guinea.  1 79 

Tregan,  prayed  the  help  of  Otaroo.  On  this 
the  priest  demanded  gold  for  the  sacred  ser- 
vices. On  the  gold  being  placed  upon  the 
altar,  the  chanting  was  renewed,  and  as  the 
chorus  was  raised — all  as  usual  joining  in  it — 
Lamlam  was  led  towards  the  chest  in  which 
I  was  hidden.  Again  the  chant  was  sung, 
and  again  the  chorus  was  taken  up  by  the 
spectators.  On  this  being  repeated  the  third 
time,  Lamlam  was  introduced  into  the  chest 
and  became  my  wnfe.  The  proceedings  hav- 
ing reached  this  point,  the  noise  from  drams, 
fifes,  lars,  and  voices  became  deafening,  in 
the  midst  of  which  we  felt  the  chest  lifted 
and  borne  throus^h  the  air.  This  continued 
for  half  an  hour,  when  suddenly  all  the  noise 
ceased.  We  had  reached  the  gates  of  K'ootar, 
and  Avere  enterinof  its  streets.  Noise  now 
would  have  been  unseemly.  The  crowd,  how- 
ever, continued  to  follow  until  our  bearers 
stopped,  but  only  for  a  moment,  in  the  next 
they  proceeded,  although  with  evident  diffi- 
culty, the  chest  tilting  as  if  it  was  being  lifted 
upward.  We  now  felt  that  the  chest  was 
laid  upon  a  floor,  and  presently  all  was  silent. 
The  sound  of  footsteps  being  heard  receding 
in  the  distance,  Lamlam  now  whispering  that 
we  were  at  home,  I  opened  the  side  of  our 
carriage  and  found  that  we  were  in  our  own 
N  2 


I  So  Adventures  in  Nezu  Guinea, 

house  on  the  third  floor.    AYe  were  at  home  ; 
La  ml  am  was  my  wife. 

For  a  whole  week  neither  of  us  stirred  out 
of  our  house.  It  would  have  been  a  serious 
breach  of  etiquette  had  we  doue  so,  but  at 
the  end  of  that  time  we  were  saluted  by  a 
horrible  din  of  instruments  beating  discord- 
antly, which  continued  for  an  hour.  This 
was  to  signify  that  we  were  to  return  to  the 
world,  and  begin  our  round  of  feasting  and 
merriment,  with  which  the  marriage  of  a 
chief's  daughter  always  concludes.  I  was 
glad  when  it  was  all  over. 


Adventures  in  New  Guinea.  1 8 1 


CHAPTER  XX. 

Wannoota,  the  principal  priest,  was  a  man  of 
great  intelligence,  with  a  wider  extent  of 
knowledge  than  was  possessed  by  the  ordi- 
nary chiefs.  He  was  shrewd  and  far-seeing ; 
ready  to  perceive  the  bearing  of  anything 
upon  his  interests.  After  my  marriage  ho 
sought  me  out  and  became,  as  I  concluded, 
my  friend.  He  expressed  the  highest  ad- 
miration of  my  ability  to  talk  to  a  piece  of 
paper  or  leaf  which  had  marks  upon  it,  and 
begged  me  to  give  him  some  assistance  that 
he  might  be  able  to  converse  with  the  "  white 
leaf."  I  consented  to  do  so,  and  after  giving 
him  a  few  lessons  in  the  same  way  that  I  had 
given  them  years  before  to  Lamlam,  he  made 
great  progress,  and  evidently  grasped  the  full 
meaning  of  our  system  of  writing.  After 
this  he  visited  me  assiduously,  and  obtained 
from  me  all  the  knowledge  I  could  communi- 
cate in  this  way.  He  also  sought  eagerly  for 
information  respecting  the  countries  of  the 
white  men  and  their  religion.     To  all  that  I 


1 82  Adventures  in  N'ezu  GiiiJiea. 

could  tell  liim  he  listened  intentl}^,  only 
interrupting  to  ask  some  question,  wliich 
showed  how  well  he  understood  the  bearing 
of  my  remarks. 

"  Do  you  not  keep  your  God  in  j'our 
temples  ?  "  (or  groves.) 

"  No,  our  God  is  in  heaven,  beyond  the 
stars  or  beyond  the  sun." 

*'  There  is  nothing  beyond  the  sun ;  no- 
thing could  remain  up  there.  How  would  it 
hold  on?  AVhere,  therefore,  could  your  God 
live?" 

"  He  lives  out  of  sight ;  no  one  can  see  the 
palace  where  He  resides." 

"  How  do  you  know  that  unless  you  have 
been  there?" 

"  Our  leaves  (books)  tell  us  this." 
"  But  did   your   leaves  come  down  from 
heaven,  and  who  brought  them  ?     "Were  they 
thrown  down  in  a  thunder-storm  ?  " 

To  this  I  answered  by  explaining  as  best  I 
could  ;  when  Wannoota  returned  again  to  his 
first  thought. 

"  Then,  if  your  God  is  not  kept  in  His 
temples,  how  do  the  people  make  offerings  of 
gold  to  Him  ?  How  do  they  offer  sacrifice  to 
Him  ?  And  if  they  do  not,  how  can  His 
priests  live  and  l:)ecome  rich,  dressing  like  the 
great  chiefs   of   the   kingdom  ?     If  we  only 


Adventures  in  New  Gninea.  183 

worsliipped  Otaroo  with  words  liis  priests 
would  die,  and  the  people  would  not  fear 
Mm." 

I  had  been  trying  to  explain  the  nature  of 
Christian  worship  to  him.  I  cannot  relate 
one  hundredth  part  of  the  priest's  conversa- 
tion with  me ;  nor  did  I  at  the  time  see  the 
drift  of  his  inquiries.  He  professed  to  be 
anxious  to  understand  what  was  in  the  book 
from  which  I  had  read  before  I  was  married. 
I  promised  to  teach  him.  The  priest  and 
myself  were  thus  thrown  a  great  deal  to- 
gether, and,  as  he  was  a  well-informed  and 
intelligent  man,  I  gained  a  large  amount  of 
information  about  the  resources  of  the  king- 
dom of  K'ootar — the  manners  and  customs 
of  the  people — the  distant  tribes  inhabiting 
the  coast  country  to  the  north  of  the  Tanna- 
vorkoo.  He  told  me  that  there  were  among 
these  barbarian  tribes, — tribes  of  women  who 
lived  entirely  by  themselves,  and  killed  any 
man  who  fell  into  their  hands  except  at 
certain  seasons  of  the  year.  That  there  was 
another  race,  called  the  Kik-Kiks,  who  had 
an  evil  spirit  living  in  the  heads  of  the  indi- 
vidual members  of  the  tribe.  I  could  not 
understand  this  till  afterwards.  But  I  will 
I'elate  what  the  priest  told  me. 

"  Many  years  ago,"  he  said,  "  there  was  a 


184  Adventures  in  New  Ginnea. 

great  chief,  wlio  was  very  brave  and  very 
cruel.  In  a  battle  with  one  of  the  many  other 
savage  tribes,  he  was  struck  to  the  ground 
by  a  spear  wound  which  passed  through  his 
mouth.  As  the  blow  did  not  kill  him  he  was 
nursed  carefully  until  he  recovered,  but  when 
he  had  recovered  it  was  found  that  an  evil 
spirit  had  taken  possession  of  him,  and  was 
livinof  in  his  head.  It  could  be  heard  talkinnr. 
Every  one  felt  he  was  haunted,  and  avoided 
him.  After  a  time,  his  life  becoming  a  burden 
to  him,  he  departed  from  the  kingdom,  and, 
taking  with  him  many  wives,  he  established  a 
new  tribe." 

This  was  many  years  ago,  before  Wan- 
noota's  three  fathers  were  born.  The  new 
tribe  thus  formed  were  the  Kik-Kiks. 

"Another  people,"  he  said,  "had  tails,  at 
least  the  men  had,  and  whenever  they  sat 
down  had  to  make  holes  in  which  to  coil 
their  tails,  for  they  were  very  long." 

I  did  not,  of  course,  believe  these  stories, 
yet  felt  there  might  be  some  amount  of  truth 
in  them.  Before  I  left  K'ootar  I  had  a  sli<2;ht 
confirmation  of  one  of  these  stories.  There 
came  a  deputation  from  a  distant  tribe  living 
in  the  north,  bringing  with  them  a  slave 
which  they  had  captured  on  their  route.  As 
he  was    said  to  belong  to  the  Kik-Kiks,  I, 


Adventures  in  New  Guinea.  185 

remembering  the  priest's  tale,  went  to  see 
the  slave.  He  was  an  ugly,  malformed-look- 
ing creature,  very  forbidding  in  his  appear- 
ance. When  I  drew  near  to  him  I  could  hear 
distinctly  a  noise  whenever  he  drew  his  breath, 
like  the  ticking  of  a  clock.  I  could  not  be- 
lieve my  ears  ;  yet,  there  it  was.  I  examined 
the  man,  thinking  the  noise  might  be  caused 
by  some  abnormal  state  of  his  throat.  Yet  I 
could  detect  nothing  unusual.  The  man  was 
breathing  naturally,  not  in  the  least  surprised 
at  himself,  but  surprised  to  find  that  we  did 
not  occasion  a  similar  noise  when  we  drew 
our  breath.  Whether  there  are  others  like 
this  man  I  cannot  say.  It  is  possible  that 
one  or  two  instances  like  this  may  have 
given  rise  to  the  story  of  a  tribe  of  Kik- 
Kiks. 

My  life  with  Lamlam  was  a  very  happy 
one.  She  endeavoured  in  all  things  to  carry 
out  my  wishes,  even  in  regard  to  her  dress. 
Of  course  I  was  too  much  imbued  with 
European  customs  to  be  pleased  with  the 
indecent  costume  of  heathenism,  and  I  per- 
suaded my  wife  to  adopt  a  more  becoming 
dress  in  respect  of  length  than  was  usually 
worn.  As  no  one  could  attend  a  levee  of  the 
king's  except  in  the  dress  prescribed,  I 
thought  it  better  that  Lamlam  should  keep 


1 86  Adventures  in  Neiv  Guinea. 

fiway,  giving  out  tliat  she  was  not  well — as 
indeed  she  was  not. 

We  had  many  pleasant  and  interesting  con- 
versations, wbicli  I  now  hold  in  affectionate 
recollection.  Although  I  do  not  care  to 
reveal  the  purport  of  these,  yet,  to  give  the 
reader  an  insight  of  her  character  and  mind, 
I  will  relate  one  conversation  which  we  had 
together  soon  after  our  marriage. 

(I  may  mention  here  that  I  had  not  felt 
satisfied  with  my  marriage  until  I  had  read 
the  marriage-service  from  the  Prayer  Book, 
which  was  bound  with  my  Bible,  with  Lam- 
lam,  and  had  gone  through  the  ceremonies 
there  prescribed.) 

It  was  after  this  that  the  conversation 
referred  to  took  place. 

''  How  long,"  said  she,  placing  her  hand  in 
mine  and  laying  her  head  on  my  shoulder, 
*'  did  you  say  you  would  love  me  ?  " 

"  For  ever — until  death  parts  us." 

*'  And  won't  you  love  me  afterwards  ?  " 

*'  Yes,  Lamlam,  I  will  love  you  in  heaven." 

"What  shall  I  be  like  after  I  die?  Shall 
I  be  a  Wankoo  or  Dop-dop  ?  " 

"  No,  you  will  be  an  angel ;  better  than 
you  are  now,  and  as  white  as  the  snow  on 
Tannavorkoo." 

She  shrank  from  the  idea  of  becoming 
white,  but  she  said, — 


Adventures  in  Neiv  Guinea.  187 

*'  Where  sliall  I  live  tlicn  ?  In  wbat 
country  ?  " 

*'  In  heaven,  beyond  the  sun." 

"  But  there  is  no  place  beyond — farther  olT 
than  Otaroo." 

*'  Yes,  there  is,  Lamlam,  but  we  can't 
Ece  it." 

"  Well,  but  Tregan,  how  can  we  get  up  to 
heaven  ?     What  road  shall  we  go  ?  " 

"  Ob,  we  shall  have  wings,  and  fly  up  like 
the  angels."  ^ 

This  satisfied  my  wife's  mind  for  a  time. 
And  we  often  renewed  our  consideration  of 
the  same  subject,  as  much  to  my  own 
instruction  as  to  hers,  for  I  found  that  I  was 
really  very  ignorant  when  I  came  to  teach 
others.  And  so  a  pleasant  year  passed  away, 
a  year  in  which  I  enjoyed  as  much  real 
happiness  as  I  can  expect  to  have  this  side 
of  the  grave. 

^  Tregan's  idea  of  angels  is  a  very  primitive  one.  The 
Sitiptures  do  not  say  that  they  have  Avings.— Ed. 


1 88         Adventures  in  New  Guinea, 


CHAPTER  XXT. 

My  happiness  was  increased  at  the  end  of 
twelve  months  by  the  birth  of  a  little  boy. 
It  was  a  strange  sensation  to  me  when  I  first 
heard  the  child's  cry,  as  he  lay  in  his 
mother's  arms.  I  did  not  feel  immediately 
any  special  affection  for  him.  I  looked  upon 
him  as  a  curiosity,  and  felt  towards  him  very 
much  as  I  have  felt  towards  a  little  puppy. 
Do  not  misunderstand  me.  He  was  a  pretty 
enough  little  fellow,  with  an  olive-coloured 
skin,  and  large,  gentle-looking  dark  eyes, 
which  wandered  all  over  my  face,  as  I  stood 
watching  the  little  thing  as  he  lay  nestling 
into  his  mother.  He  was  pretty,  and  quite 
as  interesting  as  any  other  baby  ever  was. 
Yet  I  did  not  feel  that  strong  paternal  love 
for  him  which  I  expected  to  feel.  I  liked  to 
stroke  him,  and  would  have  liked  to  handle 
him,  only  I  was  fearful  of  hurting  him. 
However,  as  time  passed,  I  found  all  a 
father's  love  come,  and  then  the  happiness 
of  our  household   reached   its   heio:ht.     As 


Advenhires  in  Neiv  Guinea.  189 

soon  as  my  wife  began  to  get  strong,  and 
was  able  to  be  about  the  Louse,  slie  liad 
congratulatory  visits  to  receive.  These  were 
very  wearisome,  as  indeed  all  the  etiquette  of 
these  people  was,  at  least  to  me.  But  then 
I  had  never  been  accustomed  to  what  is 
called  etiquette,  having  been  all  my  life  a 
free  and  careless  sailor. 

There  was  now  to  be  a  great  confabulation 
among  the  women  of  the  place,  for  the  pur- 
pose of  naming  the  new  comer.  I  was  not 
supposed  to  be  interested  in  this  matter,  so 
I  was  not  taken  into  the  council.  This  was 
purely  a  subject  for  the  women-friends  of 
Lamlam  to  determine.  And  so  the  child 
was  handed  about  from  one  to  another,  every 
one  examining  him  with  care,  and  comment- 
ing upon  his  various  features.  All  were 
much  surprised  to  find  that  he  was  nearly 
white.  As  I  was  now  well  stained,  and  as 
brown  as  any  of  them,  they  concluded  that 
my  children  would  partake  of  the  usual 
complexion  of  the  race,  and  they  were 
horribly  disgusted  to  find  that  this  one  had  a 
strong  tendency  to  whiteness.  Many  were 
the  uncomplimentary  epithets  which  w^ere 
applied  to  the  baby  in  Lamlam's  hearing,  on 
the  occasion  of  the  confabulation  ;  for  these 
people,  in  spite  of  their  pretence  to  refine- 


]  90  Adventures  in  New  Guinea. 

ment  (and  tliey  have  as  mucii  of  iliis  as  even 
European  dames),  were  really,  in  most  cases, 
heartless  and  cruel,  not  sparing  the  feelings 
of  others — because  they  themselves  had 
none.  I  had  suggested  a  name  to  Lamlam, 
and  expressed  a  wish  that  he  might  be  called 
by  the  name  of  Philip.  Such  an  uncouth, 
savage  name  could  not,  however,  be  heard 
of ;  so  they  gave  him  the  name  of  Wokamshe. 
The  ceremony  of  naming  reminded  me  of 
another  ceremony — that  of  baptism,  and  I 
felt  that  the  child  ought  to  be  made  a 
Christian,  so  I  talked  to  Lamlam  about  it. 
The  followino:  conversation  ensued  : — 

I  explained  first  what  baptism  was.  Tlio 
ponring  of  water  on  the  face — Lamlam  called 
this  "  watering  the  baby." 

"  But  what  is  the  good  of  watering  the 
baby  unless  his  face  is  unclean?" 

"  It  will  make  him  a  Christian,  Lamlam, 
like  Jesus  Christ,  of  whom  we  read  in  the 
book;  like  the  man  who  went  on  a  journey 
in  the  '  Pilgrim's  Progress  ' — that  man  was 
a  Christian." 

"But  would  Wokamshe  go  on  a  journey 
away  from  me  if  you  watered  him  ?  " 

"  No,  certainly  not ;  but  he  would  bo  a 
Christian,  and  would  grow  up  kind  and  good. 
All  white  people  are  baptized.'* 


Adventures  in  Neiv  Gttinea.  191 

*'  What !  even  tliose  wlio  kill  one  another 
witli  thunder  and  fire?"  I  had  described 
battle-scenes  to  Lamlam. 

"  Yes,  all  of  them." 

*'  But  then  they  are  not  good  if  they  kill 
one  another?  " 

I  felt  that  my  flank  was  turned  by  this 
remark,  and  I  did  not  for  a  moment  under- 
stand how  I  was  to  escape  from  the  dilemma 
in  which  it  placed  me. 

"  If  it  does  not  make  them  good  of  what 
use  is  it  to  water  their  faces  ?  Would  it 
be  better  to  put  water  on  the  whole  body  ?  " 

I  replied,  remembering  one  of  the  answers 
in  the  Catechism,  that  to  baptize  him  would 
make  him  "  a  member  of  Christ,  a  child  of 
God,  and  an  inheritor  of  the  kingdom  of 
heaven."  Lamlam  could  not  understand,  nor 
iudeed  could  I,  but  I  tried  to  explain. 

"  A  member  of  Christ !  what  is  that  ?  " 

"  A  member  is  a  part,  a  limb ;  this  is  a 
member,"  holding  out  my  arm. 

*'  How  can  this  baby  become  an  arm  of 
Jesus  Christ  ?  Where  is  He  ?  And  how 
can  he  grow  on  to  Him  ?  " 

Here  again  I  was  puzzled,  so  I  put  o:ff  my 
little  wife  by  saying,  "  You  see,  Lamlam,  I 
am  ignorant  myself,  but  I  will  talk  to  the 
book,   and  find  out  what  it  says.     In  the 


192  Adventures  in  Neiv  Gtiiiica. 

meantime  we  will  call  our  little  baby  Philip, 
for  the  other  name  is  exceedingly  ugly." 

I  began  to  read  the  Bible,  to  learn  what  I 
could  about  baptism.  So  I  read  first  the 
words,  "Go  ye  out  into  all  the  world,  and 
preach  the  Gospel;"  "He  that  believeth 
and  is  baptized  shall  be  saved."  Philip  was 
not  old  enough  to  believe,  so  this  did  not 
seem  to  apply  to  him.  I  then  found  the 
words  of  Peter,  *'  Repent,  and  be  baptized 
every  one  of  you,  for  the  remission  of  sins." 
For  a  similar  reason  the  words  could  not 
apply  to  him.  While  I  was  thus  examining 
various  passages,  by  the  help  of  the  references 
in  the  Bible,  I  came  across  these  words, 
"  Your  bodies  are  the  members  of  Christ." 
These  were  the  very  words  of  the  Catechism ; 
so  I  read  them  eagerly,  and  turned  up  the 
other  places  to  which  the  verse  referred  me. 
"Ye  are  the  body  of  Christ;"  "The 
Church  which  is  His  body,"  and  here,  I 
thought  I  could  see  my  way.  So,  after  the 
lapse  of  several  days,  for  my  studies  took 
time,  I  said  again  to  Lamlam, — 

"  To  baptize  Philip  is  to  admit  him  into 
the  Church ;  he  will  after  he  is  baptized  be  a 
member  of  the  Church. 

"What  is  the  Church;  and  whereabouts 
is  it?  "  was  her  reply. 


Adventures  in  Neiu  Gtiinea,  193 

*'  Oh,  the  churcli  is  a  place  where  Christians 
meet  to  worship  God ;  where  the  minister 
preaches  and  prays." 

"  But  how  can  you  take  him  to  the  church  ? 
There  is  none  in  K'ootar." 

This  was  true,  and  again  I  was  perplexed. 
At  last  a  happy  thought  struck  me. 

"You  know,  Lamlam,  how  my  life  was 
saved  because  I  had  been  made  a  mason,  and 
was  able  to  give  the  sign  to  the  old  priest. 
^yell,  in  the  same  way,  if  Philip  is  bajDtized 
he  will  become  a  Christian ;  and  if  ever  he 
goes  among  the  white  men,  he  will  be 
received  as  a  Christian." 

"  Will  you  then  put  any  mark  on  him ;  or 
how  will  they  know  that  he  is  a  Christian  ?  " 

"  He  will  bo  able  to  tell  them,  and  that 
will  be  enough.  Everybody  will  be  glad  to 
see  him,  just  as  the  Orangwoks  were  glad  to 
see  me  when  I  became  an  Orangwok." 

I  felt  I  was  justified  in  exaggerating  a 
little  for  the  sake  of  the  end  to  be  obtained. 
So  at  last  Philip  was  baptized.  The  birth 
of  Philip  had  made  me  feel  very  serious,  as 
I  did  not  like  the  idea  of  his  being  brought 
up  a  heathen.  After  baptizing  him  I  felt 
very  much  easier  in  my  mind. 

Little  Philip  did  not  thrive  like  European 
children ;    he   remained    weak    and    sickly, 

o 


194         AdventtLres  in  Neiu  Guinea. 

inlieriting  his  mother's  constitution  as  well 
as  her  gentle  nature.  But  although  lie  often 
occasioned  us  much  uneasiness,  yet  lie 
brought  a  large  amount  of  happiness  into 
the  house,  for  he  was  treated  like  the  child 
of  civilized  parents.  He  sat  with  us  at 
table,  prattled  with  us,  and  Lamlam  was  very 
fond  of  him.  Indeed,  I  never  saw  a  European 
mother  more  devotedly  attached  to  her  white 
chubby  child,  than  was  she  to  her  little 
olive-coloured,  sickly  baby.  So  too  was  I. 
We  never  cared  to  let  him  out  of  our  sight, 
and  called  to  one  another  to  observe  all  his 
little  ways.  If  one  was  absent  when  he 
accomplished  any  feat  of  speech,  or  manner, 
or  movement,  all  was  duly  related  by  the  one 
who  had  witnessed  the  baby  marvel.  In 
this  way  our  household  was  in  striking  con- 
trast to  the  households  of  the  other  chiefs. 
Amongst  them  the  children  were  never,  or 
very  rarely  seen ;  they  were  kept  by  the 
slaves,  so  that  the  chief's  house  should  not 
be  disturbed,  and  the  chief's  wife  should  be 
free  to  attend  to  the  amusements  of  her 
people.  One  of  these  amusements  was  a 
remarkable  one.  The  chiefs  and  their  wives 
(young  women  woL'e  not  permitted  to  be 
present  until  they  were  married)  met  at  a 
large  room,  especially  built  for  the  purpose. 


Adventures  in  New  Guinea.         195 

and  on  all  being  assembled  (the  women  in  a 
disgustingly  nude  state,  having  on  only  some 
gold  ornaments)  a  chief,  dressed  in  all  the 
colours  of  the  rainbow,  with  a  long  wand  in 
one  hand,  entered  the  room,  holdino*  a 
number  of  light,  downy-looking  feathers  in 
the  other  hand.  These  he  distributed — one 
to  each  chief.  When  all  was  ready,  the 
signal  was  given  by  the  beating  of  drums 
and  the  playing  of  music ;  at  which  each 
chief  and  his  wife  started  down  or  across  the 
room,  blowing  this  feather  before  them.  It 
was  wonderful  to  see  the  agility  and  clever- 
ness that  was  displayed  in  keeping  this  piece 
of  down  in  the  air  ;  and  it  was  amusing  to 
see  the  whole  crowd  at  this  game,  men  and 
women  jumping,  bobbing,  blowing — en- 
deavouring to  keep  the  feather  up.  One  by 
one,  however,  the  crowd  would  retire  as  the 
feather  each  had  been  trying  to  keep  alive 
fell  to  the  ground,  those  who  thus  retired 
arranging  themselves  round  the  room,  to 
watch  the  efforts  of  those  who  remained  still 
on  the  floor.  At  last  a  solitary  pair  alone 
remained,  and  these  were  completely  ex- 
hausted; they,  however,  kept  up  with 
wonderful  spirits,  jumping  at  times  franti- 
cally, and  puffing  as  if  the  last  breath  of  life 
was  passing  from  them.  At  last  these  too 
0  2 


196        Adventures  in  New  Guinea. 

collapsed — utterly  done  up ;  and  sometimes, 
I  am  told,  the  women  were  very  ill  from  the 
exertions  made  on  such  occasions,  for  these 
amusements  (if  they  can  be  called  such)  were 
kept  up  for  hours.  The  thing  seemed  to 
me  to  be  foolish  enough  itself ;  and  when  it 
is  considered  that  it  was  very  frequently 
dangerous,  I  was  surprised  that  the  good 
sense  of  the  Orangwdks  had  not  discouraged 
the  silly  game.  After  being  at  one  of  these 
*'  shun-shun,"  and  witnessing  the  indecency 
of  the  costume,  and  violent  exertion  made 
by  those  taking  part  in  it,  I  refused  to  attend 
any  more,  although  by  this  refusal  I  believe 
I  made  several  enemies  who  afterwards 
became  very  bitter  towards  me. 


Adventures  in  New  Guinea*  197 


CHAPTER  XXII. 

And  now  it  miglit  be  supposed  my  lot  was 
cast  in  with  the  Orangw5ks,  that  I  should 
never  again  see  European  civilization,  and  so 
it  would  have  been,  had  not  a  serious 
calamity  befallen  me,  by  which  I  perforce 
escaped  from  captivity,  and  thus  am  able  to 
give  this  narrative  to  the  world.  Our  little 
boy  was  now  two  years  old,  but  was  not 
strong — far  otherwise,  he  was  exceedingly 
delicate,  and  I  fear  the  European  method  of 
training,  which  I  adopted  with  him,  was  not 
the  most  conducive  to  his  health — at  least 
such  are  my  thoughts  now.  The  reader  has 
anticipated  my  story.  The  child  who  was 
so  dear  to  us  was  taken  very  ill,  and  appeared 
to  be  sinking  rapidly.  Nothing  could  be 
done  to  save  him,  very  little  to  relieve  him, 
although  everything  that  the  most  devoted 
and  untiring  affection  could  suggest  and 
accomplish  was  done.  Still  the  little  sufferer 
sank  gradually  and  steadily,  until  I  had  to 


198  Adventures  in  New  Ginnea, 

confess  that  there  was  no  further  hope  of  his 
recovery  to  be  entertained.  As  he  was  two 
years  and  a  half  old,  and  exceedingly  in- 
telligent, he  understood  much  that  was  said 
and  done. 

"  Papa,  Philip's  head  is  hot ;  put  water  on 
it,  and  make  it  cool." 

"  Yes,  my  dear,  jovl  will  be  better  soon, 
please  God." 

"  Will  Jesus  make  Phil  well,  papa  ?" 

"  Yes,  dear,  He  will.  He  will  take  you 
to  heaven  to  be  with  Him  for  ever." 

"  But  will  you  and  mamma  be  there 
too.  I  don't  want  to  go  without  you 
both." 

"  No,  darling  Philip,"  burst  from  the  lips 
of  his  mother.  "  You  shan't  go  without 
us.  I  will  pray  to  Jesus  to  take  us  all 
together." 

"  There,  there,"  said  the  little  sufferer, 
*'  don't  cry,  Phil  will  be  better  soon,"  and  he 
threw  his  arms  round  the  neck  of  his  mother, 
with  great  tenderness. 

If  Christianity  brings  its  troubles,  it 
certainly  brings  its  joys.  If  it  enlarges  our 
capacities  of  suffering,  it  also  enlarges  our 
capacities  of  joy.  Little  Philip's  tenderness, 
so  unusual,  so  far  beyond  his  age,  greatly 
comforted    both    Lamlam    and    myself.      I 


ji dventiires  in  Neiv  Guinea.  199 

repeated  the  words,  quietly,  slowly,  and 
clearly,  "  Suffer  little  cliildren  to  come  unto 
Me,  for  of  such  is  the  kingdom  of  heaven." 
They  had  a  new  nieannigto  me  now.  Philip 
was  going  softly,  sweetly  to  the  wonderful 
speaker. 

"Yes,  papa,"  he  said  gently,  "I  am 
coming.  '  Of  such  is  the-  kingdom  of 
heaven.'  " 

He  had  learned  the  words  weeks  and 
weeks  before.  As  the  words  passed  from  his 
lips,  Philip  w^as  in  the  bosom  of  Jesus. 
Only  his  little  warm  body  remained  with  us, 
lying  upon  his  soft  bed. 

I  need  not  speak  of  my  wife's  grief,  nor  of 
my  own.  Our  love  for  our  child  was  much 
greater  than  that  felt  by  the  Orangwoks 
usually,  for  he  had  been  treated  as  a  part  of 
ourselves,  and  had  in  all  things  held  the 
foremost  place  in  our  thoughts, 

I  was  resolved  that  his  body  should  not 
be  burned,  according  to  the  custom  of  the 
country;  that  it  should  have  Christian 
burial ,  and  in  the  end  I  obtained  my  way. 
A  little  grave  was  dug  in  our  park,  and  early 
in  the  morning  his  body,  in  a  small  box  made 
under  my  directions,  was  carried  to  the 
grave,  and  lowered  into  the  hole,  as  I  read 
the  funeral  service  over  his  mortal  remains. 


200         Adventures  in  New  Guinea. 

Never  did  I  feel  how  beautiful  and  cousolint^ 
was  this  service  until  now.  It  assured  mc 
of  a  resurrection  to  eternal  life  at  His  ap- 
pearing, for  I  knew  that  my  Philip  slept  in 
Jesus. 

Lamlam  and  myself  now  redoubled  our 
interest  in  the  study  of  the  Bible.  I  longed 
to  obtain  all  the  comfort  it  contained  for 
myself.  I  was  equally  desirous  of  communi- 
cating it  to  my  wife. 

"  You  said,  Tregan,  that  our  Philip  will 
live  again  in  heaven  beyond  the  sun.  How 
can  he  get  up  there  ?  He  is  in  the  earth. 
"Will  God  send  an  angel  to  carry  him  up,  and 
if  so,  how  long  will  it  be  before  he  is  taken 
away  ?  " 

"You  do  not  quite  understand,  Lamlam. 
Philip's  soul  has  gone  to  heaven — that  which 
loved  his  papa  and  mamma — that  which 
spoke  to  us  through  his  soft  eyes,  and  gentle 
hands — iliat  was  Philip,  and  that  has  gone  to 
dwell  in  heaven  with  Jesus." 

"  But  will  not  his  body  be  in  heaven  too, 
his  beautiful  eyes,  his  nice  winning  ways. 
Will  not  these  be  in  heaven  ?  " 

"  Yes,  Lamlam,  yes.  On  the  day  of  the 
resurrection.  Let  me  read  to  you  how  Jesus 
rose  from  the  dead,  and  then  the  chapter 
contained  in  the  burial  service.'* 


Adventures  in  New  Guinea.         201 

I  read  and  explained  these,  as  slie  listened 
to  me  intently,  the  tears  rolling  down  her 
cheeks. 

A  few  days  after  this  conversation,  I 
picked  up  a  chrysalis,  and  knowing  some- 
thing of  the  wonderful  change  through  which 
it  passed  in  becoming  a  butterfly,  I  put  it 
away,  carefully  drawing  Lamlam's  attention 
to  it.  It  looked  like  a  dead  body,  she  said. 
After  the  lapse  of  some  weeks,  I  noticed 
that  the  change  was  at  hand,  and  directed 
Lamlam  again  to  consider  it  most  attentively. 
Carefully  stopping  up  every  means  of  egress 
in  the  room,  I  waited  the  result.  Next 
morning,  taking  my  wife  into  the  room,  I 
approached  the  spot  where  the  grub  had 
been  left.  The  shell  or  crust  was  there,  but 
nothing  else. 

"Alas!  it  is  nothing,"  she  cried.  "Will 
dear  little  Philip  be  like  this  ?  " 

"  No,  Lamlam,  like  this,"  I  said,  drawing 
her  attention  to  a  beautiful  butterfly  that 
was  now  fluttering  about  the  room. 

With  a  cry  of  surprise  and  joy,  she  grasped 
my  arm,  and  said, — 

"  Did  that  come  out  of  this  ugly  piece 
of  skin  ? "  pointing  to  the  outer  cover- 
ing. 

"  Yes,  and  in  the  same  way,  in  the  resurrec- 


202  Adveiihircs  in  N'ew  Guinea. 

tion,  our  little  Philip  shall  arise,  a  beautiful 
body,  out  of  that  weak,  suffering  body  whicli 
"svas  laid  in  the  grave.  '  SoY\ai  in  corruption, 
raised  in  incorruption ;  sown  in  weakness, 
raised  in  power.' " 

Her  mind  could  now  better  understand  the 
idea  of  the  resurrection,  and  she  derived 
great  comfort  from  this  illustration.  At  this 
time  she  proposed  that  we  should  ask  others 
to  join  us  in  reading  our  Bible.  To  this  I 
consented,  and  accordingly  Kayhar,  Lanna, 
the  old  priest  Wannoota,  with  the  wives  of 
the  former  two,  were  asked  to  join  us. 
They  came  very  gladly,  especially  Kayhar 
and  Lanna.  The  latter  was  a  very  thought- 
ful and  religious  kind  of  man,  and  had 
reflected  much  on  our  previous  conversation. 
After  reading  a  portion  of  the  Gospel  of  St. 
Matthew,  I  translated  it,  as  well  as  I  could, 
into  Orangwok.  I  found  my  auditors  deeply 
interested,  especially  with  the  account  of  the 
crucifixion — most  of  them  were  in  tears  at 
this.  It  had  never  occurred  to  me  to  read 
this  before.  Again  and  again  I  was  asked  to 
read  it,  and  on  every  occasion  I  found  a 
similar  result.  I  could  not  here  help  the 
feeling,  that  our  familiarity  with  these  Bible 
stories  probably  robs    them    of   their  great 


Adventures  in  New  Guinea.         203 

charm.  At  any  rate,  I  can  testify  that  the 
Orangwoks  were  penetrated  with  lively 
emotions  of  sorrow  as  I  read,  and  that  they 
seemed  to  become  better  people,  after  hearinp^ 
what  they  did.  I  cannot  say  this  of  all  of 
those  who  were  present.  The  priest  was  not 
I  think  affected  by  what  he  heard,  but  he  was 
interested.  Many  others  came,  until  my  room 
was  sometimes  full  of  listeners.  Lanna  suo:- 
gested  that  as  so  many  were  interested  in  these 
readings,  it  would  be  a  good  plan  to  write 
them  out,  and  teach  the  Orangwoks  to  read 
them.  I  felt  under  some  constraint  to  do 
this,  for  I  now  began  to  feel  my  responsibility 
as  a  Christian  towards  these  poor  heathens. 
My  dear  little  wife  helped  me  much,  so  too 
did  Lanna,  who  was  an  apt  scholar,  and  in 
one  year  great  progress  was  made,  in  both 
teaching  them  to  read,  and  in  writing  the 
stories  of  the  Gospels  on  paper.  It  must 
not  be  supposed  from  this  that  a  great  deal 
was  done.  All  that  I  mean  is  this  ;  some 
ten  or  twelve  people  learned  to  read  a  few 
words,  and  were  able  to  make  out  two  or 
three  stories,  copied  out  of  Christ's  Parables. 
But  as  they  did  not  all  have  the  same  stories, 
the  whole  that  was  being  read  amounted  to 
a  considerable  quantity,  as  much  as  seven  or 


204         Adventures  in  New  Guinea. 

eight  cliapters  altogether.  During  this  year 
I  was  happy,  so  too  was  Lamlam ;  although 
we  never  forgot  our  great  loss,  yet  in  doing 
what  we  could  to  teach  others  about  God, 
we  were  consoled. 


Adventures  in  New  Gumea,         205 


CHAPTEE  XXIIT. 

I  CONTEMPLATED  the  results  of  our  religious 
teaching  with  satisfaction,  and  felt  that  now 
I  was  doing  something  that  justified  me  in 
calling  myself  a  Christian.  My  thoughts 
frequently  reverted  to  dear  Miss  Cunning- 
ham, and  I  wondered  whether  she,  from  her 
heavenly  home,  looked  down  upon  me  and 
Lamlam.  If  so,  I  knew  she  looked  with 
approval,  and  rejoiced  that  her  lessons  had 
not  been  entirely  thrown  away  upon  me. 

On  my  saying  this  to  my  wife,  to  whom 
the  whole  of .  my  history  was  known,  she 
asked, —  .  .. 

**  Do  you  think  she  can  see  us  here  in 
Tannavorkoo  ?  "  | 

*'  Yes,  Lamlam,  I  do.     She  can  look  down  , 
from  heaven  to  any  part  of  the  world."  ^ 

"  And  do  you  think  she  loves  me,  as  well 
as  you,  Tregan  ?  " 

*'  Yes,  indeed,  for  she  was  as  gentle  and 
kind  as  Lamlam  herself." 


2o6         Adventures  in  New  Guinea 

"  Then  she  will  love  dear  little  Philip,  and 
will  take  care  of  him  until  we  go  up  to  him." 

"  Jesus  will  take  care  of  him.  He  has 
said,  '  Suffer  little  children  to  come  unto 
Me.' " 

"Yes,  but  Jesus  cannot  nurse  all  the 
babies  Himself.  See  what  a  lot  of  babies 
die  even  in  K'ootar.  He  will  want  nurses 
for  them  all,  and  He  can  give  our  Philip  to 
your  friend.  I  am  sure,  from  what  you  have 
told  me,  that  she  will  be  very  kind  to  Philip  ; 
and  now  I  feel  quite  happy  about  him. 
Sometimes  I  have  felt  sad,  thinking  of  him 
wandering  through  the  vast  heaven  without 
a  mother  to  look  after  him;  and  although 
Jesus  and  the  angels  are  kind,  yet  they  could 
not  be  to  him  as  a  mother.  But  your  friend 
could,  and  she  would  be  one  to  him,  for  she 
loved  you." 

Lamlam  did  not  say  all  this  at  one  breath. 
She  took  some  time  to  say  it,  and  this  was 
the  sense  of  all  she  said. 

She  had  never  been  strong,  even  when  I 
first  knew  her,  eight  years  ago,  and  latterly, 
particularly  since  little  Philip's  death,  she 
had  become  weaker.  I  regarded  her  at 
times  with  an  anxious  heart,  and  at  last 
acknowledged  to  myself  that  she  had  some 
chest  disease.     In  the  winter  a  violent  cold 


Adventures  in  Nciu  Guinea,         207 

settled  on  her  lungs,  and  sbe  was  not  able  to 
shake  it  off.  It  clung  to  her  right  through 
the  winter,  until  she  was  confined  entirely  to 
her  own  room.  For  some  time  before  this, 
however,  at  her  request,  I  had — once  a  week 
at  least — read  some  portion  of  the  Service  in 
the  Prayer  Book  for  public  worship. 

*'  You  said,  Tregan,  that  Christians  in 
your  country  meet  together  to  worship  God. 
In  what  way  do  they  worship  Him  ?  " 

I  explained,  and  read  the  Service  to  her. 
It  was  after  this  that  she  suggested  that  we 
should  join  in  similar  acts  of  worship,  and 
invite  her  father  and  mother,  with  Lanna 
and  his  wife,  to  join  us.  All  this  was  done, 
and  I  never  before  so  thoroughly  enjoyed  the 
public  prayers  of  our  Church. 

Lanna  and  Kayhar  enjoyed  them  also,  and 
even  Lamlam's  mother,  a  hard,  cold  woman, 
seemed  stirred  by  these  acts  of  worship. 

Lamlam  herself  seemed  wrapt  in  a  de- 
votional state  of  mind  and  heart.  After 
several  of  these  acts  of  worship  had  been 
held,  she  said  to  me, — 

"  I  begin  now,  Tregan,  to  understand 
something  about  the  happiness  of  heaven. 
It  was  all  a  mystery.  Now  I  can  feel  what 
it  is  to  speak  to  God  in  prayer  with  others. 
The  presence   of  others  speaking  the   same 


2o8         Adventures  in  New  Guinea. 

words  lielps  me  to  pray  more  warmly.  1  am 
so  thankful  that  God  sent  you  here,  Tregan. 
I  never  should  have  known  Him  if  you  had 
not  come.  I  should  have  lived  and  died  a 
heathen — should  have  had  no  little  Philip, 
no  Tregan  to  love,  no  Jesus  to  rejoice  in,  no 
heaven  to  hope  for.  I  am  so  thankful  that 
you  came,"  she  said,  throwing  her  arms  round 
me. 

She  gradually  became  weaker.  There  was 
no  doubt  in  my  mind  that  she  was  dying.  I 
could  not  contemplate  such  a  result  with 
calmness.  I  redoubled  all  my  attentions, 
and  read  to  her  assiduously ;  I  even  prayed  for 
her  in  my  own  words.  Yet  the  end  came  on, 
and  came  quickly  at  the  last.  After  she  was 
confined  to  her  room,  and  latterly  to  her  bed, 
her  mother  was  constantly  with  her.  Lamlam 
spoke  to  her,  and  told  her  all  she  had  learned 
from  the  Gospels — said  that  she  could  now 
die  in  peace  and  happiness. 

The  conversations  made  a  very  serious 
impression  on  her  mother,  and  I  have  reason 
to  believe  they  led  her  to  take  greater  interest 
in  the  stories  and  teaching  of  the  Gospel. 
Poor  old  woman,  she  was  really  attached  to 
her  daughter  in  her  own  way,  and  was  over- 
whelmed with  grief  at  the  prospect  of  her 
death.     Lamlam' s  father  was  most  tenderly 


Adventures  in  New  Guinea.         209 

attaclied  to  lier,  and  was  continually  witli  her 
whenever  his  duties  permitted. 

At  last  the  end  came.  She  held  her  last 
conversation  with  me  — too  sacred  to  be  writ- 
ten here,  except  a  few  words  of  it. 

"  Will  your  friend  be  glad  to  see  me, 
Tregan,  in  heaven  ?  " 

"  Yes,  dear,  very  glad ;  so  too  will  little 
Philip.  But,  above  all,  the  Lord  Jesus  will 
be  glad  that  you  have  gone  to  His  beautiful 
house." 

"  Will  it  be  long  before  you  come,  Tregan 
— many  years,  or  will  you  come  soon  ?  " 

*'  That  is  as  God  wills,  Lamlam.  I  am 
willing  to  go  now  if  He  wishes  it." 

"  Come  to  me  soon.  I  will  talk  to  Philip 
about  you,  so  that  he  shall  not  forget  you, 
for  he  will  soon  be  big,  you  know.  We  will 
keep  a  place  by  our  side,  and  wait  for  you. 
When  you  come,  will  you  love  your  friend,  or 
PhiHp  and  Lamlam  most  ?  " 

"You  and  little  Philip,  dear,  be  sure  of 
that." 

"  Farewell  to  Tregan.  '  Come  unto  Me, 
all  that  travail,  and  are  heavy  laden ;  I  will 
give  you  rest.'  '  In  My  Father's  house  are 
many  mansions.'  *  I  am  the  way,'  "  and  in 
murmuring  these  words,  dear  Lamlam  passed 
from  earth  to  heaven.     She  was  dead. 


2  lo         Adventures  in  New  Guinea, 

I  never  knew  till  tbat  moment  how  much 
sorrow  the  human  heart  could  bear.  I  did 
not  think  I  could  have  loved  any  human  being 
so  tenderly,  so  completely,  and  I  was  utterly 
prostrated  by  the  blow.  So  too  was  her 
father. 

We  laid  her  in  the  same  grave  as  dear 
little  Philip.  The  one  grave  contained  all 
that  had  been  dear  to  me,  and  all  that  had 
brightened  my  life  in  K'ootar.  Now  I  did 
not  care  to  remain  any  longer,  except  that  I 
was  unwilling  to  leave  the  dust  of  those  who 
were  so  dear  to  me.  I  put  up  a  cross  over 
their  heads,  and  engraved  upon  it  their 
names,  both  in  Orangwok  and  in  English. 

One  of  these  days  some  English  missionary 
may  find  this  symbol  of  Christianity  amid 
the  Tannavorkoo  mountains,  and  will  then 
know  that  some  Christian  man  has  already 
been  before  him,  and  that  some  Christian 
souls  have  passed  away  in  K'ootar. 


Adventures  in  New  Guinea.         211 


CHAPTER  XXIV. 

Lamlam  had  fallen  a  victim  partly  to  her 
own  natural  weakness  of  constitution,  partly 
to  a  serious  epidemic  which  was  attacking 
many  of  the  Orangwoks — a  chest  affection 
beginning  in  an  attack  of  the  bronchial 
tubes,  ending  in  congestion  of  the  lungs, 
which  carried  off  numbers  of  persons.  Such 
a  visitation  had  never  been  experienced 
before.  It  awakened  the  gravest  considera- 
tion, which  led  to  some  results  of  a  serious 
nature  to  myself.  A  meeting  of  the  uoo  was 
convened  to  deliberate  upon  the  anger  of 
Otaroo,  who  was  hiding  his  face  in  a  most 
unusual  way.  All  that  happened  at  this 
council  I  shall  never  know,  except  that  some 
serious  charge  was  then  made  against  myself 
and  the  religion  which  I  professed.  Lanna 
afterwards  told  me  that  "Wannoota  attended 
— he  was  a  member  of  the  iioo,  and  as  priest 
of  Otaroo  declared  that  his  blessing  would  be 
withheld — that  the  seed  should  not  germi- 
P  2 


2  12         Adventures  in  New  Guinea, 

nate,  nor  the  flower  bloom,  nor  tlie  peoplo 
rejoice  in  health  until  his  rival  was  driven 
from  K'ootar.  The  priest  declared  that 
another  god  than  Otaroo  was  worshipped, 
that  Otaroo  was  deprived  of  his  dues,  and 
that  ho  had  borne  this  with  long-suffering 
for  three  years,  trusting  that  his  children 
would  turn  again  to  him.  As  they  had  not 
done  so,  but  had  continued  in  their  apostasy 
from  him,  Otaroo  had  at  last  sent  his  plagues 
upon  them.  This  sickness  was  the  hand  of 
Otaroo. 

"  AVhere  is  there  another  God  ?  "  exclaimed 
the  gruff  voice  of  a  counsellor.  "  Who  in 
K'ootar  worships  any  other  god  than  the 
great  Otaroo  ?  " 

"  There  is  one,"  replied  the  priest,  "who  is 
the  priest  of  another  god.  One  who  came 
among  us  from  the  Kahshir  in  the  form  of  a 
white  man,  but  who  is  really  only  a  Kahshir 
disguised.  Tregan  is  that  priest,"  said  Wan- 
noota,  with  boldness  in  his  tones.  "  And 
Otaroo  has  smitten  him  by  killing  both  wife 
and  child." 

A  great  sob  came  from  one  corner  of  the 
darkened  council-chamber  at  the  allusion  to 
Lamlam  and  Philip.  Thus  much  was  told 
me  by  Lanna,  who  had  gathered  this  from 
his  father-in-law,  who  was  one  of  the  uoo 


Adventures  in  New  Guinea,         213 

In  vain  did  old  Kayliar,  and  one  or  two  of 
my  friends,  attempt  to  stay  the  torrent  of 
superstitious  feeling  that  had  been  aroused 
by  the  crafty  old  priest.  And,  after  much 
deliberation,  a  course  was  decided  upon  with 
reference  to  myself,  which  was  at  once  to  be 
carried  into  effect.  All  had  been  in  readi- 
ness, for  Wannoota  knew  that  I  had  many 
friends  in  the  council.  Of  what  was  going 
on  I  had  not  even  a  suspicion.  Overwhelmed 
with  sorrow  as  I  was  by  the  loss  of  my  dear 
wife,  I  took  no  note  of  the  ominous  talk 
of  Otaroo's  anger.  On  the  afternoon  of 
the  council,  I  was  busy  arranging  the 
grave  which  marked  the  spot  where  the 
bodies  of  my  wife  and  child  lay.  I  wished 
to  make  it  look  as  much  like  a  Christian 
grave  as  I  could,  and  had  planted  numerous 
seeds,  together  with  a  seedling  tree  of  the 
cypress  kind.  Here  I  was  engaged,  several 
slaves  assisting  me,  when  an  officer  of  the 
troops  approaching  me,  said  he  had  a  com- 
munication for  me  from  the  uoo.  I  im- 
mediately invited  him  to  my  house.  On 
entering,  I  found  myself  in  the  presence  of 
half  a  dozen  well-armed  Orangwoks.  I  was 
their  prisoner.  I  was  not  told  the  reason  or 
cause  of  my  arrest.  I  was  simply  told  that 
I  was  a  prisoner,  and  that  if  I  attempted  to 


2  14         Adventures  in  A^ew  Ginnea. 

escape,  my  death  would  bo  the  penalty.  At 
once  I  was  conveyed  to  the  prison — a  large 
safely-built  place  surrounded  b}^ guards.  Here 
I  was  kept  for  several  days,  no  friends  being 
permitted  to  see  me,  or  communicate  with 
me.  I  did  not  care  much  for  life — a  little 
while  before  I  should  have  hailed  death  as  a 
deliverer.  Still,  I  desired  to  live,  and  was 
anxious  to  ascertain  what  it  was  intended  to 
do  with  me. 

I  could  obtain  no  information  from  any 
one.  The  old  priest  visited  me,  professing 
to  be  my  friend.  He  exhorted  me  to  pray  to 
my  God  for  deliverance,  but  gave  me  no  hint, 
either  as  to  the  crime  with  which  I  was 
charged,  nor  as  to  ray  intended  fate.  Indeed 
he  professed  to  know  nothing.  The  only 
comfort  I  was  permitted  to  have  was  the 
luxury  of  a  bath,  which  I  took  regularly. 
To  my  surprise,  on  the  third  day  of  my  con- 
finement, I  found  the  colouring-matter  with 
which  I  had  been  stained,  coming  off  my 
skin.  I  was  as  white  as  of  old.  As  I  looked 
upon  my  skin  returning  to  its  natural  colour, 
I  thought,  can  all  this  about  Tannavorkoo  and 
K'ootar  be  a  dream.  Am  I  really  among 
civilized  people,  having  been  only  dreaming 
of  the  Orangwoks  and  their  customs  ?  The 
face  of    the   old   priest   dispelled  any   such 


Adventures  in  New  Gtunea.         215 

fancy.  For  there  he  was,  witness  to  my 
change  of  colour.  He  started  when  he  saw 
me,  and  professed  surprise. 

"  Otaroo  is  angry,  Tregan  ;  what  have  you 
done  ?  He  has  withdrawn  his  favour  from 
you.  You  are  lost,"  and  immediately  went 
out. 

I  did  not  like  the  look  on  Wannoota's  face. 
The  same  evening  I  was  taken  before  the  uoo. 
I  had  frequently  heard  of  this  council,  and 
knew  that  it  was  all-powerful, — that  from  its 
decision  there  was  no  appeal.  So  I  did  not 
go  without  trepidation.  Yet  I  knew  I  had 
friends  in  that  council,  and  this  thought 
encouraged  me.  On  entering  a  large  bare 
room,  I  was  blindfolded,  and  then,  led  by  the 
hand  of  one  of  my  guards,  I  felt  that  I  was 
being  taken  down  some  steps.  On  reaching 
a  kind  of  landing,  another  hand  was  laid 
upon  me,  and  the  thought  flashed  through 
my  mind  that  they  were  going  to  assassinate 
me.  As  I  had  never  heard  of  an  instance  of 
assassination  in  all  my  stay  in  K'ootar,  I  put 
the  thought  from  me,  and  yet  the  recollection 
of  the  mysterious  fate  of  Lakangeoo  (the  old 
priest)  produced  in  me  a  vague  fear  which 
was  exceedingly  unpleasant.  The  hand  of 
the  first  guard  was  withdrawn  from  me,  and 
I  heard  footsteps    ascending,  as  if  he    was 


2i6         Adventures  in  New  Guinea, 

returning.  My  new  conductor  led  me  down 
still  farther,  and  again  I  was  transferred 
to  another  guide  or  conductor.  After  several 
such  changes  had  been  made,  without  a  word 
being  spoken  on  the  part  of  any  one,  I  felt 
that  I  had  reached  a  room  where  several 
persons  w^ere  gathered  together.  Here  my 
eyes  were  unbandaged,  but  I  couia  see 
nothing.  I  wondered,  have  I  been  blinded  ? 
has  my  sight  been  destroyed  ?  and  exercised 
my  eyes  to  discover  what  was  the  matter 
with  me.  I  could  discover  nothing.  On 
reflecting  that  my  sight  could  not  be 
destroyed  without  my  being  conscious  of 
great  pain,  I  came  to  the  conclusion  that  I 
must  be  in  a  darkened  chamber,  and  sus- 
pected that  I  was  in  the  council-room  of  the 
ii65.  I  now  heard  voices  subdued,  as  if 
coming  from  a  distance,  but  could  hear 
nothing  distinctly.  As  I  thus  stood  in 
suspense,  surrounded  by  a  darkness  that 
might  almost  be  felt,  hearing  the  gentle 
breathing  of  others  around  me,  feeling  ex- 
ceedingly nervous,  a  sudden  movement  in 
front  occurred  and  a  slight  wind  brushed 
past  me.  A  hand  again  took  hold  of  me, 
and  I  was  led  on.  A  few  more  steps,  and  I 
felt  myself  in  the  presence  of  the  1106.  A 
hand  touched  mine  in  the  dark,  and  pressing 


Adventures  in  New  Guinea.  217 

it  assured  me  of  the  presence  of  a  friend. 
At  this  I  took  heart,  and  stood  silently- 
waiting  the  end.  No  one  who  has  not  been 
in  it,  can  realize  the  solemn,  fearful  nature 
of  such  a  position.  Palpable  darkness,  dead 
silence,  as  if  one  was  in  a  vast  soliiude, 
broken  only  by  the  strange  sounds  which 
warned  one  that  there  were  other  spirits 
present  besides  oneself.  At  last  this  fearful 
silence  was  broken  by  the  voice  of  one  of 
the  iioo — that  of  the  president  or  principal 
chief. 

"  Tregan,  you  are  summoned  before  a 
council  of  Hotarwokoo  iioo,  accused  of  bring- 
ing upon  the  kingdom  of  K'ootar  the  anger 
of  Otaroo  by  the  introduction  of  another 
God.  You  are  permitted  to  reply  to  this 
charge." 

All  the  danger  of  my  position  rushed  into 
my  mind  as  the  chief  spoke — the  treachery 
of  the  priest,  the  epidemic  that  had  visited 
the  people,  the  death  of  my  wife  and  child, 
the  cruelty  of  heathenism.  What  could  I 
reply  ?  In  a  moment  of  enthusiasm  and 
recklessness,  I  replied, — 

*'  That  I  do  not  worship  Otaroo  is  true. 
I  have  never  concealed  the  fact.  I  have,  as  a 
white  man,  been  taught  to  worship  another 
God — the  God  who  made  heaven  and  earth. 


2i8         Adventures  in  Neiu  Guinea. 

the  sun,  the  moon  and  stars.  I  do  not 
believe  that  Otaroo  is  angry  in  consequence 
of  this.  It  is  mere  superstition  to  think  so. 
Let  those  who  know  what  I  have  read  to 
them  from  my  sacred  book  say  whether  my 
religion  is  not  good.  If  it  is,  Otaroo  cannot 
be  angry  with  it." 

I  ceased,  and  the  silence  which  followed 
could  be  felt. 

"  Is  it  not  true  that  your  sacred  leaf  says, 
*  Whoso  sheddeth  slave's  blood,  shall  be 
hung  in  a  tree  by  the  gods  to  rot  ?  '  " 
'  It  was  the  voice  of  the  priest  who  spoke, 
remembering  the  words  I  had  quoted  in 
order  to  save  the  life  of  the  slave,  on  the 
occasion  of  my  marriage. 

I  replied, — 

"  Yes,  these  words  are  in  my  sacred  leaf, 
and  they  are  true.  My  God  does  not  allow 
man's  blood  to  be  shed.  He  is  angry  when 
it  is  done." 

Again  the  voice  of  Wannoota, — 

"  Otaroo  has  commanded  that  slaves  shall 
be  sacrificed.  It  is  his  due.  We  are  all  his. 
Your  God  forbids  such  sacrifice.  He  is  then 
contrary  to  Otaroo — which  is  the  stronger  ?  " 

"  The  God  which  I  serve  is  the  greater,  for 
He  made  Otaroo  and  all  things." 

Again  the  priest  replied, — 


THE    TRIAL. 


Page  219. 


Adventures  in  Nezv  Guinea.         2 1 9 

*<  Tregan  was  made  an  Orangwok,  and 
became  sun-coloured.  Otaroo  gave  him  a 
wife  from  the  Orangwok  chiefs.  Otaroo 
gave  him  a  son.  All  was  well,  but  Tregan 
went  in  his  heart  back  to  his  own  God  ;  then 
Otaroo  took  from  him  his  son,  to  warn 
Tregan  that  he  must  return.  But  Tregan 
continued  to  seek  for  other  gods,  and  invited 
many  Orangwoks  to  join  him  in  his  search. 
Again  Otaroo  turned  away  his  face,  and 
Lamlam,  the  daughter  of  a  chieftain,  of  an 
U.65  died.  Otaroo  continues  angry,  and 
K'ootar  will  not  see  his  face  until  this  enemy 
is  destroyed.  Otaroo  gave  Tregan  the  colour 
of  the  sun.  He  has  now  taken  it  away. 
Tregan  is  no  longer  an  Orangwok.  His  skin 
is  white  like  his  heart." 

After  a  moment's  silence  he  continued, — 

"Judge,  0  wise  men,  of  the  anger  of 
Otaroo  when  he  has  restored  Tregan  to  his 
original  colour." 

At  this  instant  a  bright  flash  of  light  lit  up 
the  vast  room,  and  the  long  robe  in  which  I 
had  been  enveloped — head,  face,  and  body — 
fell  from  me  to  the  ground.  I  stood  before 
the  assembly  of  chiefs  white  as  I  was  ori- 
ginally. The  darkness  returned  again  in  a 
moment,  and  the  priest  repeated, — 

"  Judge,  O   counsellors   of   Hotarw5koo ; 


2  20         Adventures  in  Neiu  Guinea. 

judge,  0  worshippers  of  Otaroo.  See  tlie 
evidence  of  his  anger.     Judge  wisely." 

The  flash  of  light  had  revealed  a  room  filled 
with  dusk}'-  counsellors.  Among  them  were 
Kayhar  and  Lanna's  father-in-law.  These 
were  the  only  two  that  I  could  be  assured 
were  my  friends.  I  could  say  nothing  further. 
I  could  not  explain  how  I  had  become  white. 
I  did  not  even  suspect  at  that  moment  that 
the  change  was  occasioned  by  the  water  of  my 
bath,  which  had  been  prepared  to  bring  about 
this  result.  I  am  sure  now  that  such  was  the 
fact.  I  did  not  even  suspect  it  while  I  stood 
before  the  council. 

The  fact  of  my  having  been  restored  to  my 
original  colour  made  a  great  effect  upon  the 
iloo;  nothing  could  resist  the  force  of  this 
evidence. 

After  I  had  been  reconducted  to  my  prison, 
the  uo5  proceeded  to  deliberate  upon  the  pun- 
ishment I  should  receive.  The  priest  Wan- 
noota  insisted  that  I  should  be  put  to  death, 
to  pacify  the  wrath  of  Otaroo  ;  and  his 
arguments  for  a  while  prevailed.  But  Kayhar 
and  Lanna's  father-in-law  resisted  this  deter- 
mination, and  were  ably  supported  by  the  old 
warrior  who  had  fought  with  me  against  the 
Tokshis.  To  me,  he  said,  the  king  owed  the 
preservation  of  AVatara.  As  I  was  well  known, 


Adventures  in  New  Guinea.         221 

tlicre  was  an  evident  unwillingness  to  put  me 
to  death.  Yet  such  would  have  been  my  fate, 
jDrobably,  had  not  my  friends  resorted  to  a 
stratagem.  Kayhar  said,  that  if  I  was  a 
priest  of  another  god  it  would  not  be  wise  to 
provoke  this  god  to  anger  by  killing  me,  that 
although  Otaroo  was  great,  yet,  that  as 
powerful  kings  were  sometimes  overcome  by 
weaker  ones  through  adverse  circumstances, 
so  the  God  of  Tregan  might,  by  some  chance, 
prove  himself  a  match  for  Otaroo.  Kayhar 
would  therefore  advise  that  I  should  be 
restored  to  my  own  God  beyond  the  sea,  and 
so  the  kingdom  be  ridden  of  any  further 
danger  from  the  introduction  of  new  gods. 

In  this  defence  Kayhar  dissembled  his  real 
feelings  and  opinions,  and  gave  the  advice 
which  I  have  related  from  a  desire  to  save 
my  life,  which  he  saw  was  in  imminent 
danger  of  being  sacrificed.  This  speech  of 
his  produced  a  profound  impression,  and  at 
last  a  conclusion,  recommending  the  king  to 
expel  me  from  his  kingdom,  was  agreed  to, 
Wannoota  having  to  be  content  with  this. 


2  22  Adventures  in  New  Guinea. 


CHAPTER  XXV. 

The  first  intimation  I  received  of  tlie  decision 
of  the  "tioo  was  from  Kayliar  tlie  same  even- 
ing. He  came  to  me  in  my  prison,  bringing 
authority  for  my  release,  as  he  had  made 
himself  responsible  for  my  safe  keeping. 

"  Your  life  is  safe,  Tregan,  but  you  must 
leave  the  kingdom  of  K'ootar.  This  was  the 
only  leniency  that  your  friends  could  procure 
for  you." 

And  then  he  proceeded  to  tell  me  all  that 
I  have  narrated,  in  the  previous  chapter,  of 
the  deliberation  of  the  iioo. 

"  I  am  thankful  we  were  able  to  protect 
your  life.  I  regret  that  we  could  not  keep 
you  with  us.  We  shall,  however,  never  for- 
get you,  nor  shall  we  forget  all  that  we  have 
read  in  the  *  white  leaf.'  We  shall  keep  those 
stories  and  learn  them  by  heart,  remembering 
that  Tregan  brought  them  to  us." 

By  this  time  we  had  reached  Kayhar's 
house,  and  on  my  entering  I  was  overcome 
by  my  recollections  of  the  past,  for  I  saw,  as 


Adventures  in  New  Gumea.  223 

if  it  was  only  yesterday,  little  Lamlam  coming 
again  to  learn  from  me  ;  to  take  her  farewell 
when  I  started  for  Watara.  I  saw  again  all 
her  gentle,  winning  ways,  and  was  thoroughly 
cast  down.  I  should  never  see  her  again, 
nor  should  I  again  look  upon  these  scenes  of 
her  past  life.  In  a  few  hours  they  would  be 
gone  for  ever.  Such  thoughts  tended  to  make 
me  very  sad,  and  I  fear  I  was  not  much  of  a 
companion  for  Kayhar.  Later  in  the  evening 
Lanna  came  in  to  see  me  and  to  welcome  me 
on  my  escape  from  the  toils  of  the  old  priest 
Wannoota.  He  had,  through  Kayhar's  in- 
fluence, been  appointed  to. escort  .me  to  the 
boundary  of  the  kingdom.  Ofthis  I  was 
exceedingly  glad.  We  were  to  start  at  sun- 
rise next  morning,  as  it  was  considered 
desirable  by  my  friends  to  get  me  away 
before  any  change  could  be  brought  about  in 
the  minds  of  the  members  of  the  "iioo.  I 
retired  that  night,  but  not  to  sleep,  for  I  was 
too  excited  to  repose  myself,  I  made  every 
preparation  for  my  departure  before  lying 
down.  I  had  only  one  purpose  to  fulfil 
before  leaving  K'ootar  for  ever.  Before  the 
sun  rose  I  was  at  my  post  to  execute  my 
purpose  ;  to  make  a  sketch  of  dear  Lamlam's 
and  Philip's  grave,  I  knew  the  sketch  would 
be  very  rough  and  hurried,  but  it  would  serv^ 


2  24  Adventures  tJt  New  Guinea. 

as  a  memento  of  that  wliich  was  dear  to  me. 
As  I  sketched  the  silent  heap,  with  its  small 
white  cross,  looking  so  still  and  solemn  in  tho 
early  light,  I  saw  the  rays  of  the  sun  tinting 
the  snow-topped  peaks  of  Tannavorkoo,  As 
I  watched,  fascinated  by  its  golden  glories — 
for  I  had  not  seen  the  sun  for  some  weeks — 
I  endeavoured  to  express  what  I  saw  on  my 
sketch.  The  light  stole  downward  rapidly, 
and,  sweeping  along  the  plains,  touched  the 
tree-tops  in  my  park,  and  flooding  them  from 
branch  to  root,  lighted  up  the  little  grave  and 
its  white  cross.  It  was  the  light  of  another 
morning  brightening  upon  me.  I  wish  to 
keep  those  sensations  for  ever.  I  was  aroused 
from  my  reverie  by  the  voice  of  a  slave,  tell- 
ing me  that  Lanna  was  waiting  for  me. 
After  a  long,  painful,  and  eternal  farewell 
with  Kayhar  and  his  wife,  the  parents  of 
Lamlam,  I  passed  from  K'ootar  for  ever. 
For  a  time  we  were  all  silent ;  every  mind  was 
filled  with  sorrowful  reflections,  but  after  the 
first  few  miles  were  past,  and  the  cool  fresh 
air  had  invigorated  us,  we  began  to  talk. 

"  Your  coming  has  been  good  for  us, 
Tregan,"  said  Lanna ;  "  I  am  sorrowful  at 
your  departure." 

"  Just  think,  Lanna,  that  I  was  killed  in 
battle,  and  you  will  be   able  to  think  more 


Adventures  in  New  Guinea.         225 

complacently  about  my  going  away.  1  shall 
be  just  as  if  I  was  dead  to  yon." 

"  If  you  had  been  killed  in  battle  I  should 
not  have  cared  so  much,  but  you  have  been 
betrayed  by  Wannoota,  who  hates  you,  and 
many  of  the  chiefs  have  joined  in  his  act 
because  they  are  envious  of  you.  They  want 
to  get  rid  of  you.  They  do  not  believe  old 
"Wannoota' s  fable  about  Otaroo  any  more 
than  I  do.  It  suits  them  to  accept  the 
priest's  view  of  these  things." 

"  I  am  glad  that  they  do  not  believe  in 
Otaroo,  they  may  thus  come  to  accept  a 
better  religion.'* 

"  I  do  not  mean  that  they  do  not  believe  in 
Otaroo.  I  mean  that  they  have  no  fear  of  his 
anger.  They  know  that  all  things  would  go 
on  in  very  much  the  same  way  as  at  present, 
whether  we  worship  him  or  not.  However, 
I  shall  never  worship  him  again,  Tregan. 
I  shall  always  worship  Jesus,  for  after 
Lamlam's  death  I  saw  what  belief  in  Him 
could  do.  It  is  my  firm  intention  to  adhero 
to  Him  as  my  God,  and  to  learn  His  words.'* 

AVe  had  now  reached  the  descent  to  the  first 
plateau.  Before  descending  into  it,  we  caught 
a  glimpse  of  the  lower  plain,  and  saw  tho 
waters  of  the  lake  (Lake  Ambd)  lying  far 
away  on  our  left. 

Q 


2  26         AdveJiiures  tn  Ncw  Guinea, 

The  scene  was  like  a  fairy  scene — soft  and 
graceful  in  tlie  spring  light.  On  our  right 
lay  the  plateau,  with  its  large  town  and 
numerous  homesteads,  well  watered,  and 
showing  already  signs  of  rich  vegetation. 
But  I  need  not  repeat — I  need  not  linger.  I 
could  not  fail  to  recall  the  impressions  made 
upon  me  nine  years  ago,  as  I  was  carried 
upward  to  the  mysteries  of  the  mountain 
kingdom.  I  wondered  too,  if  I  should  ever 
return  again  to  civilization  and  to  France.  I 
resolved  to  spare  no  efforts  to  escape  to 
Australia,  and  I  planned  at  this  time  a 
device,  which  I  afterwards  carried  out,  to  get 
away  from  the  Rahshes,  or  coast  tribe.  On 
the  second  day  the  boundary  rampart  was 
reached.  We  stayed  at  the  first  posting- 
house  for  the  night.  In  the  morning  Lanna 
would  go  homeward ;  I  would  go  eastward, 
towards  the  coast.  At  sunrise  he  and  myself 
rode  along  the  path  by  ourselves,  to  have  a 
last  quiet  talk.  After  exchanging  mementoes 
with  each  other,  we  parted  in  great  sorrow. 

Once  on  the  natural  rampart,  I  paused  to 
look  back  over  the  kingdom  of  Tannavorkoo. 
It  was  a  lovely  sight  that  my  eyes  rested  on. 
The  mountain  all  glowing  in  the  light,  the 
lake  glittering  like  a  mirror,  the  smoke  rising 
up  gracefully  beyond  the  tree-tops,  the  tall 


Adventures  in  New  Guinea.  227 

trees  of  many  kinds,  the  bright-coloured 
flowers  and  birds,  I  could  have  returned, 
had  not  that  little  grave,  which  rose  before 
my  mind's  eye,  contained  all  that  I  loved, 

I  turned  my  course  slowly  to  the  coast — 
Lanna  had  given  me  the  route,  and  I,  as  a 
sailor,  knew  something  of  the  points  of  the 
compass.  So  I  steered  my  course  towards 
the  scene  of  my  first  adventure  in  New 
Guinea.  Without  much  difficulty,  I  could 
avoid  the  wandering  tribes,  through  the 
speed  of  my  little  pony,  I  reached  Ragek, 
on  the  second  day  towards  evening,  I  rode 
up  to  the  village,  passing  the  old  palisade  in 
which  I  and  my  unfortunate  companions  had 
been  confined.  I  passed  the  place  of  the 
great  fire,  marked  by  the  presence  of  the  vast 
slabs  of  stone,  and  shuddered  to  think  of 
their  fate.  I  was  known  and  recognized 
instantly.  All  the  village  came  to  see  and 
welcome  me.  I  was  installed  at  once  in  a 
place  of  honour. 


Q  2 


2  28        Advenitires  in  New  Guinea, 


CHAPTER  XXVI. 

I  RESOLVED  to  carry  out  my  sclieme  without 
loss  of  time.  I  knew  something  of  the  coast 
of  New  Guinea  and  Austraha,  and  that  some 
settlements  were  to  be  found  along  the 
northern  parts  of  the  latter.  I  knew  too 
that  it  was  quite  a  possible  thing  to  reach 
the  mainland  in  a  small  boat,  although  I 
shrank  from  attempting  the  voyage  in  one 
of  the  native  canoes,  Better  make  the 
attempt  in  a  canoe,  than  remain  for  ever 
amongst  savages.  Such  were  my  thoughts, 
and  such  my  resolution.  My  scheme  to 
escape  from  the  hands  of  the  Rahshes  was 
this  :  to  pretend  that  I  had  the  authority  of 
Lakangeoo  to  go  over  to  the  mainland.  I 
was  at  once  questioned  about  the  old  priest, 
for  he  had  never  returned  to  them.  To  all 
questions  I  gave  evasive,  mysterious  answers. 
I  was  acting  under  the  directions  of  the  priest 
of  Otaroo,  and  was  to  take  a  canoe  to  the  land 
beyond  the  sea.  There  was  some  resistance 
to  this   proposal   at  first,  but  my  influence 


Adventures  in  New  Guinea,         229 

succeeded,  and  I  went  next  day  to  the  shore 
of  the  bay,  mentioned  at  an  earlier  stage  of 
this  narrative.  To  my  great  dehght  I  found 
the  boat  of  the  Yille  du  Havre.  It  had  been 
picked  np  upon  the  coast  by  the  natives, 
and  repaired  by  them.  As  it  had  a  sail  and 
oars  I  resolved  to  use  the  boat  for  my  attempt 
to  escape  to  the  mainland.  A  stock  of  pro- 
visions— yams,  fish,  meat,  and  fowls — was 
laid  in,  enough  for  a  week  or  more.  A  large 
calabash  of  water,  with  a  small  quantity  of 
Ew  beverage,  sufficed  for  liquids;  and, 
feverishly  anxious  as  I  was  to  get  away, 
when  all  was  on  board  I  felt  inclined  to  cast 
off  that  night.  However,  I  waited  till  Otaroo 
came  up  out  of  the  sea,  and  then,  without 
loss  of  time,  cast  off  and  sailed  down  the  bay, 
accompanied  by  many  canoes.  I  do  not  care 
to  weary  the  reader  with  accounts  of  my 
voyage.  Let  it  suffice  to  say  that  before  dark 
I  was  well  down  the  coast.  On  the  second 
day  I  had  rounded  "  South-East  Cape,"  and 
had  trimmed  my  sail  for  the  Australian  shore. 
The  next  day  there  was  no  land  in  sight,  and 
the  little  boat  danced  like  a  cockle-shell  on  the 
heaving  water.  It  made  me  feel  very  solemn 
to  look  up  and  around,  and  to  see  nothing 
but  water  and  sky,  and  to  know  that  I  was 
thus  alone  with  God.     On  the  fourth  day, 


230         Adventures  in  Nezu  Guinea, 

towards  sundown,  I  sighted  a  white  sail,  liko 
the  wing  of  a  gull  in  the  distance.  As  she 
drew  nearer  I  saw  that  she  was  barque- 
rigged,  and  that  she  was  crossing  my  course. 
I  crowded  on  all  sail,  and  felt  my  heart  beat- 
ing wildly.  After  ten  years  of  captivity  I 
shall  see  again  the  old  world  and  home.  But 
the  thought  of  poor  Philip  lying  in  a  watery 
grave  dashed  my  joy  a  little,  The  ship  kept 
on  her  way  steadily.  She  had  seen  me — at 
least  I  thought  so.  She  was  putting  her  helm 
down.  It  was  all  right,  I  should  be  saved. 
Never  shall  I  forget  the  pleasure  of  that 
moment.  But  the  sun  went  down  while  she 
was  yet  a  considerable  distance  from  me, 
Soon  it  w^as  quite  dark.  I  could  see,  however, 
the  ship's  lights  ;  could  fancy — was  it  fancy  ? 
— that  I  could  hear  the  water  rippling  by  the 
ship's  side,  But  she  did  not  get  nearer,  and 
the  darkness  deepened.  I  shouted,  but  no 
answer  came  back ;  not  even  the  echo  of  my 
own  voice. 

Hours  passed,  and  I  was  still  alone  on  the 
sea,  unrescued,  although  so  near  to  safety  and 
home.  During  all  the  night,  I  kept  a  keen 
look-out,  and  watched  with  deepest  anxiety. 
At  times  I  saw  the  ship's  lights,  and  thought 
she  was  lying-to  until  morning ;  at  others  1 
missed  her  altogether,  and  then  felt  that  I  had 


Adventures  in  New  Guinea.         231 

beeD  given  up.    I  plied  the  oars  untiriDgly  to 
keep  up  witli  tlie  ship,  and  hoped  that  by 
dawn  she  would  at  least  be  in  sight.     When 
morning  dawned,  I  was  doomed  to  bitter  dis- 
appointment.    No  ship  could  be  seen.     The 
horizon  was  perfectly  clear.     I  watched  the 
sun  rise  out  of  the  ocean  like  a  disc  of  fire, 
and  saw  his  rays  burnishing  the  world's  great 
highway  ;  but  no  ship,  no  indication  of  sail  or 
spar  could  be  seen  by  the  increasing  light.    I 
was  bitterly  disappointed,  and  was  undecided 
how  to  act.     It  was  evident  that  there  was  a 
prospect    of    ships    j)assing   upward,   that  I 
might  be  picked  up  if  I  kept  on  my  way. 
Should  I  pursue  my  way,  or  strike  for  the 
Australian  shore  ?   I  decided  to  make  for  the 
coast,  and  to  land  upon  the  Australian  con- 
tinent.    So,  with  rising  hope,  I  turned  my 
boat's  head  in  the   direction   of   the   coast, 
guiding  myself  by  the  sun,     Towards  night- 
fall I  sighted  a  dim  bank,  which  my  sailor's 
experience  told  me  was  land.     So  I  deter- 
mined to  lie-to  all  night,  lest  if  I  attempted 
to  approach  the  shore  in  the  dark,  I  should 
be  exposed  to  some  danger.     This  I  accord- 
ingly did,  and,  when  the  day  broke,  kept  on 
my   course   towards  land.      Before  noon  I 
approached  the  shore,  a  rocky,  bold  outline 
and  heard  the  heavy  roll  of  ocean  reverbe- 


232  Adventures  in  New  Guinea. 

riiting  along  the  coast,  and   saw   tlie  spray 
spurting  up   over  the  cliffs.     I  coasted  the 
shore  for  an   hour   before    finding   a   place 
which  permitted   me   to   land.     At   last   an 
opening  presented  itself,  and  into  this  open- 
ing I  ran  my  boat,  and  then  found  that  I 
was  in  still  water,  and  able  to  run  myself 
ashore.     Thank   God,   I   was   at   last   on   a 
civilized  continent,     It  was  a  matter  of  time 
only  to  enable  me  to  reach  Moreton  Bay.     I 
formed  no  plans  at  once,  but  determined  to 
rest  myself,  and  wait  until  next  day  before 
doing  so.     In  the  night  I  slept  in  my  boat, 
and  slept  soundly.     But  when  morning  came 
I  was  in  the  hands  of  a  number  of  Australian 
savages.     They   had    seen  my   boat  coming 
towards  the  land,  and  had  hidden  themselves. 
During  the  night,  or  rather  at  the  dawn  of 
day,  they  had  stolen  upon  me,  and  I  was  in 
their  hands.     They  treated  me  kindly,  and 
seemed   very   much   interested   in   my   fate. 
They,  however,  took  everything  I  had,  and 
destroyed  my  boat.     No  hope  of  escaping  by 
that  remained  to  me.     A  hopeless  captivity 
must  follow,  unless  some  unexpected  chance 
in  my  favour  arose.     From  one  captivity  to 
another !     Alas,   I   was    utterly  cast  down. 
However,  it  is  not  my  intention  to  relate  in 
tliis   place  the   particulars  of  7ny  residence 


Adventures  in  New  Guinea.         233 

among  the  aborigines  of  the  Australian  con- 
tinent. I  lived  among  them  for  two  years, 
and  obtained  much  interesting  information 
respecting  their  habits  and  beliefs.  They 
behaved  to  me  with  unexpected  kindness, 
which  I  can  never  repay.  I  found  them 
capable  of  warm,  generous  impulses,  and 
intelligent  in  a  high  degree.  Their  character 
is,  I  think,  very  much  misunderstood  by 
Europeans  generally 


234  Advenmres  in  New  Guinea 


CHAPTER  XXVII. 

Two  years  passed  away — 3^cars  wliicli  had 
been  spent  in  the  wildest  portion  of  the  great 
island.  At  one  time  in  hunting ;  at  another 
time  in  forays  against  some  other  tribe.  I 
had  thus  learned  that  the  interior  of  the  con- 
tinent was  not  a  great  desert,  but  was  fertile 
and  well  wooded.  There  were,  however,  few 
mountains,  and,  consequently,  few  rivers  of 
any  size.  The  country  was  not  at  all  like  the 
interior  of  New  Guinea.  I  always  endeavoured 
to  keep  near  the  coast,  in  hopes  of  seeing  a 
ship  and  obtaining  deliverance  through  her 
means.  And  so  it  happened  when  the  tribe 
was  camped  near  a  rocky  headland,  which 
ran  out  into  the  sea,  that  one  evening  before 
dark  I  had  seen  from  the  top  of  a  hill,  a 
white  sail.  I  knew  that  it  was  the  sail  of  a 
ship,  and  hoped  that  she  was  approaching  the 
coast.  I  determined  to  make  an  effort  to 
arrest  their  attention.  When  night  came  on 
I  made  a  large  fire  in  a  conspicuous  position, 


Adventures  in  New  Guinea,         235 

and  kept  it  burning  for  some  hours  under  the 
plea  of  driving  away  evil  spirits.  I  saw  the 
fire  leap  up  higher  and  higher,  and  felt  that 
such  a  glare  would  attract  attention  afar  off, 
and  warn  those  who  saw  it  that  there  might 
be  shipwrecked  mariners  thereabouts.  Nor 
was  I  disappointed.  My  signal  was  seen. 
Towards  morning  I  ran  to  the  top  of  the 
cliff,  and  looked  out  across  the  ocean.  I  was 
overjoyed  to  see  the  ship  standing  off  and  on, 
while  a  small  boat  was  pulling  towards  the 
headland.  Running  down  to  the  shore,  to 
the  place  which  the  boat  was  approaching,  I 
was  ready  to  welcome  my  deliverers.  There 
were  five  in  the  boat,  and  on  seeing  me, 
the  one  at  the  helm,  a  sea-captain,  hailed 
me, — 

"  Hollo,  there  !  who  are  you,  mate  ?  " 

"  A  shipwrecked  sailor,  captain,  among  the 
blacks." 

"Any  blacks  about?"  he  asked,  as  he 
sprang  ashore. 

I  explained,  and  he  resolved  to  proceed 
with  caution. 

I  need  not  prolong  my  narrative.  My 
friends,  the  blacks,  were  unwilling  to  part 
with  me,  yet  allowed  me  to  leave  them  with 
many  expressions  of  regret,  and  I  was  shortly 


o 


6         Adventures  in  New  Giivtea. 


afterwards  taken  on  board  tlie  Newcastle  sliip. 
I  was  eagerly  questioned  on  reaching  her 
about  my  captivity  and  adventures,  and  en- 
deavoured to  satisfy  the  curiosity  of  my 
rescuers.  After  I  had  taken  some  refresh- 
ment, I  was  called  aft  to  be  questioned  by 
the  captain. 

"  What  countryman  are  you  ?  "  he  inquired, 
for  I  had  several  times  spoken  in  Orangwok, 
and  had  indeed  but  an  imperfect  apprehension 
of  English.  I  had  not  spoken  it  for  twelve 
years. 

*'  What  countryman  are  you  ?  " 

"  French,  sir,"  was  my  reply. 

"  French  !  "  he  exclaimed,  speaking  in  that 
tongue.  "  From  what  part  of  France  do  you 
come  ?  " 

"  From  the  province  of  Maine." 

"  And  what  is  your  name,  my  man  ?  "  he 
asked,  with  great  interest  in  his  tones ;  "  I 
too  am  from  Maine,  from  the  village  of — " 

"  What !  "  I  exclaimed,  "  you  are  not  Philip 
Rigaud  of  the  Ville  dii  Havre  ?  "  I  scanned 
his  face  closely,  as  I  asked  the  question,  bub 
twelve  years  alter  most  men  much  and  alter 
some  men  greatly  ;  yet  I  could  see,  I  fancied, 
a  resemblance  to  my  old  friend.  In  another 
moment  I  threw  myself  upon  his  neck,  and 


Adventures  in  New  Guinea.         237 

embraced  him.  I  knew  it  was  Philip  who 
stood  before  me. 

"  You,  Louis,  you  ahve?"  was  all  that  he 
could  saj,  in  broken  tones. 

Philip  was  not  dead.  The  wave  had  swept 
the  boat  away,  had  endangered  the  safety  of 
the  crew,  yet  had  not  swallowed  them  up. 
They  had  kept  away  from  the  coast,  as  the 
waves  were  breaking  for  miles  along  the 
shore.  After  the  subsiding  of  the  storm, 
they  continued  their  course  down  the  coast 
and  endeavoured  to  reach  the  Australian  con- 
tinent. On  the  third  day,  a  schooner,  driven 
out  of  her  course  by  the  hurricane,  picked 

them  up,  and  they  were  saved. 

***** 

Philip  was  now,  and  had  been  for  several 

years,  master  of  the  Newcastle  ship.     He  was 

able  to  offer  me  the  post  of  second  mate  with 

him,  which  I  gladly  accepted.     I  am  to  be 

first  mate  shortly,  and  with  this  expectation 

I  am  content.     I  am  with  my  old  friend — 

the  friend  of  my  boyhood. 

***** 

Once  Philip  had  returned  to  France  to  his 
early  home.  His  parents  were  dead.  So  too 
was  my  mother.  She  had,  however,  received 
my  last  letter  before  I  sailed  for  New  Guinea, 


238         Adventures  in  New  Guinea. 

aud  had  been,  greatly  comforted  by  it.  "  Alas  ! 
my  mother,  never  shall  I  see  thee  agam  in 
tbis  earthly  Hfe!" 

My  story  is  ended.      The  reader   will,  I 
trust,  pardon  all  its  faults. 


THE   END. 


aiLBEBI  £   BITINQTOX,  LTD.,  ST.    JOUn'B  HOUSE,  CLESEENWBLL  BD.,  I.OHDOW. 


Uniform  with  this  Volume. 

With  numerous  Illustrations,  2s.  6d. ;  gilt  edges,  3s.  Gd.  each. 


Dick  Oheveley.    Br  W.  H.  G.  Kingston. 
Heir  of  Kilflnnan.    By  W.  H.  G.  Kingston. 
Off  to  tiie  Wilds.     By  G.  Manville  Fenn. 
The  Two   Supercareroes.    By   W.  H.  G. 

Kingston. 
The  Silver  Canon.    By  G.  ManvUle  Fenn. 
Under    the    Meteor    Flag.       By  Hany 

Cotlingwood. 
Jack  Archer :   a  Tala  of  th«  CMmea.    By  O. 

A.  Henty. 
The     Mutiny     on     boardi   the      Ship 

"  Leander."    By  B.  Haldmann. 
"With   Axe   and   Rifle;    or,    The    Western 

Pioneers.    By  W.  H.  G.  Kingston. 
Red  Cloud,  the  Solitary  Siotix :  a  Tale  of 

the  Great     Prairie.      By   C!olanel    Sir    WUllam 
Butler,  K.C.B. 

The  Voyage  of  the  Aurora,    By  Harry 

CoUingwood. 
Charmouth    Grange:    a  Tala  of   the  17th 

Century.     By  J.  Percy  Groves. 
Snowshoea  and  Canoes.     By   W.   H.    a 

Kingston. 
The  Son  of  the  Constable  of  France. 

By  Louis  Kousselet. 
Captain  Mugford ;     or,  Oi«i  Salt  and  Fresh 

Water  Tutors.     Edited  by  W.  H.  G.  Kingston. 
The   Cornet  of  Horse ;    a    Tale    ot    Marl- 

boroiigh't  Wars.    By  G.  A.  Henty. 
The  Adventures  of  Captain  Mago.    By 

Leon  Caliun. 
Noble  Words  and  Noble  Deeds. 
The  Bling  of  the  Tigers.    By  Rousselet 
Hans   Brinker;    or.    The   SUyer  Skates.    By 

Mrs.  Dodge. 
The  Drummer-Boy;  a  Story  of  the  time  of 

Washington.     By  Rousselet. 
Adventures  in  New  Guinea ;  The  Nar- 
rative of  Louis  Tr^gance. 
The  Crusoes  of  Guiana.    By  Boussenard. 
The   Gold-Seekers.    A  Sequel  to  the  above. 

By  Boussenard. 
Winning  his  Spurs:  «  Tale  of  the  Crusade. 

By  G.  A.  Henty. 
The  Blue  Banner,    By  Leon  Cahun. 
Ben    Burton ;  or.  Bom  and  Bred  at  Sea.     By 

W.  H.  G.  Kingston. 
Adventures  on    the    Great    Hunting 

Grounds  of  the  World.     By  V.  Meunier. 
The  Three  Deserters;   or.  Ran  Away  from 

the  Dutch.    By  IM.  T.  H.  Perelaer. 
My  Kalulu,  Prince,  King,  and  Slave. 

By  U.  M.  Stanley. 


Adventures  of  a  Young  Naturalist. 

By  Lucien  Biart     Edited  and  adapted  by  Parker 

Gillmore  (Ubique). 
The  Startling  Exploits  of  the  Doctor, 

By  C61iere. 
The   Brothers   Rantzau:    a  Story  of  the 

Vosges.     By  Erckmann-Chatrlan. 
The  Serpent  Charmer.    By  Louis  Rousselet. 
Stories  of  the   Gorilla  Country,       By 

Paul  Du  ChaiUu 
The  Conquest  of  the  Moon.    By  A.  Laurie. 
The  Maid  of  the  Ship  "Golden  Age." 

By  H.  K.  Maclean. 
The  Frozen  Pirate.    By  W.  Clark  Ruasell. 
The  Marvellous  Country.  ByS.W.  Cozzens. 
The  Mountain  Kingdom.    By  D.  Lawson 

Johnstone. 
A  Thousand  Miles  In  the  "Rob  Roy" 

.  Canoe.     By  John  MacGregor  ("  Rob  Roy  "). 
Blacks  and  Bushrangers  ;  or.  Adventurer 

in  Queensland.     By  E.  B.  Kennedy. 
Sir  liUdar :  a  Tale  of  Love,  War,  and  Adventure 

In  the  days  of  the  great  Queen  Bess.    By  Talbot 

Baines  Reed. 
Wild  Life  under  the  Equator.     By  Paul 

Du  Chaillu. 
My  Rambles  in  the  New  World.     By 

Lucien  Biart. 
New  York  to  Brest  in  Seven  Hours. 

By  A.  Laurie. 
Rob  Roy    on   the    Balti*.     By  John  Mac- 
Gregor, M.A. 
Bevis.      By  Richard  JeSeries.      Edited  by  Q.  A. 

Henty. 
The    Cobbler    of   Oomikeranium.     By 

Rev.  A.  N.  Malan. 
Strange    Stories    of   Adventure.       By 

Captain  Mayne  Reid. 
The   Azteo   Treasure-House.     By  T.  A. 

Janvier. 

How  Martin  Drake  found  Ms  Father. 

By  G.  Norway. 
Roger  Ingleton,  Minor,    By  T.  B.  Reed. 
Axel  Ebersen«  the  Graduate  of  Upsala, 

By  A.  Laurie, 
Sandy  Carmichael.    By  C.  J.  Hyne. 
The  Priceless  Orchid.    By  Percy  Ainslie. 
An  Inca  Queen.    By  J.  Evelyn, 
Voyage   Alone   in    the    Yawl    "Rob 

Roy."     By  J.  MacGregor. 
Adrift  in  the  Pacilic.     By  Jules  Verne. 
The  Purchase  of  the  North  Pole.    Bjr 

Jules  Verne. 


London:  SAMPSON  LOW,  MARSTON  &  COMPANY,  Ltd., 

St.  Domstah'8  Housb,  Fstteb  Lane,  Fleet  SiaKET,  E.G. 


NEW  ISSUE  OF    POPULAR    BOOKS. 

Small  crown  8vo,  cloth,  2s. ;  gilt  edges,  2s.  Gd.  each. 


Most  of  the  following  are  especially  adapted  for  GiBLS,  for  SoHOOL 
Feizes,  &c. 


MISS  ALCOTT. 

1.  Little  Men. 

6.  Little  Women,  and  LittleWomeu 
W  edded. 

11.  Under  the  Lilacs.    Illustrated. 

12.  Jimmy's  Cruise  in  the  "  Pina- 

fore." 

14.  An  Old-fashioned  Girl. 

15.  A  Rose  in  Bloom. 

16.  Eight  Cousins;    or.  The  Aunt 

HilL     Illustrated. 

17.  Jack  and  Gill :  a  Village  Story. 

18.  Lulu's  Library.    Illustrated. 

19.  Silver  Pitchers. 

20.  Work,  and  Beginning  Again  :  a 

Story  of  Experience.    lUus- 
Btrated. 

27.  Aunt  Jo's  Scrap  Bag. 

28.  Shawl  Straps. 

29.  Spinni;  g  Wheel  Stories. 


MRS.  WHITNEY. 

2.  Hitherto:  a  Story  of  Yesterdays. 

8.  We  Girla. 

9.  The  Other  Girls. 

21.  A    Summer    in    Leslie    Gold- 

thwaite's  Life. 

22.  Faith  Gartney's  Girlhood, 

23.  Beal  Folks. 

39.  The  Gayworthya. 


MRS.  H.  BEECHER  STOWE. 

25.  My  Wife  and  I. 
24.  Dred :    a   Tale   of    the   Great 
Swamp. 

30,  We  and  Our  Neighbours. 

31.  Ghost   in  the  Mill,  and  other 

Stories. 

E.  P.  ROE. 

41.  Nattire'fl  Serial  Story. 


CAPTAIN  SAMUELS. 
3.  From     Forecastle     to     Cabin. 
Illustrated. 


W.  L.  ALDEN. 

10.  Adventures  of  Jimmy  Brown. 

Illustrated. 
38.  Trying  to  find  Europe. 


PHIL  ROBINSON. 

4.  In  my  Indian  Garden. 
13.  Under  the  Punkah. 


MADAME  DE  WITT. 
2S.  An  Only  Sister. 


C.  DUDLEY  WARNER. 

32.  In  the  Wilderness. 

35,  My  Summer  in  a  Garden. 


X.  B.  SAINTINE. 
33,  Piociola:  or.  The  Prison  Flower. 


SAXE  HOLM. 
84,  Draxy  Miller's  Dowry. 


J.  SANDEAU. 
S6.  Seagull  Bock. 


J.  BUNYAN. 

37.  Pilgrim's  Progress. 


MRS.  TOOLEY. 
40,  Life  of  Harriet  Beecher  Stow*. 


LONDON: 
SAMPSON   LOW,   MARSTON   &  COMPANY, 

Limited, 

St,  Dunstan's  House,  Fetter  Lank,  E.O. 


(P 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 

Los  Angeles 

This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last  date  stamped  below. 


MAY  1  0  1989 


)rm  L9-Series  4939 


DU    740.        T716A 


L  005  328  990  6 


^_UC  SOUTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 


AA    000  982  0 


0     1